QUALITY SYSTEM MANUAL

VOLUME 1

9220 – 39 Avenue • Edmonton, AB T6E 5T9 • Phone (780) 436-9570 • Fax (780) 434-0811
#6 – 210 MacAlpine Crescent • Fort McMurray, AB T9H 4A6 • Phone (780) 790-9722 • Fax (780) 790-1610
www.chemco-elec.com
 Quality Manual

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION Page

0 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1

1 INTRODUCTION 4
1.1 Purpose
1.2 Scope
1.3 Exclusions
1.4 Proprietary Information
1.5 Codes and Standards
1.6 Control of Codes and Standards
1.7 Chemco and Customer Responsibilities
1.8 Approved Certification Organizations
1.9 Variances
1.10 Safety
1.11 Access
1.12 Application of Manual

2 QUALITY POLICY 7

3 TERMINOLOGY 8

4 QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 10

4.1 General Requirements
4.1.1 Quality Management System
4.1.2 Sequence and Interaction of Processes
4.2 Documentation Requirements
4.2.1 General
4.2.2 Quality Manual
4.2.3 Control of QMS Documents
4.2.4 Control of Documents of External Origin
4.2.5 Control of QMS Records
4.2.6 Control of Project Quality Records
4.2.7 Record Retention

5 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY 18
5.1 Management Commitment
5.2 Customer Focus
5.3 Quality Policy
5.4 Planning
5.4.1 Quality Objectives
5.4.2 Quality Management System Planning

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 1 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION Page

5.5 Responsibility, Authority and Communication

5.5.1 Responsibility and Authority
5.5.2 Management Representative
5.5.3 Internal Communication
5.6 Management Review
5.6.1 General
5.6.2 Review Input
5.6.3 Review Output

6 RESOURCE MANAGEMENT 21
6.1 Provision of Resources
6.2 Human Resources
6.2.1 General
6.2.2 Qualifications and Training
6.3 Infrastructure
6.4 Work Environment

7 PRODUCT REALIZATION 23
7.1 Planning of Product Realization (Quality Plans)
7.1.1 Quality Planning
7.1.2 Inputs and Outputs
7.1.3 Quality Plan Development
7.1.4 Documentation of Quality Plans
7.2 Customer Related Processes
7.2.1 Determination of Requirements Related to the
Product-Bid Review
7.2.2 Review of Requirements Related to the Product-
Contract Review
7.2.3 Customer Communication
7.3 Design and Development - EXCLUDED
7.4 Purchasing
7.4.1 Purchasing Process
7.4.2 Purchasing Information
7.4.3 Verification of Purchased Product
7.5 Production and Service Provision
7.5.1 Control of Production and Service Provision
7.5.2 Identification and Traceability
7.5.3 Customer Property
7.5.4 Preservation of Product
7.6 Control of Monitoring and Measuring Devices
7.6.1 General

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 2 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 0 - TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION Page

7.6.2 Calibration
7.6.3 Use of Test Equipment

8 MEASUREMENT, ANALYSIS and IMPROVEMENT 32

8.1 General
8.2 Monitoring and Measuring
8.2.1 Customer Satisfaction
8.2.2 Monitoring Customer Satisfaction
8.2.3 Monitoring and Measurement of Processes
8.2.4 Monitoring and Measurement of Product
8.3 Control of Nonconforming Product
8.3.1 Purpose
8.3.2 Preparation of Nonconformance Reports
8.3.3 Routing / Disposition of Nonconformance Reports
8.3.4 Close-Out of Nonconformance Reports
8.3.5 Nonconformance Process
8.4 Analysis of Data
8.5 Improvement
8.5.1 Continual Improvement
8.5.2 Corrective Action
8.5.3 Preventive Action
8.5.4 Reporting and Documenting

ASSOCIATED DOCUMENTATION Volume

HR-028 Quality Policy 1

QSP Quality System Procedures 1
QS Quality System Exhibits 1
QP-100 Low Voltage Electrical Procedures 1
QP-300 Instrumentation Procedures 1
QP-400 Communications Procedures 1
QC-100 Low Voltage Electrical Exhibits 1
QC-300 Instrumentation Exhibits 1
QC-400 Communications Exhibits 1
QC-500 Maintenance / Small Job Exhibits 1

QP-200 High Voltage & Protection Procedures 2

QC-200 High Voltage & Protection Exhibits 2

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 3 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.1 PURPOSE

This manual describes the Quality Management System (QMS) used by

Chemco Electrical Contractors Ltd., to ensure the quality of its products and
services.

1.2 SCOPE

Chemco is an Alberta owned company with over forty years experience in the
construction industry offering: electrical, instrumentation, fibre optic procurement
and installation, and high voltage installation, testing and commissioning
services.

This manual is issued for continuing use, however, it is not retro-active.

1.3 EXCLUSIONS

1.3.1 Chemco does not include design in this quality system, since its
Customers provide the design.

1.3.2 Pressure piping installation and testing is governed by our “Construction,

Repair, Alteration or Erection of Pressure Piping in accordance with ASME
B31.3 – Process Piping” program manual.

1.4 PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

Authorized representatives of our Customers may obtain a copy of the quality

manual upon request. The manual and referenced documents are considered
proprietary information and are available only for review. No documents may be
reproduced or circulated without the expressed written authorization of the
Company.

1.5 CODES AND STANDARDS

1.5.1 The installation of materials, equipment and facilities shall be installed

and tested as appropriate, conforming to the following approved
documents:

• Project Drawings
• Project Specifications
• Canadian Electrical Code Part I
• Alberta Safety Codes Act
• Vendor instructions

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 4 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION

• NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications for medium and high

voltage

1.5.2 The inspection and testing of the installation for the facilities shall be
carried out in accordance with this manual. This manual, in conjunction
with approved checking, testing and operating instructions from
equipment manufacturers, shall be followed to determine that the
facilities are properly installed and are without defects or omissions.

1.6 CONTROL OF CODES AND STANDARDS

1.6.1 Chemco shall maintain the most current issue of the Canadian Electrical
Code Part I. The Quality Manager shall issue the CEC to personnel, as
deemed appropriate, as a controlled document.

1.6.2 Code and regulatory notices and bulletins in Alberta are maintained and
issued via the " " system. The Quality Manager shall be
registered with this provincial system to obtain and subsequently issue
as controlled documents, the latest published notices and bulletins to
Quality Personnel within the Company.

1.7 CHEMCO and CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES

1.7.1 It shall be the Customer’s responsibility to ensure that all drawings and
specifications meet applicable codes and standards, and bear the cost of
the same.

1.7.2 The Customer shall be responsible for all materials and equipment
certification and labeling to recognized Canadian Standards, by an
accredited Certification Organization which is authorized to provide
certification under the Safety Codes Act (In Alberta) or (Government
Standards elsewhere) for all Customer supplied materials and
equipment.

1.7.3 Chemco shall be responsible for all materials and equipment certification
and labeling to recognized Canadian Standards, by an accredited
Certification Organization which is authorized to provide certification
under the Safety Codes Act (In Alberta) or (Government Standards
elsewhere) for all Chemco supplied materials and equipment.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 5 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 1 - INTRODUCTION

1.8 APPROVED CERTIFICATION ORGANIZATIONS

1.8.1 Recognized Certification Organizations for materials and equipment are

those recognized under the Alberta Safety Codes Act and Regulations
and Alberta “ ”.

1.9 VARIANCES

1.9.1 Variances may be issued by a Safety Codes Officer under the provision
of Section 34 of the Alberta Safety Codes Act, provided the issuer is of
the opinion that the variance provides approximately equivalent or
greater safety performance with respect to persons and property.

1.10 SAFETY

1.10.1 Chemco shall establish and follow a system of control through work
permit procedures incorporating tags, work authorizations, isolation
permits, and lockout procedures, to establish an effective safety
procedure to protect personnel while working on and operating
potentially energized electrical circuits.

1.11 ACCESS

1.11.1 Chemco shall allow free access to work sites and quality records during
normal working hours to personnel authorized by the Customer, internal
and external auditors, and authorized government inspectors.

1.12 APPLICATION OF MANUAL

1.12.1 There are numerous procedures and exhibits included, or referred to, in
this quality system manual and associated documentation. Not all
procedures and exhibits apply to all projects at all times, therefore, it is
the project specific Quality Plan and Inspection and Test Plan (ITP)
which governs the application and use of these procedures and exhibits
for a particular project.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 6 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 2 – QUALITY POLICY

The Quality Policy is a separate document, HR-028, included in Volume 1 of the Quality
Management System Manuals.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 7 of 35

 Quality Manual

SECTION 3- TERMINOLOGY

3.1 ACCREDITED AGENCY – a private sector agency that has received

accreditation by the Alberta Safety Codes Council to administer the Alberta
Safety Codes Act and to provide safety inspection services to municipalities,
corporations or the Province of Alberta.

3.2 ACCREDITED CORPORATION – a Corporation who has received accreditation

from the Alberta Safety Codes Council to administer the Alberta Safety Codes
Act within their corporate facilities in Alberta.

3.3 CERTIFICATION ORGANIZATIONS – are those accredited Certification

Organizations who are recognized and approved by the Standards Council of
Canada to approve electrical products in Canada. This can refer to both
Canadian Certification Organizations and certain foreign Certification
Organizations.

3.4 COMPANY – means Chemco Electrical Contractors Ltd.

3.5 C.S.A. / CSA – The Canadian Standards Association.

3.6 CUSTOMER – the party to which products and services are provided. The term
“Customer” and “Client” have the same meaning.

3.7 DISPOSITION – is the action and/or documentation required to correct or resolve

a nonconformance.

3.8 INSTALLATION – the sum total of all plans, specifications, equipment and
materials pertaining to a specific contract.

3.9 INSTALLED - equipment and materials placed and secured at a designated

location or position and for which Chemco characterizes the installed items as
complete.

3.10 NONCONFORMANCE – is any unauthorized deviation from a legislative code,

Customer’s standard, Chemco standard/procedure, or any deficiency in
characteristic, documentation, or procedure, which renders the quality of an item
unacceptable or indeterminate.

Examples include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Missing, incorrect, or inadequate drawings or documentation

• Code violations
• Lack of evidence of approved certification organization approval
• Unauthorized deviations from specifications

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 8 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 3- TERMINOLOGY

• Unauthorized deviations from prescribed processing, inspection or test

procedures
• Physical defects
• Test failures

3.11 SAFETY CODES INSPECTIONS – for projects in Alberta, electrical work shall be
inspected for compliance using the appropriate agencies as approved by the
Alberta Safety Codes Council, Electrical Technical Council.

3.12 SAFETY CODES OFFICER – is the individual as defined by the Safety Codes
Act, Province of Alberta, who is authorized to carry out inspection services and
enforce safety codes requirements for accredited corporations or accredited
agencies.

3.13 SUPPLIER – is a firm or corporation providing equipment, material or services to

the Customer, or to Chemco.

3.14 THIS MANUAL – means specifically, this Quality Manual.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 9 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1.1 The Quality Management System

The Company has established this Quality Manual, describing the Quality
Management System (QMS) and its processes used to achieve quality
and to continually improve its effectiveness as follows:

Quality Management System

Management
Review
5.6

Corrective /
Quality
Preventive
Planning
Action 5.4
8.5
Processes:

Bid Review
Contract Review
Purchasing
Receiving
Preservation and Storage
Control of Nonconforming Product
Inspection and Testing
Customer Process
Feedback / Control
8.2.3
Analysis
8.2

Assessment
8.4

4.1.2 Sequence and Interaction of Processes

The sequence and interaction of the key processes required for quality is
documented in the following flowchart:

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 10 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

START QMS PROCESSES, SEQUENCE & INTERACTION

Customer Inquiry
or Revision

Bid & Bid Review

7.2.1

Customer
Approval

Award? No

Yes

Contract Review Quality Planning

7.2.2 7.1

Customer
Purchasing
Supplied Product
7.4.1
7.5.2
Inspection & Testing
7.5.1 / 8.2.4
Inspection and
Release / Delivery END
Test

Receiving
(Verification Of
Installation
Purchased Product)
7.4.3

Control of
Preservation /
Nonconforming
Storage
Product
7.5.3
8.3

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 11 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4.2 DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS

4.2.1 General

The Quality Management System documentation consists of 3 levels

(Level 3 being the highest level) as follows:

Quality Manual
Level 3
...establishes the Quality
Policy and describes the
overall Quality Management
System

Procedures
Level 2
...detail the implementation requirements for the
various operations in support of the Quality
Manual

Quality Records Level 1

...provide the objective evidence of compliance

Higher level documents may make reference to lower level documents.

The lower level documents, are in support of the higher level documents
and provide an increased level of detail for the operations.

4.2.2 Quality Manual

This manual documents; the scope of the QMS, the justification for any
exclusions, the QMS procedures or references to them, and a description
of the interaction between the processes of the QMS.

The development, maintenance and control of this manual, is the Quality

Manager’s responsibility.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 12 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Assigned holders of this manual and all associated quality documents are
responsible for maintaining their controlled copies in accordance with the
latest revisions.

4.2.3 Control of QMS Documents

4.2.3.1 Initial issue and subsequent revisions to the manual, procedures

and forms are developed, reviewed for adequacy, approved and
issued as follows:
Item DEVELOP / REVIEW & FINAL
MAINTAIN ISSUE
EDIT APPROVE APPROVAL
Quality Policy Mgmt Pres Mgmt Pres HR & QM
Quality Manual QM Mgmt QM QM QM
Quality System
QC / QM QM QM QM QM
Procedures
Technical
QC / QM QM QM QM QM
Procedures
Inspection & Test
QC / QM QM QM QM QM
Exhibits / Forms
Quality Plan
CM / QM CM / QM QM CM / QM QM
Format
ITP’ Format QM QM QM QM QM
QMS Records N/A N/A QM QM QM

Legend: Pres-President; Mgmt-Management; PM-Project Manager; CM-Construction

Manager; QM-Quality Manager; QC-Level 2 or 3 Quality Personnel. HR – Human
Resources; Note: A "Record" is a completed document / form or logged as electronic
data.

4.2.3.2 Any employee may propose new documents or changes and

improvements to existing documents. Proposed documents and
changes shall be submitted to the Quality Manager for review,
approval and implementation. Revisions to documents shall be
controlled in accordance with the above-tabled requirements.

4.2.3.3 QMS documents shall be identified by: a document number

(identifier), revision level, effective date and number of pages
placed in the document footer.

4.2.3.4 The Quality Manager shall control and issue the QMS documents
and maintain a log showing the revision history, current approved
status and distribution to their points of use.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 13 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4.2.3.5 Controlled / Uncontrolled Documents

• Only controlled copies are used by Company personnel

• Uncontrolled copies may be issued by the Quality
Manager, for information, and shall be marked
“Uncontrolled”
• Uncontrolled copies are not maintained with subsequent
revisions

4.2.3.6 Recipients of documents are responsible to replace former

revisions with the latest revisions.

4.2.3.7 The Quality Manager, with input from Company personnel, shall
review existing documentation for adequacy on an ongoing basis.

4.2.3.8 Documents shall be maintained in any of the following formats:

• Paper
• Electronic / Magnetic Media
• Optical Media

4.2.3.9 QMS documents maintained as electronic / magnetic, shall be

stored on the corporate office server and shall be regularly
“backed up”.

4.2.4 Control of Documents of External Origin

4.2.4.1 Documents supplied by the Customer or other outside parties and

their subsequent revisions are reviewed to ensure that:

• documents are legible

• drawings are “Issued for Construction”
• revision levels are identified
• documents are issued to their points of use

4.2.4.2 Documents shall be stored in logical groups and appropriately

labeled; on plan holders, in binders or in file folders and/or stored
electronically, for ready identification and retrieval.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 14 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4.2.4.3 Obsolete documents shall be removed from points of use, or if

retained for any reason, marked: “Void”, “Obsolete” or “For
Reference Only”, or equivalent, to clearly indicate their status.

4.2.4.4 Documents shall be logged by retaining transmittal files, by

electronic lists, or both.

4.2.4.5 Control of Codes and Standards adopted by regulatory authorities

shall be the responsibility of the Quality Manager.

4.2.4.6 Control of documents at the job site shall be the responsibility of

an appointed document control individual on a per job basis.

4.2.4.7 Incoming documents such as Safety Codes Reports, Requests for

Information (RFIs), External Audit Reports, Project Bulletins or
Reports or any other correspondence related to instructions and
expectations of the Customer or Requlatory Authorities shall be
issued to the Project Quality Manager without delay.

4.2.4.8 All marked-up “As-Built” drawings produced by Chemco are to be

recorded on an “As-Built” transmittal form. One copy of all
marked up “As-Built” drawings shall be forwarded to the Customer
following completion of the work package or as agreed in advance
with the Customer.

4.2.5 Control of QMS Records

4.2.5.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for control of QMS records.

4.2.5.2 QMS records consist of:

• Audit Reports
• Nonconformance Reports
• Corrective & Preventive Action Reports
• Management Review Minutes and Records
• Customer Feedback Records
• QMS Document Control Log
• QMS Actions (Improvement) Records
• Analysis / Trending Reports

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 15 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

4.2.6 Control of Project Quality Documents

4.2.6.1 Initial issue and subsequent revisions to project specific quality

documents are developed, reviewed for adequacy, approved and
issued as follows:
DEVELOP / REVIEW & IMPLEMENT / FINAL
Item EDIT APPROVE MAINTAIN APPROVAL
ISSUE

Project Specific
Inspection & Test QC QC / QM QC QM QC
Exhibits / Forms
CM / PM / PM / QM /
Quality Plans PM / QC PM / QC PM
QM / QC QC
ITP’s QC QC QC QC QC

Quality Records N/A N/A QC / QCI QC QC

Legend: PM-Project Manager; CM-Construction Manager; QM-Quality Manager; QC-

Level 2 or 3 Quality Personnel; QCI-Level 1 Quality Control Inspector. Note: A
"Record" is a completed document / form or logged as electronic data.

4.2.6.2 Chemco shall file quality documents in the job file, which shall
reference job titles and any other identifying numbers assigned to
a particular package of work.

4.2.6.3 The job file documents shall be stored in logical groups and
appropriately labeled; on plan holders, in binders or in file folders.
Files shall be segregated by job, and by work package or by
system as appropriate. All files shall be organized so as to be
readily retrievable.

4.2.6.4 Quality records generally consist of the following and shall be

identified , as applicable, in the Inspection and Test Plan(s):

• Nonconformance Report Log

• Nonconformance Reports
• Receiving Inspection Reports and Logs
• Storage and Preservation Inspection Reports and Logs
• Drawing Log
• As-Built Drawing Record / Log
• Completed Inspection and Test Records
• Quality Plans
• Completed Inspection and Test Plan(s)
• Welders Qualification Log
• Test Equipment Calibration Records and Log
• Punch Lists

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 16 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 4 – QUALITY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

• Signature log
• Clarifications, Change Requests and RFI’s
• Turnover Documentation
• All other records identified in the Inspection and Test Plan(s)

4.2.6.5 Chemco shall assign project personnel to be directly responsible

for ensuring that the above requirements for quality records are
met.

4.2.7 Records Retention

4.2.7.1 Chemco shall maintain quality records for five years after
completion of the project, after which they may be disposed of.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 17 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 5 – MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

5.1 MANAGEMENT COMMITMENT

Management’s commitment is to establish and maintain this quality management

system.

5.2 CUSTOMER FOCUS

The Company reviews Customer requirements prior to issuing contract offerings,

and prior to acceptance of orders and contracts to ensure the Customer's stated
requirements are met.

5.3 QUALITY POLICY

5.3.1 The Company’s quality policy is stated in Section 2 of this manual.

Management ensures this policy is communicated, and understood
throughout all levels of the Company. (Article 5.5.3.)

5.3.2 Management reviews the quality policy at least annually for its continuing
suitability.

5.4 PLANNING

5.4.1 Quality Objectives

Quality objectives, consistent with quality policy, for relevant functions,

levels and product within the Company, are determined from time to time
during management reviews.

5.4.2 Quality Management System Planning

Planning is primarily implemented through this quality management

system manual, the establishment of the quality policy and management
review to ensure continuing effective planning consistent with quality
objectives.

5.5 RESPONSIBILITY AUTHORITY and COMMUNICATION

5.5.1 Responsibility and Authority

Management ensures responsibilities and authorities are defined and

communicated within the Company as described herein.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 18 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 5 – MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

5.5.2 Management Representative

The Quality Manager is the appointed management representative who

shall:

• ensure that QMS processes are established, documented and

maintained
• report to management on the performance of the QMS and any
need for improvement
• promote awareness of Company and Customer requirements
throughout the organization

5.5.3 Internal Communication

The Company establishes a corporate organization chart setting out key

positions, responsibilities and lines of communication.

The Company establishes organization charts for projects as required,

identifying key positions, responsibilities and lines of communication.
These organization charts are communicated to project management,
supervisory personnel and to the Customer.

Organization charts are revised from time to time as required to meet

changing conditions and assignment of personnel.

Internal communication is also effected by Company news publications

such as the “chemco connector”, “QUALITY BULLETIN” (s),
personnel briefings, awareness training, posted notices and
communication by electronic media.

5.6 MANAGEMENT REVIEW

5.6.1 General

A formal review of the Quality System shall be performed at least annually

by corporate and field representatives as necessary to evaluate necessary
updates and to include for any new improvements and innovative
technical application developments.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 19 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 5 – MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

5.6.2 Review Input

Inputs for management review include: external audit results, customer

feedback, employee feedback, product conformity, process conformity,
corrective and preventive actions, previous management reviews.

5.6.3 Review Output

Output from management review is in the form of minutes, documenting:

the effectiveness of the QMS, improvements to the QMS and the
assignment of action items.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 20 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 6 – RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

6.1 PROVISION of RESOURCES

The Company determines and provides appropriate resources to implement and

maintain the quality management system and to meet Customer requirements.

6.2 HUMAN RESOURCES

6.2.1 General

The Company ensures that personnel performing work that affects quality,
have the appropriate education, training, skills and experience.

6.2.2 Qualifications and Training

6.2.2.1 Personnel are qualified for assigned tasks based on education,

training, skills and experience as required.

6.2.2.2 Craft installation personnel shall hold valid certification under the
Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or hold valid
Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal Certification.

6.2.2.3 Upon hire, craft qualification certificates (cards) are obtained and
copied to the job file as proof of qualification. Copies of these
certificates shall be forwarded to the corporate office.

6.2.2.4 Chemco has implemented a resources database at the corporate

office in which craft qualifications are scanned into records. Over
time, all Chemco craft qualifications will be recorded in the
database.

6.2.2.5 Procedure QSP-090 describes qualification, awareness and

training requirements in more detail.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 21 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 6 – RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

6.3 INFRASTRUCTURE

The Company determines, provides and maintains the infrastructure required to

achieve conformity to product requirements as follows:

• Office workspace
• Storage space
• Utilities
• Communications
• Computer hardware and software
• Tools, equipment and maintenance
• Vehicles and maintenance
• Temporary facilities where required

6.4 WORK ENVIRONMENT

6.4.1 The Company maintains a work environment appropriate for the tasks to
be performed including comfortable indoor workspace for office work,
heated and non-heated storage for equipment and materials as required.

6.4.2 Management shall correct environmental conditions adverse to quality.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 22 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.1 PLANNING OF PRODUCT REALIZATION (QUALITY PLANS)

7.1.1 Quality Planning

A quality plan is a document specifying the processes of the quality

management system, including product realization processes, and the
resources, to be applied, by whom and when, to a specific product, project
or contract.

7.1.2 Inputs and Outputs

Inputs and outputs to quality plans are characterized as follows:

CUSTOMER REQUIREMENTS
(Plans, Specifications, Codes, Standards)

PLANNED
CHEMCO QUALITY SYSTEM RESULTS
PROCEDURES
QUALITY PLAN (Completed
Project)

INSPECTION & TEST REQUIREMENTS

(& Acceptance Criteria) RECORDS

HUMAN TEST
RESOURCES EQUIPMENT
INFRASTRUCTURE
& WORK
ENVIRONMENT

7.1.3 Quality Plan Development

Chemco determines the following:

• quality objectives and requirements for the product from the

Customer’s stated requirements
• noticeable discrepancies or unclear information in the construction
work package(s) requiring further clarification by the Customer
• the need to establish special processes and documents
• the resources specific to the product
• required verification, validation, monitoring, inspection and test
activities specific to the product and the criteria for acceptance
• records needed to provide evidence of compliance

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 23 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.1.4 Documentation of Quality Plans

7.1.4.1 Documentation shall consist of the following, as a minimum:

a) this quality manual

b) a project specific organization chart describing the key

positions, responsibilities and lines of communication

c) an Inspection and Test Plan identifying:

• the tasks to be performed and by whom

• the associated quality control activities to be
performed
• the controlling procedure(s) or instruction(s)
• the acceptance criteria
• the verification document(s) / record(s) to be used
• the activity hold, witness, surveillance and review
points to be observed by Chemco and by the
Customer

7.1.4.2 Quality plans shall be relevant to the contract scope of work.

7.2 CUSTOMER RELATED PROCESSES

7.2.1 Determination of Requirements Related to the Product - Bid Review

7.2.1.1 Bids are reviewed prior to submitting contract offerings, to ensure:

the Customer’s stated requirements are included, or otherwise
clarified in writing, and the Company has the ability to meet the
requirements.

7.2.2 Review of Requirements Related to the Product – Contract Review

7.2.2.1 Contract reviews are conducted once contracts are awarded to

ensure the contract does not differ from previous offerings. Any
differences shall be communicated and resolved with the
Customer in writing.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 24 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.2.3 Customer Communication

7.2.3.1 An open channel of communication is established with the

Customer’s representative(s) during bid and contract reviews and
while executing the contract work. Such communication shall be
in writing.

7.2.3.2 Communication between the Company and the Customer is

controlled as follows:

Communication Prime Contributing

(Including Amendments) Responsibility Responsibility
Chief Estimator
For Bids & Offerings Estimating Manager
Estimators
Estimating Manager Chief Estimator
For Contract Reviews
Construction Manager Project Manager
Construction
During Construction Project Manager Manager
Project Personnel

7.2.3.3 Records of written communications are maintained and filed by

the person having prime responsibility, or designate, in the
respective estimate, contract or project file as appropriate.

7.2.3.4 Written Customer feedback with respect to Chemco’s quality

system is forwarded to the Quality Manager for logging, analysis
and action as required.

7.3 DESIGN AND DEVELOPMENT

Excluded

7.4 PURCHASING

7.4.1 Purchasing Process

7.4.1.1 Chemco shall ensure and verify that all equipment, materials or
apparatus procured by Chemco for installation shall bear the label
of an approved certification agency.

7.4.1.2 Subcontractors are evaluated and selected based on the following

criteria:

• Safety record

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 25 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

• Pricing and financial proposal

• Expertise and technical ability
• Experience on similar work
• Quality System

7.4.1.3 Subcontracted Work

Where any portion of Chemco’s assigned scope of work is

performed by a sub contractor, the requirements of this manual,
as a minimum, shall be met.

7.4.2 Purchasing Information

7.4.2.1 Purchasing information, as applicable, is documented to

sufficiently describe the product and to include requirements for:

• a clear technical description of the product

• codes and standards
• approval, procedures, processes and equipment
• warranty requirements
• servicing provisions / start-up services
• spare parts
• quality management system
• calibration
• identification of product
• Mill Test Reports (MTRs)
• traceability of product
• operation and maintenance manuals
• shop drawings
• special requirements of the Customer
• delivery
• source inspection

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 26 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.4.3 Verification of Purchased Product

7.4.3.1 Receiving and Inspection General Requirements

Purchasing shall advise the site representative of all shipments to

be delivered to site in advance to allow sufficient time for
appropriate materials offloading equipment to be available.

Where applicable, suppliers lifting schedules for overweight lifts

shall be forwarded to site and incorporated into the appropriate
work specific execution plan.

Lifting equipment shall have current inspection certification and

this certification shall be confirmed before equipment offloading
occurs.

Receiving inspections shall be performed on all equipment and

material by a designated Inspector and a Customer
representative, if required, upon arrival at the job site.

After satisfactory completion of inspection activities, the material

or equipment shall be accepted for installation or storage.

Documentation of inspection activities shall be filed with the job

file and shall be available for examination.

7.4.3.2 Marking & Tagging

Items shall be inspected to verify that they are marked and tagged
for identification in accordance with the purchasing documents
and specifications.

7.4.3.3 Nonconforming Product

Where nonconforming product is identified, a nonconformance

report shall be initiated and corrective action taken as per the
procedure for control of nonconforming product in Sub-Section
8.3 of this manual.

7.4.3.4 Stored Equipment

The Customer may inspect stored equipment on site at anytime

during normal working hours.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 27 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.4.3.5 Testing

Where the purchasing documents or other program criteria

require testing during the receiving inspection, the results are
indicated on the applicable inspection form.

7.5 PRODUCTION AND SERVICE PROVISION

7.5.1 Control of Production and Service Provision

7.5.1.1 This article provides the minimum requirements for inspection and
testing of installations and equipment.

7.5.1.2 Review Meeting

A review meeting may be held prior to commencement of work

with the Customer’s authorized representative (or other
appropriate means of communication) to review the interface
between Chemco and Customer responsibilities and the scope for
inspection and testing to be performed. Additional Customer
inspection and testing requirements are to be identified and the
supporting documentation shall be included with the Inspection
and Test Plan. Hold and Witness points shall be specified and
documented at this time.

7.5.1.3 Inspection And Testing

Inspection and testing is required for all installed systems and

equipment and is to be performed by qualified personnel. The
Inspection and Test Plan outlines the inspections and testing to
be performed and subsequently documented as a permanent
record on the applicable forms.

7.5.1.4 Hold And Witness Points

Hold and Witness points are designed to provide a visual

identification indicating that the performance of these activities
must be witnessed by Chemco and/or the Customer’s authorized
representative. Work shall not continue nor shall equipment be
energized prior to sign off of the appropriate documentation.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 28 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.5.1.5 Subcontractors

Subcontractors shall be monitored and controlled as the work

progresses by ensuring that the scope of work is being performed
correctly, on schedule, and is of a standard that meets or exceeds
the manufacturer’s and Customer’s requirements. The
subcontractors may be audited for verification of inspections,
testing and to confirm that records are being kept as per the
Inspection and Test Plan.

7.5.1.6 Records

Complete and legible records shall be maintained at our site office

in accordance with Section 4 of this manual.

7.5.2 Identification and Traceability

7.5.2.1 Identification of equipment is verified through the receiving

process described in Article 7.4.3. Chemco ensures that
purchased equipment is tagged and identified in accordance with
the purchasing documentation, Customer’s drawings and
specifications, as required by the contract.

7.5.2.2 Identification of materials is verified through the receiving process

described in Article 7.4.3. Chemco ensures that purchased
materials are identified in accordance with the purchasing
documents, Customer’s drawings and specifications, as required
by the contract. Generally, bulk materials bear the unique
cataloged identifying marks of the manufacturer and are sufficient
for identification purposes.

7.5.2.3 Equipment and materials satisfactorily received and placed in

storage or delivered to construction are considered acceptable in
terms of receiving conformity and identification.

7.5.2.4 Equipment and materials of a nonconforming nature are

controlled and identified as per Sub-Section 8.3 of this manual by
being quarantined to a holding area and appropriately tagged.

7.5.2.5 For equipment that is inspected and/or tested, the inspection and
test records shall bear the Customer’s designated tag number,
linking the equipment to the drawings, specifications and
purchasing documentation.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 29 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

7.5.2.6 Inspection and test records from receiving through turnover to the
Customer shall bear the name and/or signature of the person
responsible for completing the record. On projects where
numerous personnel may be signing documentation, a signature
and initial log shall be maintained.

7.5.3 Customer Property

7.5.3.1 Customer property is received, handled, stored and preserved in

the same manner as Chemco supplied product.

7.5.3.2 Any damage or deficiencies identified to Customer property shall

be documented in writing to the Customer.

7.5.3.3 Nonconforming product is documented as per Sub-Section 8.3 of

this manual.

7.5.4 Preservation of Product

The Company establishes, implements and maintains procedures for the

care and storage of equipment and materials, either procured by Chemco
or supplied by the Customer as described in Procedure QSP-080.

7.6 CONTROL OF MONITORING AND MEASURING DEVICES

7.6.1 General

The Company determines, for each specific project, the test equipment to
be utilized to demonstrate conformity to the requirements of the contract.

7.6.2 Calibration

7.6.2.1 Precision measuring and test equipment is calibrated against

measurement standards traceable to national or international
standards. Where no such standard exists, the basis used for
calibration shall be recorded.

7.6.2.2 Calibration includes:

• adjustment or re-adjustment as necessary

• identified as to calibration status

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 30 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 7 – PRODUCT REALIZATION

• safeguarding from adjustments that would invalidate the

measurement result
• protection from damage and deterioration during handling,
maintenance and storage

7.6.2.3 Test equipment shall be calibrated at least yearly, except that the
Doble Test Set shall be calibrated every five (5) years as
recommended by the Doble Engineering Company, Watertown,
MA.

7.6.2.4 Calibration records shall be maintained on file and logged for

each device used by Company personnel and subcontractors.

7.6.2.5 Calibration shall be performed by qualified out-sourced suppliers,

having suitable calibration procedures and facilities.

7.6.3 Use of Test Equipment

7.6.3.1 Test equipment shall be protected from damage and deterioration

during handling, storage and use.

7.6.3.2 Test equipment found to be out of calibration, shall be

immediately removed from service. If measurements were made
with such equipment, the Project Quality Manager shall
investigate and re-verify previous tests and results to determine
conformity and if necessary, implement corrective action.
7.6.3.3 Test equipment that cannot be restored to an acceptable
accuracy shall be removed from service and disposed of.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 31 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 8- MEASUREMENT, ANALYSIS and IMPROVEMENT

8.1 GENERAL

Chemco plans and implements the monitoring, measurement, analysis and

improvement processes needed to demonstrate conformity of the product, to
ensure conformity of the QMS, and to continually improve its effectiveness.

8.2 MONITORING AND MEASURING

8.2.1 Customer Satisfaction

Customer satisfaction is the Customer’s perception of the degree to which

the Customer’s requirements have been fulfilled.

8.2.2 Monitoring Customer Satisfaction

Customer satisfaction is monitored in any or all of the following ways:

• Results of Customer audits

• Written communication
• Customer survey

8.2.3 Monitoring and Measurement of Processes

8.2.3.1 Processes are monitored and/or measured by any or all of the

following means:

• Management Reviews
• Corrective Action Reports
• Customer Feedback
• Employee Feedback
• Ongoing observations
• Nonconformance Reports

8.2.3.2 The Quality Manager shall maintain records of process

effectiveness, corrective actions taken, and follow-up to ensure
planned results are achieved.

8.2.4 Monitoring and Measurement of Product

8.2.4.1 Monitoring and measurement of product is planned and

documented in an Inspection and Test Plan specific to the project
and contract.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 32 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 8- MEASUREMENT, ANALYSIS and IMPROVEMENT

8.2.4.2 The development of the Inspection and Test Plan is the

responsibility of the Quality Lead assigned to the project.

8.2.4.3 Inspections and Test Plans document the following: the quality
activities required to demonstrate product conformity throughout
appropriate stages of product realization, the governing
procedures, acceptance criteria, frequency of examinations and
tests, the quality records required to provide objective evidence of
conformity, predetermined Hold and Witness points allowing the
Customer to monitor key activities, Chemco and Customer sign off
for release of the product.

8.2.4.4 Performance, monitoring and reporting of the quality activities is

the responsibility of the assigned Quality personnel with the
support of field personnel as required.

8.3 CONTROL OF NONCONFORMING PRODUCT

8.3.1 Purpose

The purpose of this procedure is to provide control, reporting, processing

and documentation of non-conforming items.

8.3.2 Preparation of Nonconformance Reports

8.3.2.1 A nonconformance report (NCR) is prepared for received or

installed items that do not conform to project drawings,
specifications or code requirements.

8.3.2.2 Chemco shall maintain a log and file of all nonconformance

reports.

8.3.2.3 When a nonconforming item is identified, Chemco shall prepare a

nonconformance report.

8.3.3 Routing/ Disposition of Nonconformance Reports

8.3.3.1 The nonconformance report containing a clear description of the

nonconformance, including Chemco’s proposed disposition, shall
be forwarded to the Customer for review when required by
Contract.

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 33 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Quality Manual

SECTION 8- MEASUREMENT, ANALYSIS and IMPROVEMENT

8.3.3.2 The Customer shall decide the final disposition, which may differ
from Chemco’s proposed disposition and shall record the final
disposition on the nonconformance report.

8.3.3.3 The Customer shall then forward the original copy of the
nonconformance report including the Customer’s final disposition
to Chemco.

8.3.4 Close-Out of Nonconformance Reports

8.3.4.1 When the disposition has been satisfactorily implemented, the

nonconformance report shall be signed off by Chemco and by the
Customer.

8.3.4.2 The nonconformance report shall then be closed out in the

nonconformance log and the original filed with any supporting
documents.

8.3.4.3 Chemco shall then forward a copy of the completed

nonconformance report to the Customer.

8.3.5 Nonconformance Process

8.3.5.1 The nonconformance process is further described in QSP-040.

8.4 ANALYSIS OF DATA

8.4.1 The Quality Manager collects and analyses data to demonstrate the
suitability and effectiveness of the QMS and to evaluate where continual
improvement can be made. Typical data includes:

• Customer feedback
• Employee feedback
• Product conformity
• Audit results
• Process conformity
• Preventive actions
• Corrective actions
• Results of management reviews
• Trends of any data collected
• QMS improvements

Revision 3 June 12, 2009 Quality Manual R3.doc Page 34 of 35

6/12/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-000

SECTION QSP- QUALITY SYSTEMS PROCEDURES INDEX

PROCEDURE Title Rev Date

QSP-040 Nonconformance Process 1 01/12/04

QSP-070 Quality Assessment 1 01/12/04
QSP-080 Preservation of Product 2 05/20/04
QSP-085 Site Receiving – Instrumentation Materials 0 05/25/04
QSP-090 Qualifications and Training 3 06/07/04
QSP-094 Roles and Responsibilities QC Levels 1, 2, &3 4 03/27/09

Revision 3 June 16, 2009 QSP-000 R3 Quality System Procedures Index.doc Page 1 of 1
6/17/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-040

NONCONFORMANCE PROCESS

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the nonconformance process.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all Chemco projects where nonconformances are discovered
and is supplementary to the Quality Manual.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the implementation and maintenance of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project Manager is responsible for implementing and carrying out the
requirements of this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

5.0 NONCONFORMANCE PROCESS

5.1 The nonconformance process is documented in the following flowchart:

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QSP-040 R1 Nonconformance Process.doc Page 1 of 2

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-040

NONCONFORMANCE PROCESS

START NONCONFORMANCE FLOWCHART

OR QUARANTINE VENDOR
Product is
released from Return quarantined
Product or
quarantine product to Vendor for Vendor corrects
Incoming Process non-
Place product in corrections including non-
Equipment or conformance
designated shipping bill and a conformance
Materials reported by any
quarantine holding copy of the NCR
employee
area
Vendor returns
Receiving
product & NCR,
Inspection
signed & dated
Tag product as to
nonconformance

CUSTOMER
QC prepares NCR
including proposed
disposition, Customer
Pass ? No
signature and date Update NCR Log generated NCR

Yes
Customer
Store in documents the
designated Customer final disposition
storage area disposition or on the NCR,
Yes
concession signs, dates and
required? returns it to
Chemco
Issue for
Installation No

Disposition is
recorded on NCR
and is signed &
Installation
dated at this point Customer
Copy

No Yes
RESPONSIBLE
NCR is reviewed PARTY
In Process by QC & issued to
Pass? the party most Return
Inspections Corrective action is
responsible for product to No
completed
corrective action Vendor?

Yes

NCR is returned to
QC with the
Corrective corrective action
No Action taken documented,
Acceptable? signed & dated

Yes
CORPORATE OFFICE

Chemco & QC documents

Copy NCR to
Customer closing on NCR, Quality Manager
acceptance of dates & signs
product

Update NCR Log

Update NCR Log

END Project QC File

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QSP-040 R1 Nonconformance Process.doc Page 2 of 2

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-070

Quality Assessment

Document Control
Document Control to keep up to date records of incoming documents, in 30 day
1)
intervals.( Monthly )
The 30 day document list is distributed to Superintendents, QA/QC, Estimating for
2)
check off.
Document Control to verify Control Set, Superintendents to verify their copies and all
2a)
field copies,
3) QA/QC to verify all for as-build drawings, Estimating to verify take off copies.
Organization Chart
1) To be submitted with QA Manual.
2) Copy required to be on site.
3) Must be current.
Construction Work Package Log
1) Indicates the status of following:
Received \ Estimated \ Material Ordered \ Construction Start \ Construction Complete
\ Turn Over
Request For Information Log
1) Indicates status and quantity of R.F.I.'s that are Open \ Closed \ Overdue

Non-Conformance Report Log

Indicates status and quantity of N.C.R.'s that are Open \ Replied \ Field Corrected \
1)
Closed

Material Requisition Log

1) Indicates status of material ordered:
Requisition Number \ Date Ordered \ Received
Quality Control Documentation
1) Inspection of QC Documents to insure the following…
a) Records to be organized \ Easily retrievable
b) Records are up to date
c) Insure that I.T.P.'s are being followed

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QSP-070 R1 Quality Assessment.doc Page 1 of 1

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the system used to store and preserve product from receipt to
incorporation into the work.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to identification, handling, packaging, storage and

preservation of equipment and materials.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and distribution
of this procedure.

3.2 Receiving personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this
procedure.

3.3 Field QC Specialists / Inspectors are responsible for implementation,

compliance auditing and records required by this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 Project Specifications

5.0 GENERAL

5.1 Consult the manufacturer’s storage and preservation instructions for

specific requirements. Comply with the manufacturer’s storage and
preservation instructions. If such instructions are not immediately
available, the requirements of this procedure shall be observed as a
minimum.

5.2 Generally, equipment and fittings shall be stored indoors, protected from
weather. Electronic instruments and control panels shall be stored
indoors in a warm, dry environment.

5.3 Equipment shall be stored in their original shipping containers and

packaging whenever possible.

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 1 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

5.4 Equipment designated for outdoor installation may be stored outdoors.

5.5 Equipment and enclosure openings shall be kept closed by temporary

caps or plugs until permanently connected.

5.6 Stainless steel materials shall not be handled or stored so as to come in

contact with dissimilar metals.

5.7 Periodically inspect materials for proper storage and preservation.

6.0 PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT

6.1 The Company provides for protection of equipment and materials

against damage, contamination, rusting and loss of components, which
may result during handling from the time items are received until the
Customer accepts them.

The protective measures taken at the job site include:

a) Compliance with any special procedures recommended by

the supplier/vendor

b) Provision of suitable storage, considering storage duration,

available space and security

c) Provision of regular scheduled inspections to ensure that

protective measures are adequate and take corrective
action, if the existing measures prove ineffective

d) Maintaining records of the following information for each item

of material or equipment:

• Specifications
• Suppliers’ / vendor recommendations relating to matters of
equipment protection
• Report of condition upon receipt
• Schedule showing dates of inspection, shaft rotation, condition
of item and protective action taken
• Applicable correspondence

7.0 STORAGE OF PRODUCT

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 2 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

7.1 General

7.1.1 Equipment shall be stored such that the orientation is similar to

the operating position.

7.1.2 Free standing panels, switchgear, racks, etc shall be stored

upright. Equipment and materials to be installed outdoors can be
stored outdoors where protected against accidental damage.

7.1.3 Items stored outdoors shall be placed on permanent or other solid

supports, pallets, or dunnage, in well-drained areas and covered
to prevent entry of dirt or moisture. Supports shall provide at least
25 mm clearance between the item and ground.

7.1.4 Equipment and material to be installed indoors shall be stored

indoors on supports with at least 25 mm clearance between the
item and the floor.

7.1.5 Most containers or panels shall be opened to permit inspection,

component count, and specification check.

7.1.6 Electronic instruments and equipment shall be stored in a dry

location at a temperature of 20° C, +/- 5° C.

7.1.7 Temperature sensitive instruments shall be stored to

manufacturer recommendations where noted.

7.1.8 Opening of containers or inclusion of desiccant may be required

to prevent mildew and corrosion.

7.1.9 Air-conditioned storage should be provided or arranged if

individual specifications demand.

7.1.10 Shop assembled control panels shall be retained in the shipping

container until moved to site for installation.

7.1.11 Original shipping packaging shall be maintained wherever

possible.

7.2 Storage of Motors

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 3 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

7.2.1 Weatherproof motors may be stored outdoors on supports and

need not be covered.

7.2.2 Oily/water proof tape shall be used to seal opening between shaft
and case.

7.2.3 Remove supplier provided film covers from ventilation openings of

drip proof motors.

7.2.4 Renew shaft coupling coatings and plastic film cover as required.

7.2.5 If drain fluid shows sign of contamination, drain and solvent flush
with Type A oil and fill oil-bearing housing as instructed by the
manufacturer.

7.2.6 For extended storage periods at monthly intervals rotate motor

shaft one and one-quarter (1 ¼) revolution, subject to
manufacturer’s instructions, using tools that will not mark shaft
surface. Replace shaft to case seal. It is not necessary to rotate
fractional H.P. motors.

7.2.7 Supply power to all motors with heaters upon arrival to job site.
Measure insulation resistance (Megger) of all motors when they
are received and record values on equipment storage and
protection record.

7.2.8 Measure electric motors insulation resistance on a periodic basis

as follows:
• Fractional H.P. motors - no periodic test required

• Explosion proof, totally enclosed motors less than 20 H.P. -

Megger test not required

• Motors of 25 H.P. and above and rated below 2300 volts -

Megger test 1/2 minute at 1000 volts - 6 month intervals

• 100 H.P. motors and below - Class A and B insulation (with

coil temperature at 60° to 70° C - cold resistance test cannot
be used)

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 4 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

• Motors any size rated above 2300 volts, Megger test 1/2
minute at 1000 volts at 3-month intervals

• All megger tests shall meet the following resistance values as

a minimum. If values read are lower, then suitable drying
procedures should be initiated
Minimum acceptable insulation resistance values are as follows:
Rated Voltage of Minimum IR
Equipment
600 Volt Value100
in MΩ
2300 Volt 300
5000 Volt 500

7.3 Storage of Rotating / Reciprocating Machinery

7.3.1 For extended storage periods at monthly intervals rotate drive

shaft one and one-quarter (1 ¼) revolution, subject to
manufacturer’s instructions, using tools that will not mark shaft
surface.

7.3 Storage of Transformers

7.3.1 Outdoor type transformers may be stored outdoors on supports

without covers. Indoor type units shall be stored indoors. Large
indoor type units may be stored outdoors if protective covering is
provided and is acceptable to manufacturer’s storage
specifications.

7.3.2 For extended storage - upon receipt and at 4-week intervals,

measure and record liquid level and gas pressure of liquid and
gas filled transformers. Tape seal liquid fill connections and
initiate action to have any leaks repaired.

7.4 Storage of Switchgear / Starters And Control Equipment

7.4.1 Except for large outdoor type units, this equipment shall be stored
indoors, in a dry, dust free area, and where condensation cannot
occur.

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 5 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

7.4.2 Space heaters, if provided, shall be energized while units are

stored. Free standing units shall be stored upright.

7.4 Storage of Batteries

7.4.1 Store batteries indoors

7.5 Storage of Cable and Wire

7.5.1 Large cable reels and wire spools, may be stored outdoors on a
paved or well-drained area, on wood supports, and protected from
physical and moisture damage.

7.5.2 Testing of cables prior to storage shall be performed when

damage is suspected or if cables are of medium or high voltage
design. Seal cable ends to prevent moisture contamination.

7.6 Storage of Instruments

7.6.1 Instrument, control valve and enclosure openings for pipe, tubing
and electrical connections shall be kept closed by temporary caps
or plugs until permanently connected.

7.6.2 Large valves and control valves may be stored outdoors, in the
closed position, with their stems in the approximate upright
position, provided they are stored on pavement or on dunnage in
well drained areas.

7.6.3 Exposed stems of stored control valves shall be coated with a rust
preventative in accordance with manufacturer’s or project
specifications.

7.6.4 Valves and fittings, NPS 2 or smaller, shall be stored indoors.

7.7 Storage of Pipe and Fittings

7.7.1 Pipe may be stored outdoors provided dunnage or a support rack

is provided and the pipe is elevated on one end for drainage.

7.7.2 Stainless steel pipe and fittings shall not be handled or stored so
as to come in contact with dissimilar metals.

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 6 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-080

STORAGE AND PRESERVATION OF PRODUCT

7.8 Storage of Conduit

7.8.1 Conduit may be stored outdoors provided dunnage or a support

rack is provided and the pipe ends are capped to prevent
entrance of dirt and moisture.

QSP-080 R2 Storage & Preservation of

Revision 2 May 20, 2004 Page 7 of 7
Product.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the site receiving process for instrumentation materials.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to inspection, documentation and storage of

instrumentation materials.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of
this procedure.

3.2 Field QC Inspectors and receiving personnel are responsible for

implementation and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QSP-080 Preservation of Product
4.3 Project Specifications, Standards & Details
4.4 Purchasing Requisitions / Purchase Orders

5.0 Guidance & Audit

5.1 A project QC Instrument Mechanic shall assist and give guidance in any
way or form on any concerns dealing with documents or materials that
deals with quality control and shall assist the main Chemco office with any
concerns dealing with the receiving and warehousing.

5.2 This QC person shall perform the following:

• do a general audit approx. every 2 to 3 months;

• do an occasional unannounced drop-in;
• ensure that the site warehouse has the latest Client Installation and
Standard Details;
• general inventory check;
• do a visual inspection to ensure that materials are per Client’s
specifications;
• ensure that piping materials and fittings received have traceable
heat numbers and that they are properly documented.
QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation
Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 1 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

6.0 Receiving

6.1 A dedicated person shall inspect all incoming products for damage and
conformance to the purchase requisition.

6.2 If damages are suspected, sign, date and mark the carrier’s waybill
“Subject to Inspection” to cover the possibility of concealed damage.

6.3 Check received goods against the shipping / packing list to ensure the
quantities stated are received. Ensure part numbers received match the
packing list.

6.4 Ensure shipments of pipe or fittings are accompanied with Mill Test
Reports (MTRs) and that the Heat Numbers stamped on the pipe or
fittings match to the MTR. Retrieve MTRs accompanying the shipment
and record on the receiving report. If MTRs are missing or are incorrect,
quarantine the materials and issue a Materials Exception Report (MER)
Form QS-085. See Article 7.1.

6.5 On the packing list, hi-light the checked items that conform and sign and
date the packing list.

6.6 On the packing list, circle the checked items that are incorrect, over, short
or damaged and make a suitable notation.

6.7 Check received goods against the purchase requisition to ensure the
quantities stated are received. Ensure part numbers received match the
purchase requisition.

6.8 On the purchase requisition, hi-light the checked items that conform and
sign and date the purchase requisition.

6.9 On the purchase requisition, circle the checked items that are incorrect,
over, short or damaged and make a suitable notation.

6.10 Record the inspection results on receiving report form QS-082. Note any
nonconforming items, overages, shortages or damages on the receiving
report. Sign and date the report.

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 2 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

6.12 Cover the shipping documents with the receiving report and clip together.

6.13 Retrieve any manufacturer’s instructions (Installation, preservation etc.)

received with the shipment and record on the receiving report. File the
manufacturer’s instructions in a dedicated file by CWP, by manufacturer,
by requisition number and tag number (where applicable).

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 3 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

6.14 File MTRs in a dedicated file by CWP, by manufacturer and requisition

number. Log the MTRs in the MTR Log (QC-360) by date, by requisition,
with description and listing of heat numbers. The log shall be maintained
in a separate file along with the MTRs.

6.15 Submit the receiving report QS-082 and attachments to the warehouse
supervisor or his designate for logging and filing.

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 4 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

7.0 Warehouse Supervisor’s Duties

The Warehouse Supervisor will ensure the following actions are taken:

7.1 Complete a MER (QS-085) for any reported overages, shortages,

damages or nonconformances

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 5 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

7.2 Log the MERs on the Material Exception Report Log (MERL), Form QS-
086). Record all corrective actions taken and completion dates on the
MERL.

7.3 Send the MER to Chemco Edmonton for resolution by purchasing.

Purchasing will return a written response indicating the disposition of the
goods. E.g. “Return”, “Re-Order”, “Accept As Is” with a reason, etc.

7.4 Incorrect or damaged goods must be “quarantined” until disposition,

correction and/or returns are complete. Complete and issue a Material
Exception Report (MER), Form QS-085 in this instance.

8.0 Bulks Storage

8.1 After receiving activities are complete, accept the goods for storage.

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 6 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

8.2 Store goods indoors, except where noted below, on labeled: racks,
shelving, bins, pallets in an organized fashion segregated by material
type, grade, size, design temperature requirements.

8.3 Store goods in their original packaging whenever possible.

8.4 Store nonconforming materials in a designated Quarantine area and apply

label “ HOLD MER No. ______ “, until properly dispositioned.

8.5 Pipe may be stored outdoors, elevated off the ground on dunage or racks
with sufficient slope to allow water drainage.

9.0 Bulks Preservation

9.1 Post a preservation schedule for ready reference.

9.2 Perform the preservation activities specified in the manufacturer’s

instruction documents at the specified intervals and log these activities on
form QS-020 or QS-021 as applicable.

9.3 File the completed preservation forms in the dedicated file along with the
manufacturer’s instructions which came with the shipment. See 6.13
above.
QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation
Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 7 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-085

SITE RECEIVING – INSTRUMENTATION MATERIALS

10.0 Site Receiving Process

SITE RECEIVING PROCESS

RECEIVING
INSPECTION

No

Problem Tag & Quarantine

Site Yes Pass ? No
Resolved? Materials

Yes

MATERIAL
PLACE EXCEPTION
MATERIALS IN REPORT
STORAGE

ISSUE TO
CONSTRUCTION

To Supplier
(Chemco) for
Correction / Action

Chemco Purchasing
WRITTEN
RESPONSE
Return
ReOrder
Accept with reason
etc.

QSP-085 R0 Site Receiving - Instrumentation

Revision 0 May 25, 2004 Page 8 of 8
Materials.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-090

QUALIFICATIONS and TRAINING

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the requirements for qualification and training of personnel.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all projects and is supplementary to the Quality Manual.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the implementation, maintenance and
issuing of this procedure.

3.2 The Project Manager is responsible for carrying out the requirements of this
procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

5.0 QUALIFICATIONS

5.1 Personnel are qualified for assigned tasks based on education,

training, skills and experience as required.

5.2 Electrical craft personnel as appropriate for the tasks to be

performed, shall:

• hold valid Electrical Journeyman Certification under the

Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or
• hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal, or
• while working under supervision, hold valid Electrical
Apprenticeship status under the Alberta Apprenticeship and
Industry Training Act

5.3 Instrumentation craft personnel, as appropriate for the craft and

tasks to be performed, shall:

• hold valid Journeyman Instrument Mechanic Certification

under the Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act,
or
Revision 3 June 7,
QSP-090 R3 Qualifications and Training.doc Page 1 of 5
2004
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-090

QUALIFICATIONS and TRAINING

• hold valid Journeyman Fitter Certification under the Alberta

Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or
• hold valid Electrical Journeyman Certification under the
Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or
• hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal, or
• while working under supervision, hold valid Apprenticeship
status under the Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training
Act, or
• for technical support functions, hold valid accreditation as a
Instrument Certified Engineering Technologist (C.E.T.), or
Registered Engineering Technologist (R.E.T.) from ASET or
other recognized Engineering / Technical Association.

5.4 High voltage and relaying, inspection and test personnel, as

appropriate for the tasks to be performed, shall:

• hold valid Electrical Journeyman Certification under the

Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act and have a
minimum of 12 months suitable testing experience, or.
• hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal, and
a minimum of 12 months suitable testing experience, or.
• while working under supervision, hold valid Electrical
Apprenticeship status under the Alberta Apprenticeship and
Industry Training Act, or
• while working under supervision, hold a valid diploma in
Electrical Engineering Technology from a National
Accreditation Program (e.g. NAIT)
• hold valid accreditation as an Electrical Certified
Engineering Technologist (C.E.T.), or Registered
Engineering Technologist (R.E.T.) from ASET or other
recognized Engineering / Technical Association, and a
minimum of 6 months suitable testing experience, or.
• hold valid accreditation as International Electrical Testing
Association (NETA) Certified Technician / Level III, and a
minimum of 6 months suitable testing experience, or
• hold valid accreditation as International Electrical Testing
Association (NETA) Certified Senior Technician / Level IV,
and a minimum of 6 months suitable testing experience or,
• hold valid accreditation as National Institute of Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) Engineering Technician /

Revision 3 June 7,
QSP-090 R3 Qualifications and Training.doc Page 2 of 5
2004
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-090

QUALIFICATIONS and TRAINING

Level III, and a minimum of 6 months suitable testing

experience, or
• hold valid accreditation as National Institute of Certification in
Engineering Technologies (NICET) Senior Engineering
Technician / Level IV, and a minimum of 6 months suitable
testing experience.

5.5 Fiber Optics Technicians (FOT), inspection and test personnel as

appropriate for the tasks to be performed, shall:

• hold valid Communication Electrician Journeyman

Certification under the Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry
Training Act, or hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial
Red Seal Certification, and with a minimum 3 months
suitable fiber optics terminating and testing experience, or
• hold valid Electrical Journeyman Certification under the
Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or hold
valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal
Certification, and with a minimum 12 months suitable fiber
optics terminating and testing experience, or
• hold valid Electrical Journeyman Certification under the
Alberta Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or hold
valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal
Certification, and with NAIT TET401, or equivalent, fiber
optic communication course and a minimum of 3 months
suitable fiber optics terminating and testing experience, or
• hold valid Telecommunications Engineering Technology
Certification from NAIT or other recognized technical institute
and a minimum of 3 months suitable fiber optics terminating
and testing experience, or
• hold valid accreditation as a Communications Certified
Engineering Technologist (C.E.T.) or Communications
Registered Engineering Technologist (R.E.T.) from ASET or
other recognized Engineering / Technical Association and a
minimum of 3 months suitable fiber optics terminating and
testing experience, or
• while working under supervision, hold valid Electrical
Apprenticeship status under the Alberta Apprenticeship and
Industry Training Act, with NAIT TET401, or equivalent, fiber
optic communication course and a minimum of 6 months
suitable fiber optics terminating and testing experience.
Revision 3 June 7,
QSP-090 R3 Qualifications and Training.doc Page 3 of 5
2004
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-090

QUALIFICATIONS and TRAINING

5.6 Welders, Welding Operators and tackers (brackets and supports)

shall:

• hold valid Journeyman Welder Certification under the Alberta

Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or
• while working under supervision, hold valid Welders
Apprenticeship status under the Alberta Apprenticeship and
Industry Training Act, or
• hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal
and
• be qualified to CSA Standard W47.1

5.7 Welders and Welding Operators (pressure piping)

• hold valid Journeyman Welder Certification under the Alberta

Apprenticeship and Industry Training Act, or
• hold valid equivalent Canadian Interprovincial Red Seal
and
• qualification to ASME B31.3

5.8 Upon hire, craft qualification certificates (cards) are obtained and
copied to the job file as proof of qualification. Copies of these
certificates shall be forwarded to the corporate office.

5.9 Chemco has implemented an employee database at the corporate

office in which craft qualifications are scanned into records. Over
time, all Chemco craft qualifications will be recorded in the
database.

6.0 AWARENESS

6.1 All new hire craft personnel shall be made aware of the following:

• the Chemco Quality Policy 1

• all employees are responsible for quality
• conditions adverse to quality shall be reported and corrected
• good workmanship is expected
• supervision shall ensure workers are working from the most current
and relevant drawings and standards

Revision 3 June 7,
QSP-090 R3 Qualifications and Training.doc Page 4 of 5
2004
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-090

QUALIFICATIONS and TRAINING

• quality records are required to be filled out completely, accurately,

dated and initialed or signed.
• If there is something you don't know, then ASK your supervisor.
1
The Quality Policy will be included in future editions of the Chemco Employee
Handbook. In the interim, post the Policy in the Project Office, QC Office and
Lunch Rooms.

6.2 Chemco promotes awareness by Company news publications such as the

“chemco connector”, QUALITY BULLETIN (s), posted notices and
communication by electronic media.

6.3 Existing employees at the time of issue of this procedure shall be made
aware of the requirements of 6.1 above at regular "tool box talks", weekly
safety meetings or at other times as deemed appropriate.

7.0 TRAINING

7.1 Lead Quality Personnel - Level 3

7.1.1 Training of lead quality personnel is the responsibility of the Corporate

Quality Manager.

7.2 Quality Assistants - Level 2

7.2.1 Training of Quality Assistants / Specialists is the responsibility of the

Quality Lead – Level 3.

7.3 Field Personnel - Level 1

7.3.1 Training of field Quality Control Personnel (Inspectors) is the

responsibility of the Quality Lead – Level 3 with assistance by Level 2
personnel.

7.4 Training Records

7.4.1 Chemco has implemented a resources database at the corporate

office in which employee training activities are recorded.

Revision 3 June 7,
QSP-090 R3 Qualifications and Training.doc Page 5 of 5
2004
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-094
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
QC LEVELS 1, 2 & 3

1.0 PURPOSE
To establish the Roles and Responsibilities of Chemco QC personnel.

2.0 SCOPE
This procedure applies all projects and is supplementary to the Quality Manual.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance of this procedure.
3.2 Project Management is responsible for the implementation of this procedure.
3.3 All Chemco QC and craft personnel are responsible for carrying out the
requirements of this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual
4.2 Project Organization Chart

5.0 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES

5.1 Fundamental Roles and Responsibilities:
• Perform inspections and tests to ensure compliance with the project work
packages, plans, codes, standards, specifications and the requirements of the
Inspection and Test Plan (ITP.)
• Verify and document, completely and accurately, the specified inspections
and tests.
• Verify the craft workforce performs the work in accordance with project
requirements, incorporating good workmanship and industry practices.
• Report and act on any conditions adverse to quality.

Revision 4 March 27, 2009 QSP-094 R4 Responsibilities QC Level 1 2 3.doc Page 1 of 4

3/27/2009THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-094
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
QC LEVELS 1, 2 & 3

5.2 The Quality Group is structured as follows:

Level 3
Quality Lead

Level 2
Quality
Assistant(s) /
Specialists

Level 1
Quality Support
(Inspectors / Field Crews)

5.3 QC LEVEL 3 RESPONSIBILITIES

5.3.1 Receive all drawings and documents from the site Drawing Control.
5.3.2 Review documents in relation to scope of work.
5.3.3 Ensure that the above documentation is transmitted to QC Level 2 and is
handled and implemented properly by QC Level 2.
5.3.4 Ensure the Inspection and Test Plan is documented, approved by the
Client and implemented before construction begins.
5.3.5 Ensure required calibrated testing equipment is available, logged and
calibration certificates are on file.
5.3.6 Provide the most current test sheets and procedures to QC Level 2.

5.3.7 Discuss jointly with QC Level 2 the ITP’s and procedures for each
specific Job, MPC, etc.

Revision 4 March 27, 2009 QSP-094 R4 Responsibilities QC Level 1 2 3.doc Page 2 of 4

3/27/2009THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-094
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
QC LEVELS 1, 2 & 3

5.3.8 Ensure As-Builts (Redlines) are completed and stamped.

5.3.9 Review, and sign off ITP / Turnover Package in preparation for submittal
to Client.
5.3.10 In partnership with QC Level 2, create any new procedures and ITP’s for
each job or package and log the data.
5.3.11 In partnership with QC Level 2, periodically perform field spot checks
and walk-downs to ensure Quality Assurance is being implemented
among QC Level 1 field crews.
5.3.12 Generate RFI’s for any issues that may arise.
5.3.13 Coordinate and conduct periodic meetings with QC Level 2 (and Level 1
field crews as required) for review of the previous day’s and current
day’s tasks and look ahead to upcoming tasks.
5.3.14 Communicate with Chemco’s Corporate Quality Group on all new
documentation and procedures being developed or modified, etc.
5.3.15 Attend meetings as requested by the Project manager or Client.
5.3.16 Report on progress and status of processes, inspections, documentation
and turnover.

5.4 QC LEVEL 2 RESPONSIBILITIES

5.4.1 Receive and record all drawings and documentation
5.4.2 Review documents and scope of work.
5.4.3 Prepare all job-specific ITP’s and procedures prior to construction.
5.4.4 Inspect and document received equipment and cable.
5.4.5 Ensure that QC Level 1 field crews have all the most current drawings
and records in order to perform field QC checks.
5.4.6 Ensure that QC Level 1 field crews have properly prepared rough copies
of test sheets, etc. and perform field spot checks on Level 1 activities.
5.4.7 Produce and file computer-generated forms of rough copy test sheets
and prepare a preliminary turnover package complete with punch list and
As-Built drawings (Redlines).
5.4.8 Prior to turnover, a field walk-down will be performed on system(s) being
turned over to ensure no deficiencies (except for “B” punch list items).
Results of the walk-down must be documented and signed off on punch
lists

Revision 4 March 27, 2009 QSP-094 R4 Responsibilities QC Level 1 2 3.doc Page 3 of 4

3/27/2009THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QSP-094
ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
QC LEVELS 1, 2 & 3

5.4.9 Verify, sign off and date all completed tasks (line items) on the ITP’s.
5.4.10 Attend meetings as requested by QC level 3.
5.4.11 Report to QC Level 3 on progress and status of processes, inspections,
documentation and turnover.
5.4.12 Other duties as assigned by QC Level 3.

5.5 QC LEVEL 1 RESPONSIBILITIES

5.5.1 QC Level 1 inspectors and field crews are responsible for receiving and
using only the most current drawings and documents in the field and will
review ITP’s and procedures with QC Level 2. All changes must be
recorded on As-Built (redlined) drawings.
5.5.2 Prepare rough copy or pre-populated test sheets and punch lists as
required, which must be signed (or initialed where specified) and dated
prior to submission to QC Level 2.
5.5.3 With the assistance of one craft member(s), perform hands-on field
checks to verify all installations and equipment meets the standards laid
out in the most current drawings and records. Results of these checks
must be recorded, dated, and signed off.
5.5.4 Immediately report to QC Level 2 if non-compliance by Chemco craft
(sloppiness, lack of attentiveness, etc) is witnessed.
5.5.5 Immediately report to QC Level 2 if direct labour craft are not using
proper/most current drawings and documents.
5.5.6 QC Level 1 shall not perform inspections on his/her own field work.
Such inspection shall be accomplished by another Level 1 inspector.

Revision 4 March 27, 2009 QSP-094 R4 Responsibilities QC Level 1 2 3.doc Page 4 of 4

3/27/2009THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QS-000

SECTION QS- QUALITY SYSTEM EXHIBIT INDEX

EXHIBIT Rev Date

QS-002 Action Request 1 01/12/04

QS-004 Weekly QA/QC Report 0 06/15/09
QS-006 Surveillance Report 0 09/12/07
QS-010 Document Registration Sheet 1 01/12/04
QS-012 Document Transmittal Sheet 0 10/01/04
QS-014 Document Revision Sheet 1 01/12/04
QS-016 Document (Manual) Status Control Log 1 01/12/04
QS-020 Equipment Preservation – Weekly Record 0 04/07/04
QS-021 Equipment Preservation – Monthly Record 0 04/07/04
QS-030 ITP Form 2 03/08/05
QS-032 ITP Approval Sheet 3 03/08/05
QS-036 Miscellaneous Inspection and Test Record 0 12/22/03
QS-038 Release Notice 1 08/30/04
QS-040 Nonconformance Log 1 01/12/04
QS-042 Nonconformance Report 0 10/01/04
QS-044 Loss Control Report Log 0 12/01/05
QS-045 Loss Control Report 0 12/01/05
QS-050 Notice To Inspect 1 01/12/04
QS-052 Notice of Completion 0 02/10/04
QS-054 Equipment Turnover log 0 03/11/04
QS-056 Equipment Turnover 0 03/11/04
QS-058 Shipping Release 0 11/06/08
QS-060 Punch List 1 01/12/04
QS-062 Purchase Order (Sample) 0 10/01/04
QS-064 Certificate of Compliance 0 05/02/07
QS-070 Quality Assessment 1 01/12/04
QS-080 Receiving Log 1 01/12/04
QS-082 Deleted
QS-083 Deleted
QS-084 Requisition For Material Order 0 10/01/04
QS-085 Material Exception Report (MER) 0 05/21/04
QS-086 Material Exception Report Log (MERL) 0 05/21/04
QS-088 Request For Information (RFI) 1 04/02/04
QS-089 RFI Log 1 01/03/08
QS-090 Signature Log 1 01/12/04
QS-092 Source Inspection Record 0 01/22/04
QS-094 Test Equipment Log 2 03/08/05
QS-098 Welders' / Welding Operators' Log 0 10/01/04

Revision 8 June 16, 2009 QS-000 R8 Exhibit Index.doc Page 1 of 1

6/17/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Action Request QS-002
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Corrective Action [ ] Preventive Action [ ]

ISSUED TO: AR No:
DEPT / PLANT / LOCATION: DATE:

NONCONFORMANCE OR COMPLAINT

Print Name Signature Date:

SUGGESTED CORRECTIVE / PREVENTIVE ACTION

Reviewed With:

Print Name Signature Date:

ACTION TAKEN:

Print Name Signature Date:

CLOSE-OUT
Quality Manager Approval: Close Out Date:

MANAGEMENT REVIEW
Comments:

Quality Manager: Date:

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-002 AR R1 Page 1 of 1

 Weekly QA/QC Report QS-004
JOB# CLIENT / PROJECT DATE

Report Prepared By:

REPORT FROM PREVIOUS WEEK

ACTION STATUS
Item ACTIVITY ACTION
BY (Open / Closed)

REPORT FROM CURRENT WEEK

ACTION STATUS
Item ACTIVITY ACTION
BY (Open / Closed)

Revision 0 June 15, 2009 QS-004 R0 Weekly QAQC Report.doc Page 1 of 3

 Weekly QA/QC Report QS-004

LOOK AHEAD
ACTION STATUS
Item ACTIVITY ACTION
BY (Open / Closed)

SYSTEM / PROGRESS STATISTICS

Note: You can modify these headings somewhat, to suit the specific project.
WALKDOWN SYSTEM SYSTEM TURNOVER SYSTEMS
PLANT OR SYSTEM ITPs ITPs # QC QC FORMS
PACKAGES CONSTR FINAL BOOKS TURNED
CWP COUNT BUILT# APPROVED FORMS COMPLETE
BUILT WALKDOWN WALK PREPARED OVER

RFIs NCRs (All Sources)

PLANT OR CWP COUNT RESPONSES OPEN CLOSED COUNT RESPONSES OPEN CLOSED

Revision 0 June 15, 2009 QS-004 R0 Weekly QAQC Report.doc Page 2 of 3

 Weekly QA/QC Report QS-004

QC RESOURCES (including field test personnel)

List QC Personnel Level Duty / Function

LIST ANY CISTOMER COMPLAINTS

LIST ANY RECOMMENDED IMPROVEMENTS OR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TO QUALITY PROGRAM,

PROCEDURES, PROCESSES OR QCFORMS.

OTHER

Revision 0 June 15, 2009 QS-004 R0 Weekly QAQC Report.doc Page 3 of 3

 Surveillance Report QS-006
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP#

ISSUED TO: SR No:

SUBJECT: DATE:
AREA / LOCATION:

OBSERVATION

Print Name Signature Date:

SUGGESTED ACTION

Print Name Signature Date:

ACTION TAKEN:

Print Name Signature Date:

CLOSE OUT
Comments:

Print Name Signature Date:

Revision 0 September 12, 2007 QS-006 R0 Surveillance Report Page 1 of 1

 DOCUMENT REGISTRATION SHEET
QS-010

Title

Copy Number Is issued to:

Name:
Organization:
Position/Title:
Location:
Issued By: Date:

If you transfer this document to another person, please fill out the following section and return to:

Quality Manager
Chemco Electrical Contractors Ltd.
9220 39 Avenue
Edmonton, AB
T6E 5T9
Ph: 780-436-9570
Fax: 780-701-0130

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Title

I have transferred Copy Number of this document to:

Name:
Organization:
Position/Title:
Location:
Signature: Date:

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-010 R1 Doc Registration Sheet Page 1 of 1

THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QS-012
#6 – 210 MacAlpine Crescent
9220 – 39 Ave., Edmonton, Alberta T6E 5T9 Fort McMurray, Alberta T9H 4A6 TRANSMITTAL SHEET
Ph. (780) 436-9570 Fax: (780) 434-0811 Telephone: (780) 790-9722 Fax: (780) 790-1610

To

Date

Attention

Re Our Job No.

Attention:
We are submitting /returning (under separate cover) the following documents which are:
( ) Approved ( ) For Your Approval ( ) Preliminary
( ) Approved as Noted ( ) For Your Records ( ) Revised
( ) Not Approved ( ) As Built

NUMBER
DRAWING NUMBER REV. TITLE OR DESCRIPTION
OF COPIES

Remarks

Form 101 Per

Revision 0 October 1, 2004 QS-012 R0 Document Transmittal Page 1 of 1

 Equipment Preservation
QS-020
Weekly Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Tag Number: Equipment Location:

Equipment Description:

Week Inspection Performed Results Date Inspected By

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 April 7, 2004 QS-020 R0 Equipment Preservation - Weekly Page 1 of 1
 Equipment Preservation
QS-021
Monthly Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Tag Number: Equipment Location:

Equipment Description:

Month Inspection Performed Results Date Inspected By

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 April 7, 2004 QS-021 R0 Equipment Preservation - Monthly Page 1 of 1
 INSPECTION & TEST PLAN (I.T.P.)
QS-030

ITP Title: Chemco Job Number:

Project Title: ITP Number:
Project Number: Rev:
Plant / Area ITP Revision Date:

CWP: SYSTEM:

Sequence, Description &

Verification Requirements and Completions of QC Activities (See Codes Below)
Responsibility
QC Controlling
Acceptance Exhibit Chemco Client Owner Other
QC Activity Procedure or
Code Criteria Verification
Item Task Description Instruction Chemco
(I, S, O) Documents Code Init Date Code Init Date Code Init Date Code Init Date
Client
Use Client’s Exhibit when shown

This ITP is in effect when subject activities are included in the contract scope of work.
Codes: R=Review, W=Witness, H=Hold, SU=Surveillance, C=By Client, I=In House, S=Subcontractor, O=Others
QS-030 R2 ITP Page 1 of 1
 QS-032
INSPECTION and TEST PLAN (ITP)

ITP Title:

Project Title:
RFP Number:
Project Number:
Chemco Job Number:
Plant:
CWP: SYSTEM:
ITP Number:

Rev:
ITP Revision Date:

APPROVAL
Chemco:
(Print Name) (Signature) (Initial) (Date)

Client:
(Print Name) (Signature) (Initial) (Date)

Other:
(Print Name) (Signature) (Initial) (Date)

Chemco Document No. Project Document No.

This ITP is in effect when subject activities are included in the contract scope of work.
Codes: R= Review, W= Witness, H= Hold, SU= Surveillance, I= In-House, S= Subcontractor, O= By Others
 Miscellaneous Inspection and
QS-036
Test Record
CONTRACT# TITLE OF RECORD SYSTEM

JOB# CLIENT / PROJECT CWP

CLIENT REF:

INSPECTED / TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 December 22, 2003 QS-036 R0 Misc Inspection & Test Record Page ______ of ______
 Release Notice QS-038
CONTRACT# SYSTEM
TITLE OF RECORD

JOB# CLIENT / PROJECT CWP

CLIENT REF:

To: Date:
Company:
Re: Plant / Location:

The below noted Equipment / Tag Numbers are released for:

(Indicate the reason or operation for the release)

Equipment / Tag Number Equipment / Tag Number

Per Chemco:
Name Signature Date

Received By::
Name Signature Date

Revision 1 August 30, 2004 QS-038 R1 Release Notice Page ______ of ______
 Nonconformance Log QS-040
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Report # Date Description W.O.# Remarks Sign-off

CHEMCO CUSTOMER OTHER

Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:
Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-040 R1 NCR Log Page 1 of 1
 Nonconformance Report QS-042
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

ISSUED TO: NCR No:

DEPT / PLANT / LOCATION: DATE:
DESCRIPTION OF NONCONFORMANCE:

ROOT CAUSE:

Print Name: Signature Date

PROPOSED DISPOSITION:
RECOMMENDED ACTION: [ ] SCRAP [ ] REWORK [ ] USE AS IS [ ] RETURN

QCI (Print Name) Signature Date

ACCEPTANCE OF PROPOSED DISPOSITION:

CHEMCO QCS CUSTOMER OTHER

Name: Name: Name:

Signature: Signature: Signature:

Date: Date: Date:

ACTION TAKEN:

Print Name Signature Date

FINAL SIGN-OFF:
CHEMCO QCS CUSTOMER OTHER
Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:
Revision 0 October 1, 2004 QS-042 R0 NCR Page 1 of 1
 Loss Control Report Log QS-044
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Report # Date Description W.O.# Remarks Sign-off

CHEMCO CUSTOMER OTHER

Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:
Revision 0 December 1, 2005 QS-044 R0 LCR Log.doc Page 1 of 1
 Loss Control Report QS-045
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

ISSUED TO: LCR No:

DEPT / PLANT / LOCATION: DATE:
DESCRIPTION OF LOSS:

Print Name: Signature Date

PROPOSED DISPOSITION:
RECOMMENDED ACTION:

QCI (Print Name) Signature Date

ACCEPTANCE OF PROPOSED DISPOSITION:

CHEMCO QCS CUSTOMER OTHER

Name: Name: Name:

Signature: Signature: Signature:

Date: Date: Date:

ACTION TAKEN:

Print Name Signature Date

FINAL SIGN-OFF:
CHEMCO QCS CUSTOMER OTHER
Name: Name: Name:
Signature: Signature: Signature:
Date: Date: Date:
Revision 0 December 1, 2005 QS-045 R0 LCR.doc Page 1 of 1
 Notice To Inspect QS-050
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

EQUIPMENT TAG #

Following Criteria has been met:

R Installed as per Drawings

R Installed as per Specs and Details
R All deficiencies noted ( punchlist attached)
R All R.F.I.’s closed (unclosed R.F.I.’s are to be attached)
R All As-Builts completed and attached
R Supervision has audited installation

Description of work to be inspected :

Approved for inspection by:

Name Signature Date

Audit Results: Audit Deficiency List Attached #

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-050 R1 Notice To Inspect Page 1 of 1

 QS-052

NOTICE OF COMPLETION
Transfer of System, Care, Custody and Control

Dated:

SYSTEM: CWP:

Dear Sir or Madam

The above referenced System / CWP has been turned over from Chemco Electrical
Contractors Ltd. to ____________ (Client) through your Turn-over Co-ordinator. Care,
custody and control of this System / CWP lies with the Client from the date of this notice.

The System / CWP has been completed in accordance with Specifications and is now
available for commissioning procedures.

Attached to this turn-over package is a punchlist indicating the Client’s / Owner’s agreement
that certain punchlist items may be completed after your acceptance of the subject turnover
package.

Please sign and return one copy within five working days of its receipt in acknowledgement of
your acceptance. This document shall be considered accepted if not returned within the time
period specified.

Care, custody and control of the above system is transferred to the Client with the
understanding that there will be no energization of field circuits from this system without the
verbal notification between the Turn-over Co-ordinator for Chemco and the Client.

Sincerely,

Chemco Turnover Co-ordinator

Certificate of Acceptance Dated:

Client / Owner

Comments:

Action Required: Due Date:

Enclosures:

Revision 0 February 10, 2004 QS-052 R0 Notice of Completion Page 1 of 1

 EQUIPMENT
QS-054
TURNOVER LOG
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Designation Description Turned Over To: Date:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0, March 11, 2004 QS-054 R0 Equipment Turnover Log Page 1 of 1
 Equipment Turnover QS-056
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Tag Number: Requisition Number

Drawing and Rev :

DOCUMENT TURNOVER
Copy #
Documents Comments
Submitted
Receiving Report
Equipment test form containing Namplate Data:
Preservation log
Manufacturer’s Testing Procedures
Manufacturer’s Shipping Documents
Other:

RELEASED BY:
Company Name:
Company Representative:
Representative’s Position:
Representative’s Signature
Date Signed:

RELEASED TO:
Company Name:
Company Representative:
Representative’s Position:
Representative’s Signature
Date Signed:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0, March 11, 2004 QS-056 R0 Equipment Turnover Page 1 of 1
 QS-058

Shipping Release Authorization

Date:

SYSTEM: CWP: BUILDING:

Dear Sir or Madam,

The above referenced System / CWP / Building is released from Chemco Electrical
Contractors Ltd. for shipping to _______________________________

Attached to this shipping release authorization is a punch list indicating the Client’s / Owner’s
agreement that certain punch list items may be completed after your acceptance of this
shipping release authorization.

Please sign and return one copy within one working day of receipt in acknowledgement of
your acceptance.

Signed,

Chemco Representative

Certificate of Acceptance

Client / Owner Date

Comments:

Enclosures / Attachments:

Revision 0 November 6, 2008 QS-058 R0 Shipping Release.doc Page 1 of 1

 Punch List QS-060
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Area: Page Of
Location: Date:
ITEM CATEG- DATE DATE SIGN-
DESCRIPTION ORY
NO. INITIATED COMPLETE OFF

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 February 20, 2004 QS-060 R1 Punch List Page ____ of ____
 PURCHASE ORDER
QS-062

9220 – 39 Avenue
Edmonton, Alberta T6E 5T9
Telephone: (780) 436-9570 Fax: (780) 434-0811 Date 20

#6 – 210 MacAlpine Crescent Job

Fort McMurray, Alberta T9H 4A6
Telephone: (780) 790-9722 Fax: (780) 790-1610 Via

To Ship To

Please Supply . . . . . . Copies of invoice with billing

Quantity Code Material Unit Disc. Cost

ALL MATERIALS MUST BE SUPPLIED WITH MTRs. ALL FITTINGS MUST BE REGISTERED WITH THE
ALBERTA BOILERS SAFETY ASSOCIATION (ABSA).
Purchase Authorized by Amount of Sales Tax MUST be shown separately on all invoices

00000
Revision 0 October 1, 2004 QS-062 R0 Sample Purchase Order
 QS-064

CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

We certify that all material supplied meets the requirements of

your Purchase Order and meets the requirements of Chemco’s
Quality Program.

Chemco Job No.:

Project:
Contract No.:
Purchase Order Number:

Chemco Electrical Contractors Ltd.

Signature

Title

Date

Revision 0 May 2, 2007

9220 – 39 Avenue • Edmonton, AB T6E 5T9 • Phone (780) 436-9570 • Fax (780) 434-0811
#6 – 210 MacAlpine Crescent • Fort McMurray, AB T9H 4A6 • Phone (780) 790-9722 • Fax (780) 790-1610
 Quality Assessment QS-070
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

ASSESSMENT DATE :
DOCUMENT CONTROL
Document Receiving List: ( indicating all construction documents received in the past 30 days )
Are All Construction Drawings Current ?
Sets Results Comments
Control Set
Estimating
QA/QC
Field
ORGANIZATION CHART
Results Comments
Organization Chart Posted
Org. Chart Current
CONSTRUCTION WORK PACKAGE LOG
Results Comments
C.W.P. Log Available
C.W.P. Log Current
REQUEST FOR INFORMATION LOG
Results Comments
R.F.I. Log Available
R.F.I. Log Current
Over Due R.F.I.'s Flagged
NON-CONFORMANCE REPORT LOG
Results Comments
N.C.R. Log Available
N.C.R. Log Current
Over Due N.C.R.'s Flagged
MATERIAL REQUISITION LOG
Results Comments
M. Req. Log Available
M. Req. Log Current
Over Due Req's Flagged
CHEMCO OTHER
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-070 R1 Quality Assessment Page 1 of 2
 Quality Assessment QS-070
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

WORKFORCE PERSONNEL LOG
Results Comments
Personnel Log Available
Personnel Log Current
Qualifications On File
Training Records On File
TESTING EQUIPMENT CALIBRATION LOG
Results Comments
Calibration Log Available
Calibration Log Current
EQUIPMENT PRESERVATION LOG
Results Comments
Preservation Log Available
Preservation Log Current
NOTES :

CHEMCO OTHER
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-070 R1 Quality Assessment Page 2 of 2
 Receiving Log QS-080
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

PO# Page Of
Supplier
ITEM CSA DATE RECEIVED
QTY DESCRIPTION CONDITION
NO. CERTIFIED? RECEIVED BY

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-080 R1 Receiving Log Page 1 of 1

 QS-084

REQUISITION FOR MATERIAL ORDER

Suggested Supplier Requisition No.

Sheet of
Address Project No.
Project
Ship To: Location
Date Required

ITEM QUANTITY UNIT GIVE COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL COST CODE & CLASS PURCHASE ORDER

ALL MATERIALS MUST BE SUPPLIED WITH MTRs. ALL FITTINGS MUST BE REGISTERED WITH THE
ALBERTA BOILERS SAFETY ASSOCIATION (ABSA).

Requisitioned By Date

Approved By Date
PROJECT MANAGER

Owner’s Approval Date

Revision 0 October 1, 2004 QS-084 R0 Requisition

 MATERIAL EXCEPTION
QS-085
REPORT (MER)
CONTRACT # CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB # CWP

THIS REPORT ISSUED: REQUISITION NO. P.O. NO. RECEIVING REPORT

DATE:
MER #:
VENDOR: SHIPPER: DATE MAT'L REC'D.

PURCH X-NO.
SHIPPED FROM: F.O.B. TERMS: PREPAID COLLECT

REASON FOR REPORT

CARRIER: OVERAGE SHORTAGE DAMAGE NOT AS ORDERED
OTHER:

ITEM QUANTITY DESCRIPTION OF EXCEPTED OR REJECTED MATERIAL REMARKS

AUTHORIZED INSPECTOR CONCURRENCE: DATE:

(FOR ASME BOILER AND PRESSURE VESSEL CODE ITEMS ONLY)

OVERAGE OR NOT AS ORDERED DAMAGE

NOT ACCEPTABLE, ADVISE DISPOSITION TYPE: VISIBLE CONCEALED
ACCEPTABLE, ISSUE CHANGE ORDER DAMAGE ACKNOWLEDGED BY CARRIER PER

REMARKS:
ATTACHED BILL NO.
SHORTAGE CONCEALED DAMAGE, RECEIVER'S AFFIDAVIT ATTACTED
TYPE: VISIBLE CONCEALED NOT ACCEPTED, HELD FOR SALAVAGE & DISPOSITION
VISIBLE SHORTAGE ACKNOWLEDGED BY CARRIER PER WILL RETAIN AND REPAIR MATERIAL PER
ATTACHED BILL NO.
CONCEALED SHORTAGE, RECEIVER'S AFFIDAVIT ATTACHED FIELD X-NO.
REMARKS REMARK

PERFORMED BY FIE
ACTION

REQUIRED BY HOME OFFICE:

REPORTED BY:

Revision 0 May 21, 2004 QS-085 R0 MER Page 1 of 1

 MATERIAL EXCEPTION REPORT LOG (MERL) QS-086
CONTRACT # CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB # CWP

Inventory Commodity
MER Date Line # Quantity UOM Description of Exception Corrective Action Complete
Requisition Code

Revision 0 May 21, 2004 QS-086 R0 MER Log Page 1 of 1

 Request For Information QS-088
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Issued To: RFI No.:

Date:
No. of Pages:
Ref Drawings:
REQUEST TITLE:
QUESTION / REQUEST: Response Requested: [ ] 48 Hours [ ] Other Date:

Potential Impact: [ ] Cost [ ] Schedule

Submittor: Print Name: Signature: Date:

RESPONSE BY CLIENT:

Approved By: Print Name: Signature: Date:

Revision 1 April 2, 2004 QS-088 R1 Request For Information (RFI) Page 1 of 1

 RFI LOG QS-089
JOB #:

Answer
RFI CWP System Submitted
Subject / Description Submitted By Received Waiting On: RFI Closed
Number Number Number Date
Date

Revision 1 January 3, 2008

Printed: 1/3/2008 9:47 AM QC-089 R1 RFI Log 1 OF 1
 Signature Log QS-090
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

NAME (PRINT) COMPANY SIGNATURE INITIAL

Revision 1 January 12, 2004 QS-090 R1 Signature Log Page 1 of 1

 Source Inspection Record QS-092
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.6 Manuf:
1.3 Location: 1.7 Detail #:
1.4 Descr: 1.8 Ref Dwg:
1.5 PO / Req 1.9

2.0 INSPECTIONS
Qty Equipment Checks / Observations Results Comments

2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

2.8

2.9

2.10

Attachments

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED / WITNESSED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 January 22, 2004 QS-092 R0 Source Inspection Record Page 1 of 1
 Test Equipment Log QS-094
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Chemco Date Equipment Calibration

Log # Description Make / Model Serial #
ID # Calibrated Location Due Date

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QS-094 R2 Test Equipment Log Page _____ of _____
 Welders' / Welding Operators' Log QS-098

Job No.:
Welding Max.
Welder's / Welding Operators Mat.erial Electrode
Procedure Position Deposit Min. Pipe PQ Card
Name Process "P" "F"
Qualified To Qualified Weld Metal Diameter Expiry Date
& Symbol & ABSA File No. No. No.
(WPS #) Thickness

W-

W-

W-

W-

W-

Revision 0 October 1, 2004 QS-098 R0 Welders Log Page 1 of 1

 QP-001

LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL PROCEDURES INDEX

PROCEDURE Title Rev Date

QP-100 General Electrical Procedure 1 03/26/04

QP-101 Electrical Equipment Safety 0 12/17/08
QP-127 Instrument Installation – Electrical 2 03/27/09
QP-152 Motor Bump & Run-In Procedure 0 03/09/05
QP-161 Dry Type Transformer Less Than 300 KVA 600V and Below 0 02/24/04
QP-162 Low Voltage Motor Control Center 0 02/24/04
QP-163 Low Voltage MCC Wrapper 0 02/24/04
QP-164 Low Voltage Transfer Switch 0 02/24/04
QP-165 Annunciator Panel 0 02/24/04
QP-178 MV & HV Cable Insulation Resistance Testing 0 07/26/05

Revision 5 June 16, 2009 QP-001 R5 LV Electrical Procedures Index.doc Page 1 of 1

6/17/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-100

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a general procedure for field inspection and testing of electrical

installations.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to industrial installations and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. The contract documents and project specifications must be consulted to
determine the project specific requirements.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Field QC Specialists and Inspectors are responsible for implementation and
compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 Project Specifications

5.0 PROJECT REVIEW

5.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 7.2.2.

5.2 Prior to commencement of work, a review and familiarization of the following

project documentation shall be undertaken:

• Scope of Work
• Approved for Construction drawings
• Cable Schedules
• Specifications
• Instrument Index
• Standard Details
• Inspection & Test requirements
• Calibration requirements

6.0 INSPECTION & TEST PLANS

6.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Sub-Section 7.1.

Revision 1 March 26, 2004 QP-100 R1 General Electrical Procedure.doc Page 1 of 5

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-100

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROCEDURE

6.2 An Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be developed based on project
requirements and shall be sufficiently detailed to indicate:

• The inspection and test activities relevant to the Scope of Work

• The governing procedures
• The acceptance criteria
• Frequency of inspections and tests
• Hold, Witness, Review and Surveillance points etc.
• Special instructions
• Quality records

6.3 The Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be submitted to the Customer and
approved by the Customer prior to commencement of work. The Customer
has the option of identifying his/her comments and placing Hold / Witness
points on the approved copy.

6.4 A final ITP shall be established, incorporating the Customer’s review.

6.5 ITP’s shall be signed off by Chemco and optionally by the Customer as the
inspections and tests are completed. The signed off copy shall be included
in the project turnover documentation.

7.0 RECEIVING

7.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 7.4.3.

7.2 All items shall be inspected for damage or missing components upon
receipt.

7.3 Instruments and materials shall be checked for conformance against

available specifications, purchase orders and against the instrument data
sheet, provided by the Customer. Particular attention shall be paid to
hazardous area classification, CSA or other required approvals,
calibration status and records and correctness of identification tags.

7.4 Pre-calibrated instruments shall be accompanied with a calibration

certificate and calibration sticker placed on the instrument. For non-
calibrated instruments, refer to the Instrument Calibration section of this
procedure.

Revision 1 March 26, 2004 QP-100 R1 General Electrical Procedure.doc Page 2 of 5

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-100

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROCEDURE

7.5 A Receiving Report shall be completed for major electrical equipment

received and for materials received in bulk.

7.6 Any damage or missing components to instruments or other materials shall

be reported to the Customer in writing for disposition.

7.7 Nonconforming items shall be reported and dispositioned on a

Nonconformance Report in accordance with Quality Manual Sub-Section 8.3.

8.0 TEST EQUIPMENT

8.1 Test equipment shall be calibrated and logged in accordance with the Quality
Manual Sub-Section 7.6.

9.0 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION

9.1 Determine from the contract documents and scope of work the requirements
for calibration of instruments.

9.2 Some types of instruments may not normally require calibration on receipt.
Examples are:

• Instruments that are pre-calibrated

• Smart transmitters
• Thermocouples
• Resistance thermometers
• Pressure, temperature and level switches
• Level controllers

9.3 Arrange for bench calibration for all instruments requiring calibration.

9.4 Calibration includes an inspection of the instrument for condition, proper

tagging, proper area classification, proper regulatory approvals, conformity
with the data sheet and removal of shipping stops.

9.5 Record calibration results on the appropriate calibration record.

9.6 Affix calibration sticker to the calibrated instrument showing the calibration
date, tag number and name or initials of the person performing the
calibration.

Revision 1 March 26, 2004 QP-100 R1 General Electrical Procedure.doc Page 3 of 5

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-100

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROCEDURE

9.7 Nonconformances discovered during calibration shall be recorded on a

Nonconformance Report and the instrument shall be quarantined until a
satisfactory disposition is achieved.

9.8 Instruments shall not be issued for installation without proper identification
tags.

10.0 INSPECTIONS

10.1 Field inspections shall be conducted as the work progresses for the duration
of the work. Such inspections shall verify conformance to the applicable
codes, project drawings, standard details and specifications.

10.2 Incomplete installations shall be recorded on a Punch List. Punch list items
must be completed and signed off prior to system testing or loop checking.

10.3 Nonconforming product and installations shall be reported and controlled in

accordance with Quality Manual Subsection 8.3, dealing with
Nonconformances.

10.4 If necessary to deviate from the specifications during the installation of the
work, the proposed deviation must be submitted to the Customer for
approval in writing.

10.5 Inspection results shall be recorded on the appropriate exhibit which is

identified in the ITP.

11.0 RECORDS

11.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 4.2.6.

11.2 All appropriate field inspection and test forms shall be completed, signed
and dated by the Chemco Instrument QC Inspector. Test forms shall be
witnessed by the Customer as called for in the ITP.

11.3 Completed test forms become quality records and are to be kept in the
project QC file, suitably labeled, maintained and secured for ease of
retrieval.

11.4 Quality records shall be logged and transmitted to the Customer on system
or project turnover or as agreed with the Customer in advance.

Revision 1 March 26, 2004 QP-100 R1 General Electrical Procedure.doc Page 4 of 5

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-100

GENERAL ELECTRICAL PROCEDURE

12.0 AS-BUILT DRAWING RECORDS

12.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 4.2.4.

12.2 The work as installed shall be recorded on As-Built drawings, schedules,

instrument index as required by the contract documents.

12.3 Field run instrument piping shall be recorded on As-Built field piping
drawings or isometrics. The “Heat Numbers” of installed piping materials
shall be documented on the As-Built drawings.

12.4 As-Built drawings shall be logged and transmitted to the Customer on

system or project turnover or as agreed with the Customer in advance.

13.0 STORAGE & PRESERVATION

Storage and preservation shall be in accordance with the Quality Manual and
Procedure QP-080

Revision 1 March 26, 2004 QP-100 R1 General Electrical Procedure.doc Page 5 of 5

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

1.0 PURPOSE
To establish a procedure for minimum electrical equipment safety requirements.

2.0 SCOPE
This procedure applies to electrical equipment installations and is supplementary
to the Quality Manual. The contract documents and project specifications must
be consulted to determine the scope of work and project specific requirements.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for development, issue and
maintenance of this procedure.
3.2 Purchasing is responsible to ensure these requirements are conditional to
purchased equipment.
3.3 Field QC Specialists and Inspectors are responsible for inspection and
compliance with this procedure.

4.0 DEFINITIONS
4.1 Guarded means: covered, shielded, fenced, enclosed, or otherwise
protected by means of suitable covers or casings, barriers, rails or
screens, or mats or platforms to remove the liability of dangerous contact
or approach by persons or objects.
4.2 Accessible means: admitting close approach because the equipment is
not guarded by locked doors, elevation, or other effective means.
4.3 Exposed means: live parts can be inadvertently touched or approached
nearer than a safe distance by a person, and the term is applied to parts
not suitably guarded, isolated, or insulated.
4.4 CEC means: The Canadian Electrical Code in force by the Provincial
Authority Having Jurisdiction.

5.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

5.1 Alberta Safety Codes Act and Regulations
5.2 Alberta Standata

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 1 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

5.3 National Building Code or Alberta Building Code, as applicable.

5.4 Canadian Electrical Code
5.5 Project Specifications

6.0 APPROVED EQUIPMENT

6.1 As per the Canadian Electrical Code, electrical equipment used in
electrical installations within the jurisdiction of the inspection department
shall be approved and shall be of a kind or type and rating approved for
the specific purpose for which it is to be employed.
6.2 Specifically, in Alberta, electrical equipment in Alberta shall be in
accordance with Alberta , bear markings as approved therein
and shall be:
(a) certified by a certification body in accordance with the certification
body’s terms of accreditation with Standards Council of Canada, or
(b) inspected by a inspection body in accordance with the inspection
body’s terms of accreditation with Standards Council of Canada.
6.3 6.2 does not apply to electrical equipment of an electric distribution system
or transmission lines as defined in the Hydro and Electric Energy Act.

7.0 GUARDING OF BARE LIVE PARTS

7.1 Unless exempted by the CEC, guarding shall be as per the Canadian
Electrical Code:
7.1.1 Bare live parts shall be guarded against accidental contact by
means of approved cabinets or other forms of approved enclosures
except where the bare live parts are
(a) located in a suitable room, vault, or similar enclosed area
that is accessible only to qualified persons; or
(b) as permitted elsewhere by the CEC.
7.1.2 Where electrical equipment has mounted on it, within 900 mm of
bare live parts, non-electrical components that require servicing by
unqualified persons, suitable barriers or covers shall be provided
for the bare live parts.

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 2 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

7.1.3 Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations containing

exposed bare live parts shall be marked with conspicuous warning
signs forbidding entry to unqualified persons.
7.1.4 Adequate precautions, such as locks on circuit breakers or
switches, warning notices, sentries, or other equally effective
means, shall be taken to prevent electrical equipment from being
electrically charged when work is being done.

8.0 MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION

8.1 General requirements for maintenance and operation:
8.1.1 All operating electrical equipment shall be kept in safe and proper
working condition.
8.1.2 Electrical equipment maintained for emergency service shall be
periodically inspected and tested as necessary to ensure its
fitness for service.
8.1.3 Infrequently used electrical equipment maintained for future
service shall be thoroughly inspected before use in order to
determine its fitness for service.
8.1.4 Defective equipment shall either be put in good order or
permanently disconnected.
8.2 Maintenance in hazardous locations
8.2.1 In locations where explosive or flammable materials or gases are
present, special precautions shall be observed as follows:
(a) repairs or alterations shall not be made on any live
equipment; and
(b) fits or seals in enclosures shall be maintained in their original
safe condition.
8.3 Disconnection
8.3.1 No repairs or alterations shall be carried out on any live
equipment except where complete disconnection of the
equipment is not practicable.
8.3.2 Three-way or four-way switches shall not be considered as
disconnecting means.
8.3.3 Adequate precautions, such as locks on circuit breakers or
switches, warning notices, sentries, or other equally effective

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 3 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

means, shall be taken to prevent electrical equipment from being

electrically charged when work is being done.

8.4 Shock and flash protection

8.4.1 Electrical equipment such as switchboards, panelboards,
industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor
control centers that are installed in other than dwelling units and
are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or
maintenance while energized shall be field marked to warn
persons of potential electric shock and arc flash hazards.
8.4.2 The marking referred to in 8.4.1 shall be located so that it is
clearly visible to persons before examination, adjustment,
servicing, or maintenance of the equipment.
8.5 Working space around electrical equipment
8.5.1 A minimum working space of 1 m with secure footing shall be
provided and maintained about electrical equipment such as
switchboards, panelboards, control panels, and motor control
centers that are enclosed in metal, except that working space is
not required behind such equipment where there are no
renewable parts such as fuses or switches on the back and where
all connections are accessible from locations other than the back.
8.5.2 The space referred to in 8.5.1 shall be in addition to the space
required for the operation of draw-out-type equipment in either the
connected, test, or fully disconnected position and shall be
sufficient for the opening of enclosure doors and hinged panels to
at least 90°.
8.5.3 Working space with secure footing not less than that specified in
Table 56 of the CEC, shall be provided and maintained around
electrical equipment such as switchboards, control panels, and
motor control centers having exposed live parts.
8.5.4 The minimum headroom of working spaces around switchboards
or motor control centers where bare live parts are exposed at any
time shall be 2.2 m.

8.6 Entrance to, and exit from, working space

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 4 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

8.6.1 Each room containing electrical equipment and each working

space around equipment shall have suitable means of egress,
which shall be kept clear of all obstructions.
8.6.2 Where a room or space referred to in 8.6.1 contains equipment
that is rated 1200 A or more, or rated over 750 V, and consists of
transformers, overcurrent devices, switchgear, or disconnecting
means, such equipment shall be arranged so that, in the event of
a failure in the equipment, it shall be possible to leave the room or
space referred to in 8.6.1 without passing the failure point, except
that where this cannot be done, the working space requirement of
8.6.1 and 8.6.2 shall be not less than 1.5 m.
8.6.3 For the purposes of 8.6.2, the potential failure point is any point
within or on the equipment.
8.6.4 Doors or gates shall be capable of being readily opened from the
equipment side without the use of a key or tool.
8.7 Accessibility for maintenance
8.7.1 Passageways and working space around electrical equipment
shall not be used for storage and shall be kept clear of obstruction
and arranged to give authorized persons ready access to all parts
requiring attention.
8.8 Illumination of equipment
8.8.1 Adequate illumination shall be provided to allow for proper
operation and maintenance of electrical equipment.
8.9 Flammable material near electrical equipment
8.9.1 Flammable material shall not be stored or placed in dangerous
proximity to electrical equipment.
8.10 Ventilation
8.10.1 Adequate ventilation shall be provided to prevent the
development around electrical equipment of ambient air
temperatures in excess of those normally permissible for such
equipment.
8.11 Drainage
8.11.1 Electrical equipment having provision for draining moisture shall
be installed so that the drainage path is not impeded.
8.12 Electrical equipment near combustible gas equipment

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 5 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

8.12.1 When installed outdoors, arc-producing electrical equipment shall

not be installed within 1 m of the discharge of a combustible gas
relief device or vent.

9.0 SPREAD OF FIRE

9.1 Electrical installations shall be made so that the probability of spread of
fire through firestopped partitions, floors, hollow spaces, firewalls or fire
partitions, vertical shafts, or ventilating or air-conditioning ducts is reduced
to a minimum.
9.2 Where a fire separation is pierced by a raceway or cable, any openings
around the raceway or cable shall be properly closed or sealed in
compliance with The Alberta Building Code.
9.3 Project specific requirements to limit the spread of fire are specified in the
project specifications and standards or on detail drawings supplied by the
Client and shall be followed as a minimum.

10.0 EFFECTIVE GROUNDING

10.1 The path to ground from circuits, equipment, or conductor enclosures shall
be permanent and continuous, shall have ample ampacity to conduct
safely any currents liable to be imposed on it, and shall have impedance
sufficiently low to limit the voltage above ground and to facilitate the
operation of the overcurrent devices in the circuit.

11.0 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

11.1 Hazardous locations shall be classified according to the nature of the
hazard, as follows:
(a) Class I locations are those in which flammable gases or vapours are
or may be present in the air in quantities sufficient to produce
explosive gas atmospheres;
(b) Class II locations are those that are hazardous because of the
presence of combustible or electrically conductive combustible dusts;
and
(c) Class III locations are those that are hazardous because of the
presence of easily ignitable fibres or flyings, but in which such fibres

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 6 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-101

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT SAFETY

or flyings are not likely to be in suspension in air in quantities

sufficient to produce ignitable mixtures.

12.0 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS

12.1 Where electrical equipment is required to be approved for use in
hazardous locations, it shall also be approved for the specific gas, vapour,
mist, or dust that will be present.

13.0 NON-ESSENTIAL ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

13.1 No electrical equipment shall be used in a hazardous location, unless the
equipment is essential to the processes being carried on therein.
13.2 Service equipment, panelboards, switchboards, and similar electrical
equipment shall, where practicable, be located in rooms or sections of the
building in which hazardous conditions do not exist.

Revision 0 December 17, 2008 QP-101 R0 Electrical Equipment Safety.doc Page 7 of 7

12/17/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-127

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - ELECTRICAL

1.0 PURPOSE
To describe the procedure used for inspection of electrical / electronic
instruments and testing of instruments.

2.0 SCOPE
This procedure applies to electrical / electronic instruments primarily installed by
the electrical trade.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of
this procedure.
3.2 Project QC Manager / QC Leads & Specialists are responsible for the
implementation of the requirements of this procedure.
3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this
procedure and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 QC-127 Instrument Installation – Electrical
4.2 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE
5.1 Form QC-127, Section 1.0, may be partially completed (pre-filled) prior to
inspections taking place in the project’s early stages. Data in this Section
is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as applicable.
5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-127 at the time of inspection.

6.0 COMPLETING THE FORM

6.1 FORM HEADER
6.1.1 Record the Contract Number, Job Number, Project Description,
System Number, CWP Number and the Client’s Reference (e.g.
form number) in the spaces provided.

Revision 2 March 27, 2009 QP-127 R2 Instrument Installation - Electrical.doc Page 1 of 3

3/27/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-127

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - ELECTRICAL

6.2 SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Item
1.1 Tag Number: (Pre-filled data).
1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current
revision number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Area Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument
nameplate.
1.4 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index.
1.5 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number.
1.6 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and
description match instrument to be installed.
1.7 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify
location drawing number and that tag number is present on the
drawing.

6.3 SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Item
Note: Completed at instrument location.
2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.
2.2 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.
2.3 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail
and location drawing.
2.4 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed
easily and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.5 Installed as per Details & P&ID: Compare against Installation detail
and P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.6 Spare entries plugged: All entries sealed.
2.7 Instrument Enclosure Installation / Clean. Verify installation is as
per detail and is free of foreign material and debris.
2.8 Verify instrument is marked as CSA Certified.
2.9 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and
mounting spec.
2.10 Display mounted Horizontal: Verify if correct or mark N/A as
applicable.

Revision 2 March 27, 2009 QP-127 R2 Instrument Installation - Electrical.doc Page 2 of 3

3/27/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-127

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - ELECTRICAL

Item
2.11 Stand Grouted: Verify complete at grade level or mark N/A.
2.12 Verify instrument is glanded & terminated.
2.13 Verify remote element (e.g. TE) is glanded & terminated.
2.14 Cable Tag: Cable tag is installed and labeling corresponds with
project specifications, details, or drawings.
2.15 Verify cables are supported.
2.16 Enclosure Heater Wiring: Confirm wiring to external junction box
and heater is installed per details and the specified hazardous area
classification.
2.17 Seals Packed / Poured: Required depending on instrument area
classification and wiring method. Confirm color coding for packed
seals and that poured seals are complete and marked. If seals are
not to be poured until pre-commissioning is complete, mark “N/A”.

6.4 SECTION 7 COMMENTS

Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and
tests in above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When
recording punch items, record item number from the above inspection and
the description of the punch item. If more space is needed, attach
Punchlist.
e.g. 1.2 Datasheet on file is not current revision
2.2 Enclosure cover hinge is broken
2.12 Connector at instrument is not correct size.

6.5 FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “INSPESTED BY”
Section.
QC personnel responsible for auditing and signing off the “CHEMCO QC”
Section.
Client’s Representative responsible for verifying or witnessing the tasks
sign off the “CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP
arrangements.

Revision 2 March 27, 2009 QP-127 R2 Instrument Installation - Electrical.doc Page 3 of 3

3/27/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a motor bump (rotation) test and run-in procedure.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all motors requiring a bump and/or run in. It is assumed the
DCS will not be utilized for motor control or status. DCS control and status will be
verified as part of loop checks to be performed later.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for maintenance and distribution of this
procedure.

3.2 QC Managers, QC Specialists, QC Inspectors, Superintendents, Foremen and

craft personnel are responsible for implementation and compliance with this
procedure.

4.0 PRECAUTIONS

4.1 The motor power supply can cause personal injury. Assume all systems
are LIVE. Follow proper procedure for isolation and for de-isolation.

4.2 Caution: Visually examine the cubicle control wiring terminations to external
points to ensure the terminations match the schematic/wiring diagram.

4.3 Shut down the motor immediately if any unusual noises or vibrations are
observed during the bump or run-in.

5.0 REFERENCES

• P&ID • Lockout Procedure

• Equipment Datasheet • JHA
• Location Plans • Work Permit
• Single Line Diagrams • Mechanical Release
• Schematic & Wiring Diagrams

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 1 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

6.0 PERSONNEL REQUIREMENTS:

6.1 Give all parties 24 hour notice (or sufficient notice as agreed with Client) and a
brief bump and run-in schedule in advance of the tests.

6.2 The following personnel are suggested. To be confirmed with the Client in
advance of bump and run-in tests.

• Client Representative • 2 Construction Electricians

• 1 Plant Operations Electrician • 1 Construction QC Rep.
• 1 Plant Operations Millwright • Vendor Rep. (if required)
• 1 Construction Millwright

7.0 EQUIPMENT

7.1 Have the following available:

• Hand held vibration monitor • Clamp-on Multimeter

• Hand held infrared temperature meter • Tone generator
• Insulation resistance (Megger) test set • Torque wrench
• 4-20 mA power source (for VFD’s, if applicable) • All proper PPE
• Radio Communications with dedicated channel

8.0 PREPARATION

8.1 Discuss and decide who will lead (command) these tests.
8.2 Discuss and decide who will conduct the radio communications.
8.3 All personnel involved will review this procedure before commencing.
8.4 Ensure JHA is in place and reviewed with all personnel involved in the test. All
personnel shall sign-off the JHA as reviewed and accepted.
8.5 Ensure Permits to complete function, bump and run-in tests on the motor are in
place.
8.6 Ensure dedicated channel radio communication is established.
8.7 You must verify the work location and equipment to be worked on.
8.8 Walk down the installation to ensure readiness.
8.9 Flag-off and tag the area of the motor to be tested.
8.10 Have all related As-Built drawings: single line diagrams, motor schematics and
wiring diagrams readily available.
8.11 Have all related QC documents available and ready for recording test results.
8.12 Have vendor’s rep available, if required.
8.13 Motor starter must be isolated and locked out.

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 2 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

8.14 Verify the following Mechanical QC activities have been performed and
documented on the appropriate Mechanical Release form:

• Motor must be uncoupled from its driven equipment.

• Verify initial shaft/motor alignment checks are complete.
• Verify motor hold down bolts are tight / torqued.
• Verify motor bearings are lubricated.
• Verify motor drive ½ coupling is tight on the motor shaft.

8.15 Verify the following Electrical QC activities have been performed and
documented on the appropriate form:

• Verify installation of motor and cabling is complete.

• Verify breakers and overload relays have been set.
• Verify all software has been loaded in protection / overload relays and VFDs.
• Verify motor tests are complete.
• Motor nameplate information verified and matches datasheet.
• Motor circuit information recorded.
• Verify insulation resistance tests for motor are complete.
• Verify continuity and megger test is completed for power cables.
• Verify continuity and megger test is completed for control cables.
• Verify motor power cable termination inspections are complete.

9.0 FUNCTION CHECK PROCEDURE

9.1 Ensure starter is de-energized and locked out.

9.2 Ensure Hand/Off/Auto (H/O/A) or Local/Off/Remote (L/O/R) is in OFF position.
9.3 Using a voltmeter, ensure there is no voltage on the load side of the disconnect.
9.4 Verify and confirm starter size & type, breaker or fuse sizes and type.
9.5 Confirm overload relay size, type, range and setting is correct.
9.6 Disconnect motor “T” leads.
9.7 If it is necessary to install jumpers in the motor control circuit to permit motor run,
these must be extra long jumpers. (1 to 3 meters in length and is of a color that
stands out)
9.8 Unlock and de-isolate starter.
9.9 Function test motor START, STOP, HAND, OFF, AUTO (LOCAL, OFF,
REMOTE) controls. Refer to schematic for controls to be checked.
9.10 Function test relay trip.
9.11 Return H/O/A (L/O/R) to OFF position
9.12 De-energize and lockout starter.

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 3 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

10.0 MOTOR BUMP (ROTATION) TEST

10.1 Ensure starter is de-energized and locked out.

10.2 With starter “T” leads disconnected, tone-out the motor power supply cable to
confirm correct source and motor load, or alternatively, open the motor
termination box and ground one conductor. Confirm cable continuity using an
ohmmeter. Remove the ground from the conductor and verify that the conductor
is no longer grounded using an ohmmeter. Once continuity is proven, reinstate
termination and close motor terminal box.
10.3 At the starter, using an ohmmeter, measure the resistance between the phases
A-B, B-C, C-A. The readings should be practically equal.
10.4 Perform a 500 VDC insulation resistance test (Phase to Ground) on motor and
motor power cables.
10.5 Drain the meggered conductors to ground.
10.6 Reconnect starter “T” leads and torque to manufacturer’s specs.
10.7 Unlock and de-isolate motor starter.
10.8 Verify all personnel involved in the rotation test are ready for a motor bump start
and all personnel are clear of motor.
10.9 Acknowledge alarms and reset trips on the overload relay for the motor as
required.
10.10 One Construction Electrician remains on standby at the MCC in the event the
motor must be stopped from the motor starter STOP pushbutton.
10.11 At the H/O/A (L/O/R) select to HAND or LOCAL control. Refer to schematic for
the specific arrangement.
10.12 Inform motor run crew that bump is to be initiated.
10.13 At field control depress START button.
10.14 Within 3 seconds after the start button is depressed, select the H/O/A (L/O/R)
switch to the OFF position.
10.15 If motor rotation is correct, proceed to the run-in. If not, de-energize and lock out
the cubicle, correct rotation at the motor and proceed to the run-in.

11.0 MOTOR RUN-IN

11.1 Cubicle, if isolated and locked, may be unlocked and de-isolated.

11.2 Inform motor run-in crew that motor run-in is to be initiated.
11.3 Verify all personnel involved in the rotation test are ready for a motor bump start
and all personnel are clear of motor.
11.4 Construction Electrician at the H/O/A (L/O/R) select to HAND or LOCAL control.
Refer to schematic for the specific arrangement.
11.5 At field control depress START button.
11.6 Readings shall be recorded every 15 minutes throughout the uncoupled motor
run-in test.

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 4 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

11.7 The motor will be operated until winding and bearing temperatures have
stabilized for a period of at least 30 minutes (2 successive reading sets), or for a
period of time specified by the Client.
11.8 It is expected the test run period will be from 2 to 4 hours for temperatures to
stabilize.
11.9 Record test run data on the appropriate form. (Amperage, Volts, Vibration,
Bearing Temperature). It is not anticipated that low horsepower motors will have
bearing temperature tests. Temperature readings should be taken for the motor
horsepower(s) specified by the Client.
11.10 Construction Millwright shall record test run data on the appropriate form. It is
not anticipated that low horsepower motors will have vibration tests. Baseline
vibration readings should be taken for the motor horsepower(s) specified by the
Client.
11.11 The Client verifies the test data indicates motor and bearing temperatures are
stabilized and test run is complete.
11.12 Stop motor after completion of run-in test.
11.13 Return H/O/A (L/O/R) to OFF position.
11.14 Isolate the motor starter.
11.15 Remove any jumpers installed for the test.
11.16 Close up the motor starter.
11.17 Lockout the motor starter.
11.18 Remove flagging and cleanup the area.

12.0 CLOSEOUT

12.1 Contractor and Client shall sign off QC documentation

12.2 Sign off the permit(s).
12.3 Return permit to permit office.

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 5 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-152

MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN PROCEDURE

13.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA

13.1 In the absence of manufacturer’s or project specifications, or for reference, the

following may be utilized for maximum acceptable vibration amplitude:

Maximum Allowable Vibration Amplitude

RPM @ Velocity Velocity RPM @ Velocity Velocity
60 Hz in/s peak mm/s 50 Hz in/s peak mm/s
3600 0.15 3.8 3000 0.15 3.8
1800 0.15 3.8 1500 0.15 3.8
1200 0.15 3.8 1000 0.13 3.3
900 0.12 3.0 750 0.10 2.5
720 0.09 2.3 600 0.08 2.0
600 0.08 2.0 500 0.07 1.7
Derived from NEMA publication MG 1–1998, Section 7.8.1, Table 7–1. Table is unfiltered vibration limits for
resiliently mounted machines. For machines with rigid mounting multiply the limiting values by 0.8.

13.2 In the absence of manufacturer’s or project specifications, or for reference, the

following may be utilized for running voltages and currents:

“Running phase-to-phase voltages should be within 1.0 percent. Running

currents shall be balanced and proportional to load condition and nameplate
data.”

13.3 The criteria described in 13.1 and 13.2 above is reprinted from the 2003 NETA
Acceptance Testing Specifications in which it is stated:

“Purchasers may reproduce and use all or a portion of the Specifications after
paying the charges so long as the 2003 NETA Acceptance Specifications are
clearly and obviously identified in writing as the source of all such uses or
reproductions.”

© Copyright 2003
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
PO Box 687, 106 Stone Street
Morrison, CO 80465

Revision 0 March 9, 2005 QP-152 R0 Motor Bump Run-In Page 6 of 6

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for testing a dry type transformer, below 300 KVA, 600 V
and below.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all installations using dry type transformers, below 300
KVA with the primary voltage at or below 600 V. This procedure is supplementary
to the Quality Manual. The contract documents and project specifications must be
consulted to determine the project specific requirements.

This scope is based on the transformer being part of a new installation that is
installed and/or commissioned for the first time.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

3.3 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test results
and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 Manufacture’s instruction manual

4.3 NETA Standards

5.0 PREPARATION

5.1 Determine from the Client if it is required if any of the testing is to be

witnessed. If so, try and identify if the Client requires witness testing of all
the tests on the transformer or just a portion of several.

5.2 Discuss with the Client to identify any hold points. Ensure that any hold
point that is witnessed by the Client is initialed by the Client on the test
sheet.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 1 of 6

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

5.3 Also determine if it is OK to proceed with the testing of the transformer in

the Client’s absence if the Client’s schedule does not allow the Client to stay
during testing.

5.4 Prior to starting the test, ensure that all Client and Chemco requirements
necessary to allow work access to the equipment are followed (i.e. permit,
JHA etc). Follow safe work practices (i.e. equipment locked out, tagged out
and grounded where applicable) to ensure the equipment is safe to work on.

5.5 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to be used and ensure it is
within the calibration period for that equipment.

5.6 Record all test results on Chemco test sheet QC-161.

5.7 Check to ensure that the power supply that is connected to the test
equipment is not being overloaded or subject to nuisance tripping. Use a
portable generator if the power quality and reliability is questionable.

5.8 Fill in the nameplate data onto the test sheet. Check to ensure that the
nameplate data of the transformer matches the data from the Single Line
Diagram (SLD).

5.9 Test will be done with the transformer in its final location. No work
described in this procedure is to be performed on the unit if the transformer
is to be moved.

5.10 All power cables at the transformer are disconnected and safely removed
and isolated away from the transformer.

6.0 INSPECTIONS

6.1 Verify with the construction foreman that the transformer is in its final
location and that no further physical adjustments are necessary.

6.2 Unless previously done so by others, clean out the entire cell. If possible,
use a paint brush with the bristles cut back so there is only 1 inch of the
bristles remaining and clean the entire unit from top to bottom.

UNLESS IT IS GUARANTEED TO BE DRY, DO NOT USE COMPRESSED

AIR AS IT HAS A HIGH PROBABILITY OF SUBJECTING THE
WINDINGS TO MOISTURE THAT IS IN THE COMPRESSED AIR.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 2 of 6

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

6.3 Check the core ground strap at the transformer. Is it a solid connection. Is
there any severe kinks or tears in the strap.

6.4 Check to ensure that transformer frame and XO are grounded. Ensure these
connections are tight.

6.5 Check all electrical connections to ensure no loose or broken connections.

6.6 Check if there are any shipping braces. Remove them if any are found.

6.7 Inspect the entire transformer for signs of water. (Rust, water stains on dust
areas etc). Inform the QC Foreman if any evidence is found.

6.8 If the transformer is to be mounted outside, is the transformer rated for

outdoor exposure. Are there louvers on the doors. Are these louvers
designed to keep out snow, dust and rain. If unsure ask the QC foreman

Are there filters on the doors to keep out dust and foreign material out.
Have they been cleaned. If not, vacuum them and put back in place.

6.9 If specified by project specifications, have rubber ISO pads been installed at
the base of the transformer.

6.10 If the transformer is equipped with insulators, are any of them chipped,
cracked or loose.

6.11 Check if there is any corrosion on the transformer or its enclosure

6.12 Check the mounting clearances as per CEC 26-248 subrules 1 to 3 which
states

(1) Transformers of dry core open ventilated type shall be mounted so that there is an
air space of not less than 150 mm between transformer enclosures and between a
transformer enclosure and any adjacent surface except floors.

(2) Notwithstanding Subrule (1), where the adjacent source is a combustible material,
the minimum permissible separation between the transformer enclosure and the
adjacent surface shall be 300 mm.

(3) Notwithstanding Subrule (1), where the adjacent surface is the wall on which the
transformer is mounted, the minimum permissible separation between the
enclosure and the mounting wall shall be 6 mm if the adjacent surface is of:

(a) Non combustible material: or

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 3 of 6

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

(b) Combustible material adequately protected by non combustible heat

insulating material other than sheet metal; or

(c) Combustible material shielded by grounded sheet metal with an air space
of not less than 50 mm between the sheet metal and the combustible
material.

6.13 If required by project specifications, verify there are phase markings present
on the transformer connections.

6.14 Confirm that the transformer housing and (where applicable) the transformer
core has been anchored correctly.

6.15 Ensure that the tap position is correct and the connection is tight.

7.0 ELECTRICAL TESTS

7.1 INSULATION TEST

7.1.1 Unless instructed by the QC Foreman stating otherwise, perform the

insulation checks at 1000 V (Taken from NETA Table 10.5
“Acceptance Test Voltage and Minimum Results for Transformers”.)

7.1.2 Jumper all of the high voltage windings together.

7.1.3 Jumper all of the low voltage windings (including X0 if equipped)

together.

7.1.4 Get a test lead, connect one end of the lead to ground. The other
end is to be used to discharge the windings after the test.

7.1.5 Prove the integrity of the megger by doing the following:

7.1.5.1 Move the voltage selector switch on the megger to 1000 V

dc.

7.1.5.2 Connect one lead of the megger to the positive terminal

and the other lead to the negative terminal. Leave the
leads in open air and do not touch.

7.1.5.3 Turn on the megger. It should read full scale.

7.1.5.4 Touch the ends of the leads together, the needle should
read a short.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 4 of 6

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

7.1.5.5 Remove the leads from each other, the reading should go
back to full scale.

7.1.5.6 If the megger does not do any of the above, inform the QC
Foreman.

7.1.6 High to Low and Ground Test

7.1.6.1 Connect the low voltage windings to ground.

7.1.6.2 Connect the negative lead of the megger to ground.

7.1.6.3 Connect the positive lead to the HV windings.

7.1.6.4 With the Megger at 1000 V, turn the megger on and leave
on for 1 min (unless there is an immediate problem
evident).

7.1.6.5 After 1 minute turn megger off. Touch the grounded test
lead to the HV bushings to discharge the windings.

7.1.7 Low to High and Ground

7.1.7.1 Connect the High voltage windings to ground.

7.1.7.2 Connect the negative lead of the megger to ground.

7.1.7.3 Connect the positive lead to the LV windings.

7.1.7.4 With the Megger at the voltage specified by NETA for the
LV winding, turn the megger on and leave on for 1 min
(unless there is an immediate problem evident).

7.1.7.5 After 1 minute turn megger off. Touch the grounded test
lead to the HV bushings to discharge the windings.

7.1.8 Prove that the megger is working again (section 7.1.5).

7.1.9 If the insulation value is less than the calculated result in the following
formula (NETA table 10.5 of, “Acceptance Test Voltage and Minimum
Results for Transformers”) for any test then clean all the windings
and bushings and retest. Inform the QC Foreman if test results are
the same or if the cause for these megger readings cannot be
determined.
Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 5 of 6
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-161
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMER TEST PROCEDURE
Less than 300 KVA and 600 V and below

The formula is as follows: IR = CE

√kVA

Where: IR = Minimum recommended one minute

Insulation resistance

C = Constant (30 for dry type transformers)

E = Phase to phase voltage for a delta

windings and phase to neutral for wye
windings.

KVA = Rated kVA of the transformer

Example of minimum acceptance values for a 600/208 V, 250 KVA,

Delta - Wye dry type transformer.

Primary Winding Acceptance Limit:

IR = CE
√kVA

= 30 x 600
√250

= 1138.4 MΩ

Secondary Winding Acceptance Limit

IR = CE
√kVA

= 30 x (208 / √3)
√250

= 227 MΩ

7.2 Winding Resistance.

Using an ohmmeter, check on both the High and low side of the transformer
from a – b, b – c, c – a for a Delta Connection. For a Wye connection,
check the phase to Xo winding resistance for each phase.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-161 R0 Dry Type Transformer.doc Page 6 of 6

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for field inspection and testing of Low Voltage (600 V and
below) Motor Control Centers (MCC’s)

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to MCC’s as a whole, with all of the testing and inspections
for the individual wrappers and the components within these wrappers done by the
respective procedure for that component.

This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual. The contract documents

and project specifications must be consulted to determine the project specific
requirements.

This scope is based on the MCC lineup being installed and commissioned for the
first time and that the lineup (if any) that this MCC is being connected too is dead at
the time the work below is being done.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

3.3 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test results
and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 NETA Testing Standards

4.3 Manufacturer’s instruction manual as required.

5.0 PREPARATION

5.1 Determine from the Client if it is required if any of the testing is to be

witnessed. If so, try and identify if the Client requires witness testing of all
tests on the MCC assembly or just a portion of several.
Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 1 of 8
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

Discuss with the Client to identify any hold points. Ensure that any hold point
that is witnessed by the Client is initialed by the Client on the test sheet.

Also determine if it is OK to proceed with the testing MCC in the Client’s

absence if the Client’s schedule does not allow the Client to stay during
testing.

5.2 Prior to starting the test, ensure that all Client and Chemco requirements
necessary to allow work access to the equipment are followed (i.e. permit,
JHA etc). Follow safe work practices (i.e. equipment locked out, tagged out
and grounded where applicable) to ensure the equipment is safe to work on.

5.3 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to be used and ensure it is
within the calibration period for that equipment.

5.4 Check to ensure that the power supply that is connected to the test
equipment is not being overloaded or subject to nuisance tripping. Use a
portable generator if the power quality and reliability is questionable.

5.5 Fill in the nameplate data onto the test sheet. Check to ensure that the
nameplate data and the data from the Single Line Diagram (SLD) match.

No As Left testing is to be performed on the lineup if it is to be moved or if

any power connections to an existing lineup (if applicable) have to be
completed.

5.6 Record all test results on Chemco test sheet QC-162.

Continued on next page

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 2 of 8

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

5.7 Draw a sketch of the layout of the structure in single line diagram form in the
test sheet using the following as a guide. Repeat similar layout for ground
bus.

Main Incoming
Cell Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4

Cable from
XYZ
Feeder

A Main Horizontal Bus B

C D E F
Vertical Bus 1 Vertical Bus 2 Vertical Bus 3 Vertical Bus 4

Figure 1.0
Typical Layout Drawing for an MCC Assembly

The Letters A, B, C, D, E and F represent the measuring points. (ie From A

to B)

The vertical dotted lines represent the different vertical sections within the
MCC.

6.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING OF CELLS

The primary purpose of this inspection is to inspect all of the items that were not
covered in the wrapper inspections. This inspection would concentrate on the main
bus, all of the components in the main incoming cell and looking at the structure as a
whole.

6.1 Ensure the entire lineup has been vacuumed, all insulators wiped down with
lint free rags and there are no metallic burrs or chips of any kind in any of the
cells.

6.2 On connections where Belleville washers are used, ensure that the Belleville
washer is not completely compressed (Typically, the Belleville washer is

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 3 of 8

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

compressed to a maximum of 75% of the height of the washer). Check with

the manufacturer and acquire the torque value of connections.

If aluminum bus is used, ensure Belleville washers are used.

6.3 Check if the system ground is connected to the ground bus at both ends of
the lineup and be no less than 2/0 AWG copper (CEC 36-302 (3a)).

6.4 Perform a visual inspection on all hardware to ensure the connections are
tight. Perform a torque spot check at an inconspicuous connection point
where tightening of a bolt may be difficult to do.

6.5 If the lineup was shipped in sections, check at these shipping splits the
following:

6.5.1 Check the alignment of the main and ground bus connections.
Inspect the insulators for any undue stress at these connections.

6.5.2 Shine a flashlight at the cell walls where the shipping split is located.
This should be a flush fit. If there is a gap, use the flashlight to see the
extent of the gap. (On several occasions where this gap was
apparent, the main bus was visible when viewing from this gap.)

6.6 Check to ensure that all hardware is a minimum of grade 5 or better

6.7 If part of the Client’s requirements, ensure that the bus marked A, B, C or
Red, Black, and Blue in the main incoming cell.

6.8 If the lineup is fed from a transformer that has an NGR, ensure that there are
warning signs mounted at the NGR and at the MCC it is feeding. These
signs should indicate the following:

6.8.1 The system is impedance grounded; and

6.8.2 The maximum voltage at which the neutral may be operating relative
to the ground.

6.9 If the bus is encapsulated, check to ensure that joints where cables are
connected too are either taped for that value of voltage or have bus boots
that are rated for the system voltage.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 4 of 8

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

6.10 Check the overall condition of the lineup looking for shipping or installation
damage as well as scratch marks to the paint. Look for corrosion or rust
within the lineup to identify any moisture exposure. Flag as required.

6.11 Check the Kirk Key system on the main incoming cell. If so equipped,
ensure that access to the main incoming bus cannot be obtained until the
upstream supply is in the racked out condition and the Kirk keys (if
equipped) that allow it to be racked in are physically captured at the main
incoming door cell interlock.

6.12 If the MCC has heaters in the main incoming cell, if it has not been done
previously, perform the following on this heater. Any heaters in the wrapper
units would be done at the time the wrapper was being inspected.

6.12.1 Measure the resistance of the heater. Using the information on the
heater nameplate (using watts, volts or current to calculate
resistance), check to ensure that the resistance measured is the
same as the resistance calculated.

6.12.2 Verify control schematic back to the thermostat controlling the heater.

6.12.2 Verify that control schematic is safe to power up.

6.12.3 Power up the control schematic and verify that the thermostat
controlling the heater as well as the heater itself functions correctly.

6.13 Double-check the tightness on the terminations on any control wiring in the
main incoming cell. Do wiggle and tug checks on the wiring and crimps.

6.14 If required by Code (CEC 2-124) or by project specifications, ensure that

there are fire stops securely in place where applicable.

6.15 If required by project specifications, check to ensure each device within the
MCC has a lamacoid or label to identify the device.

6.16 Ensure that the MCC has been bolted to the floor as per the manufacturer’s
or project specifications.

7.0 ELECTRICAL TESTS

7.1 CONTACT RESISTANCE TEST MAIN BUS

7.1.1 On the test sheet identify the section as per figure 1.0 in section 5.7.
Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 5 of 8
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

7.1.2 Using the main incoming cell as the main reference point (A), connect
one current and voltage lead to the A phase bus where the incoming
cables connect.

7.1.3 Connect the other set of voltage and current leads to the opposite end
of the main horizontal bus (point B)

7.1.4 Set the ductor to 100 A and turn it on. Record the result on the test
sheet once the reading has settled. This result would be From A To
B.

7.1.5 If project specifications require that the vertical bus be measured

proceed to the next step. Other wise proceed 7.1.10 for acceptance
levels.

7.1.6 Turn off the ductor and remove the ductor leads from point B and
connect them to the first vertical section of bus (point C). It is
important that all of the A phase bus be done to avoid breaking the
ductor connection at point A. This eliminates the connection point at
A as a source of error if there is a high resistance found. If this
connection point is not broken, all of the points taken for that phase
can be compared to each other.

When measuring the vertical bus, take into account the size of the
bus. The resistance for a 400A bus will be in vertical section 1 will
have a higher resistance than the 800 bus in vertical section 2.

7.1.7 Set the ductor to 100 A and turn it on. Record the result on the test
sheet once the reading has settled

7.1.8 Once complete, repeat 7.1.6 for all other vertical sections connected
to the A Phase bus.

7.1.9 Repeat 7.1.2 to 7.1.8 for B and C phases.

7.1.10 Compare results to manufacture’s data. If this data is unavailable,

flag any value exceeding 50 µΩ per joint or any value which deviates
from another phase by 25%.

7.2 CONTACT RESISTANCE OF THE GROUND BUS

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 6 of 8

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

7.2.1 On the test sheet, clearly show the entire length of the main bus and
any ground bus going into the front portion of the MCC. Identify each
point to be measured including any accessible joints.

Start in the main incoming cell. Identify this point as A. The bus at the
next joint (or adjacent vertical section) would be marked as B.

7.2.2 Using the main incoming cell as the main reference point (A), connect
one ductor and voltage lead to the ground bus at that end of the bus.

7.2.3 Connect the current and voltage probe to the ground bus in the
adjacent vertical section or the next accessible bus joint. This would
be identified as B.

7.2.4 Set the ductor to 100 A and turn it on. Record the result on the test
sheet once the reading has settled. This result would be From A To
B.

7.2.5 Turn off the ductor; repeat 7.2.3 and 7.2.4 for all remaining exposed
joints and vertical sections.

7.2.6 Acceptance would be 50 µΩ less for each joint unless otherwise

stated by the customer.

7.3 INSULATION TESTS USING A MEGGER

7.3.1 The test voltage value should be available from the manufacture’s
specifications. If these values are not available from the
manufacturer, default to NETA standard of 1000 V.

7.3.2 Prove the integrity of the megger by doing the following:

7.3.2.1 Move the voltage selector switch on the insulation tester to

1000 V dc.

7.3.2.2 Connect one lead of the megger to the positive terminal

and the other lead to the negative terminal. Leave the leads
in open air and do not touch.

7.3.2.3 Turn on the megger. It should read full scale.

7.3.2.4 Touch the ends of the leads together, the needle should
read a short.
Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 7 of 8
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-162

LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR CONTROL CENTER TEST PROCEDURE

7.3.2.5 Remove the leads from each other, the reading should go
back to full scale.

7.3.2.6 If the megger does not do any of the above, inform the QC
foreman.

7.3.3 Get a test lead and connect one end to ground the other end is to be
used to discharge the Bus Duct after the test

7.3.4 Connect B and C phase to ground

7.3.5 Connect the negative lead of the megger to ground and the positive
lead to A phase.

7.3.6 Move the voltage selector switch on the megger to the test voltage to
be applied to the bus duct.

7.3.7 Turn megger on and leave on for the duration specified by the QC
Foreman (unless there is an immediate problem evident).

7.3.8 After the specified period turn megger off. Touch the grounded test
lead to the A phase buss.

7.3.9 Move the ground from B to A phase. Repeat 7.3.5 to 7.3.8 for B
phase.

7.3.10 Move the ground from C to B phase. Repeat 7.3.5 to 7.3.8 for C
phase.

7.3.11Repeat 7.3.2 to verify the integrity of the megger.

7.3.12 The acceptable values should be obtained from the manufacturer. If

these values are not available, compare this result to Table 10.1
“Insulation Resistance Tests electrical Apparatus and Systems” of the
NETA standards.

Investigate any values less than manufacturer’s acceptable limits or, if

they are not available, less than the NETA Standards found in the
above-mentioned table.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-162 R0 MCC Assembly.doc Page 8 of 8

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 DEFINITION:

A wrapper, in the context of this procedure, is the individual self contained cubicle
that is attached to the vertical bus within a Low Voltage Motor Control Center from
which down stream loads such as motors, lighting panels, etc are supplied power.

2.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for field inspection and testing of individual wrappers (in
Low Voltage (600 V and below) Motor Control Centers (MCC’s)

3.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all the individual wrappers and the components mounted
within the wrapper that are used and connected to an MCC.

This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual. The contract documents

and project specifications must be consulted to determine the project specific
requirements.

This scope is based on the wrapper being installed and commissioned for the first
time and that the lineup (if any) that this wrapper is being connected too is dead at
the time the work below is being done.

DO NOT PERFORM ANY WORK ON THE WRAPPER IF THE MCC IS

ENERGIZED. INFORM THE QC SPECIALIST AND PROCEED AS THE
SPECIALIST DIRECTS.

4.0 RESPONSIBILITY

4.1 The Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

4.2 The Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation

and compliance with this procedure.

4.3 The field testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test
results and compliance with this procedure.

5.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

5.1 Project Specifications

5.2 NETA Testing Standards

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 1 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

5.3 Manufacturer’s instruction manual as required.

6.0 PREPARATION

6.1 Determine from the Client if it is required if any of the testing is to be

witnessed. If so, try and identify if the Client requires witness testing of all
tests on all of the wrappers or just a portion of several.

Discuss with the Client to identify any hold points. Ensure that any hold point
that is witnessed by the Client is initialed by the Client on the test sheet.

Also determine if it is OK to proceed with the testing of the wrapper in the

Client’s absence if the Client’s schedule does not allow the Client to stay
during testing.

6.2 Prior to starting the test, ensure that all Client and Chemco requirements
necessary to allow work access to the equipment are followed (i.e. permit,
JHA etc). Follow safe work practices (i.e. equipment locked out, tagged out
and grounded where applicable) to ensure the equipment is safe to work on.

6.3 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to be used and ensure it is
within the calibration period for that equipment.

6.4 Check to ensure that the power supply that is connected to the test
equipment is not being overloaded or subject to nuisance tripping. Use a
portable generator if the power quality and reliability is questionable.

6.5 Fill in the nameplate data onto the test sheet. Check to ensure that the
nameplate data and the data from the Single Line Diagram (SLD) match.

No “As Left” testing is to be performed on the wrapper if it is to be

6.6 Record all test results on Chemco test sheet QC-163.

7.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING OF CELLS

7.1 Ensure the wrapper has been vacuumed, all components within the wrapper
have been wiped down with lint free rags and there are no metallic burrs or
chips of any kind remaining.

7.2 Check if there is a ground connection within the wrapper and that it is solidly
connected to the MCC ground.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 2 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

7.3 Perform a visual inspection on all hardware to ensure the connections are
tight. Perform a torque spot check at an inconspicuous connection point
where tightening of a bolt may be difficult to do.

7.4 If part of the Client’s requirements, ensure that the line side of the main
switching device is marked A, B, C or Red, Black, and Blue.

7.5 Check the overall condition of the wrapper looking for shipping or installation
damage as well as scratch marks to the paint. Look for corrosion or rust
within the wrapper to identify any moisture exposure. Flag as required.

7.6 If the wrapper has any heaters, perform the following on this heater.

7.6.1 Measure the resistance of the heater. Using the information on the
heater nameplate (using watts, volts or current to calculate
resistance), check to ensure that the resistance measured is the
same as the resistance calculated.

7.6.2 Verify control schematic back to the thermostat controlling the heater.

7.6.2 Verify that control schematic is safe to power up and all point to point
checks have been completed and accepted for this wrapper (and any
field devices that may be part of the control schematic).

7.6.3 Power up the control schematic and verify that the thermostat
controlling the heater as well as the heater itself functions correctly.

7.7 Double-check the tightness on the terminations on any control wiring in the
main incoming cell. Do wiggle and tug checks on the wiring and crimps.

7.8 If required by project specifications, check to ensure each device within the
wrapper has a lamacoid or label to identify the device.

7.9 Ensure that the wrapper has been correctly connected onto the bus and that
it is securely bolted to the MCC frame as per the manufacturer’s
specifications.

7.10 Check all components within the wrapper and compare to the single line.
Flag any items that were not the same as the single line.

7.11 Check the programmable overloads to ensure that they have been
programmed according to the engineered settings. If the relays have not
been programmed, and it is required by the project specifications to do so,
then program the relays.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 3 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

Overcurrent injection tests to verify the trip curves of the overloads are not
part of the standard commissioning procedure for wrappers and therefore
not included in this procedure. Defer this test to the High Voltage testing
group if required by project specifications.

7.12 If there are any electrically powered control devices on the door that the door
is bonded using a dedicated bonding wire (hinges are insufficient).

7.13 With the door closed, attempt to open and close the main switching device.
The device should operate smoothly with no binding. (If the device is a
Breaker with UV protection, perform this test during the function test found in
section 9.0).

7.14 With the main switching device closed, attempt to open the door. The door
should not be able to be opened.

Defeat the door interlock according to the manufacture’s instructions, this

should allow the door to be opened.

7.15 With the door open and the main switching device open, attempt to close the
device. The device should not be able to close.

7.16 Check all Power Fuses to ensure that they are all of the same rating and that
they have the same rating as shown on the single line. Check to ensure that
they are correctly mounted and if possible, that the current rating of the fuse
is facing the front of the wrapper.

8.0 POINT TO POINT CHECKS.

DO NOT ENERGIZE THE CIRCUIT WITHOUT PERFORMING THE POINT TO

POINT CHECKS OF THE ENTIRE LINEUP DUE TO THE COMMON
CONTROL POWER AND INTERCELL WIRING GOING THROUGHOUT THE
ENTIRE LINEUP.

Point to point checks will be done using the control schematic only. The wiring
diagram can be used as a cross-reference but it is not required to be highlighted.
Point to point checks will also include any and all field wiring entering/existing the
wrapper.

8.1 DO NOT USE THE BEEPER FUNCTION ON THE OHMMETER FOR

POINT TO POINT CHECKS.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 4 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

When the beeper function is used on Fluke meters, it will make an audible
noise if the resistance is 400 Ω or less. If using the beeper function
exclusively, (not looking at the resistance reading just depending on the
meter making a beeping noise), there would be no way of knowing if the
circuit was inadvertently miswired to a low resistance item (such as a control
relay) when it should have been directly wired to a terminal.

The meter will also show an open circuit on anything above 400 Ω. This has
also been known to cause problems.

The correct method of using the ohmmeter is to put it on auto range, touch
the leads together; the display should read 0.7Ω– 0.9Ω. Ensure that the
beeper function is off. Look at the display on the meter each time a
continuity check is performed looking specifically at the resistance. Check
any reading which has a resistance (excluding the resistance of the test
leads) when it should read a short, and vice versa.

8.2 Verify the operation of any switching device, any contacts on a relay (by
manually pulling in the relay if it is not solid state) as well as any other device
or auxiliary contacts (such as those used on a contactor) used within the
control circuitry.

8.3 Using the control schematic as a reference, check each point (including
termination points) identified on the control schematic.

(There may be some physical wiring connections between the points on

drawing that are not shown. Unless specifically instructed to do so by the
Specialist, do not attempt to find where each and every wire is going, only
verify where an electrical connection leaves one device and arrives at
another. If there are any termination points identified on the drawing, check
to ensure that the wiring goes to those points and highlight.)

8.4 Measure the resistances of the coils in the circuit. Write this resistance on
the drawing next to the coil as well as on the test sheet.

8.5 Ensure that the identification on the drawing for a particular device is
consistent with the identification of the device in the cell. (i.e. relay on
drawing is identified as TR 1. The relay in the cell that corresponds to this
relay in the drawing is identified as TR 1). Flag any device that is not
identified in the cell.

8.6 The point to points are considered to be done when all of the wiring on the
drawing is highlighted as well as any extra circuits or wiring that has been
found in the cell is identified and added to the drawing.
QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper
Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 5 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

8.7 When complete, write down the date the drawing was complete as well as
the initials of the individual that did the drawing on the AS BUILT drawing.

9.0 FUNCTION TESTING OF CONTROL CIRCUIT

9.1 Once the AS BUILT drawing and the visual inspections for the wrapper are
completed, verify with everyone involved that it is safe to connect supply
power to the wrapper.

Also verify that it is 100% safe to have power applied to the control circuit.
This includes checking with the construction foreman for that area and getting
his authorization to put power in the control cell.

9.2 Connect the hot lead of a cheater cord to the X1 of the control PT. Connect
the other lead of the cheater cord to ground.

Pull the high side fuses on the control PT so that power is not reverse fed
back onto the breaker stabs.

9.3 Connect a power bar to an energized source (either an outlet or an extension

cord that is connected to an outlet). Using a voltmeter, verify which slot is hot
on one of the outlets of the power bar. (There have been instances that the
neutral and the hot wires were reversed at on outlets which causes the
upstream breaker to trip when the cheater cord was connected to the power
bar).

9.4 Turn off the power bar and connect the cheater cord to the power bar. Turn
the power bar on.

EXERCISE CAUTION AND BE AWARE THAT THE HIGH SIDE

OF THE CONTROL PT IS NOW REVERSE FED SO IT IS NOW
AT THE VOLTAGE POTENTIAL OF THE LINEUP

9.5 Once the control wiring has been safely energized, go through the control
schematic, line by line and verify the functionality of each and every device in
the circuit and that the circuit functions as designed.

Verify the functionality of the remote devices such as local start / stop
stations, any permissives or start / stops from DCS or PLC outputs etc.

9.6 Once all complete, proceed to section 10.2 “Continuity Checks of the Power
Components”. When this is complete, proceed to section 9.7 below

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 6 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

9.7 Turn the power bar off and remove the cheater cord from the power bar.
Disconnect the cheater cord from the wrapper and return the control PT to As
Found conditions.

10.0 ELECTRICAL TESTS

This test will verify the insulation integrity of the power components within the
wrapper only. Therefore, the field power cables will have to be removed from the
outgoing field terminations.

This test is not intended to be used to check the cables to the load or the load itself.
Testing of the cables and the load is covered in other procedures in the quality
manual.

This test is to be applied to the power (main current carrying) side of all power
components within the wrapper.

Precautions have to be made when performing a megger test on the line side of the
device which connects to the MCC bus as voltage is now being applied to the bus.

Ask the client if the insulation checks performed on the bus is sufficient for the
insulation test on the line side of the device. If it is sufficient, only perform insulation
checks on the load side of the device. Record the results from the bus insulation
test (found in the QC-162 testsheet for the MCC lineup) in the line to ground column
of the test sheet.

If the insulation check is not sufficient, check to ensure that work on the bus is
complete. Also check and isolate any PT’s or capacitors that may be connected
across the bus.

10.1 INSULATION TESTS USING A MEGGER

10.1.1 Disconnect the field power cables from the outgoing field termination
at the wrapper.

10.1.2 Remove the fuses from the control PT high side (if applicable).

10.1.1 The test voltage value should be available from the manufacture’s
specifications. If these values are not available from the
manufacturer, default to NETA standard of 1000 V.

10.1.2 Prove the integrity of the megger by doing the following:

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 7 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

10.1.2.1 Move the voltage selector switch on the insulation tester to

1000 V dc.

10.1.2.2 Connect one lead of the megger to the positive terminal

and the other lead to the negative terminal. Leave the leads
in open air and do not touch.

10.1.2.3 Turn on the megger. It should read full scale.

10.1.2.4 Touch the ends of the leads together, the needle should
read a short.

10.1.2.5 Remove the leads from each other, the reading should go
back to full scale.

10.1.2.6 If the megger does not do any of the above, inform the QC
Specialist.

10.1.3 Get a test lead and connect one end to ground the other end is to
be used to discharge the device after the test.

10.1.4 Connect the load side of A and both sides of B and C phase to
ground

10.1.5 Connect the negative lead of the megger to ground and the
positive lead to line side of A phase.

10.1.6 Move the voltage selector switch on the megger to the test voltage
to be applied to the device.

10.1.7 Turn megger on and leave on for the duration specified by the QC
Specialist (unless there is an immediate problem evident).

10.1.8 After the specified period turn megger off. Touch the grounded
test lead to the line side of A phase.

10.1.9 Move the ground from the load side of A to the line side of A
phase. Repeat 10.1.5 to 10.1.8 for the load side of A phase.

10.1.10 Move the ground from the line side of B phase and connect to the
load side of A phase.

10.1.11 Repeat 10.1.5 to 10.1.10 for line and load of all phases of the
device.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 8 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

10.1.11 Repeat 10.1.2 to verify the integrity of the megger.

10.1.12 Repeat all of the above for all power components within the
wrapper unit.

10.1.13 When complete, reinstall the PT fuses (if applicable) and the field
termination leads to as found conditions.

10.1.13 The acceptable values should be obtained from the manufacturer.

If these values are not available, compare this result to Table 10.1
“Insulation Resistance Tests electrical Apparatus and Systems” of
the NETA standards.

Investigate any values less than manufacturer’s acceptable limits

or, if they are not available, less than the NETA Standards found in
the above-mentioned table.

10.2 CONTINUITY CHECK OF THE POWER COMPONENTS

Check with the QC specialist to determine if a 10 A ductor or if an ohmmeter

is to be used to measure the continuity of the power components. If not
specified within the project specifications or directed by the QC specialist,
default to an ohmmeter.

10.2.1 Electrically Operated Devices

This test applies to electrically operated components such as a

contactor or a Breaker with undervoltage protection.

This test is done in conjunction with section 9.0 “Function Testing of

the Control Circuit”.

With the device closed, using a calibrated ohmmeter, check the

continuity across each phase. Repeat for all other power components
within the wrapper.

10.2.2 Manually Operated Devices

This test applies to manually operated devices such as Disconnect
Switches or Breakers without UV protection.

Manually close the device. Using a calibrated ohmmeter, check the

continuity across each phase. Repeat for all other manually operated
power components within the wrapper.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 9 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-163
LOW VOLTAGE MCC WRAPPER
INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

10.2.3 Power Fuses

Using a calibrated ohmmeter, check the continuity across each fuse

and record.

QP-163 R0 LV MCC Wrapper

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 10 of 10
Inspection.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-164

LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFER SWITCH INSPECTION PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for field inspection of Low Voltage (600 V and below)
Transfer Switches.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to Low Voltage Transfer Switches and the components
within these Transfer Switches

This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual. The contract documents

and project specifications must be consulted to determine the project specific
requirements.

This scope is based on the Transfer Switch being installed and commissioned for
the first time and that the lineup (if any) that this Transfer Switch is being connected
too is dead at the time the work below is being done.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

3.3 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test results
and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 NETA Testing Standards

4.3 Manufacturer’s instruction manual as required.

5.0 PREPARATION

QP-164 R0 TRANSFER SWITCH

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 1 of 4
INSPECTION.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-164

LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFER SWITCH INSPECTION PROCEDURE

5.1 Determine from the Client if it is required if any of the inspections are to be
witnessed. If so, try and identify if it is required by the Client to witness all of
the inspections performed or just a portion of several.

Discuss with the Client to identify any hold points. Ensure that any hold point
that is witnessed by the Client is initialed by the Client on the test sheet.

Also determine if it is OK to proceed with the inspection of the Transfer

Switch in the Client’s absence if the Client’s schedule does not allow the
Client to stay during inspection.

5.2 Prior to starting the test, ensure that all Client and Chemco requirements
necessary to allow work access to the equipment are followed (i.e. permit,
JHA etc). Follow safe work practices (i.e. equipment locked out, tagged out
and grounded where applicable) to ensure the equipment is safe to work on.

5.3 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to be used and ensure it is
within the calibration period for that equipment.

5.4 Fill in the nameplate data onto the test sheet. Check to ensure that the
nameplate data and the data from the Single Line Diagram (SLD) match.

No As Left testing is to be performed on the lineup if it is to be moved or if

any power connections to an existing lineup (if applicable) have to be
completed.

5.5 Record all inspection results on Chemco test sheet QC-164.

6.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING OF CELLS

Electrical and function tests are to be performed by others. Therefore, no

electrical or function testing of the Transfer Switch is to be performed by
Chemco personnel unless instructed specifically by the QC Foreman
indicating to do so.

6.1 Check to ensure that the Transfer Switch is bolted to the floor and the vendor
instructions for bolting the Transfer Switch to the floor are followed.

6.2 Vacuum out the entire Transfer Switch enclosure to ensure that there are no
metal filings or chips in the switch components.

QP-164 R0 TRANSFER SWITCH

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 2 of 4
INSPECTION.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-164

LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFER SWITCH INSPECTION PROCEDURE

6.3 Check all hardware to ensure that grade 5 hardware is used and no
connections are missing flat washers or splits.

6.4 Inspect the entire enclosure for signs of corrosion or water entry.

6.5 If the enclosure uses heaters, check that these heaters are correctly installed
and function correctly.

6.6 Check the alignment of the breakers with the bus to ensure no undue stress
at those connections. Also check the alignment of the cables to the breaker
lugs to ensure that there is not too much tension on the lugs.

6.7 Verify that all field and factory wiring is complete. Once this is done, perform
point to point checks of the entire enclosure.

6.8 Check the overall physical condition of the enclosure making note of any
dents, damage to the paint etc.

6.9 Check the electrical connections to ensure that the electrical clearances are
not compromised.

6.10 Check the bus supports and bus barriers to ensure that all are in place, none
are loose and none are missing.

6.11 Check the cable lug terminations and bus joints to ensure that they are
torqued.

6.12 Check the cable lug terminations to ensure that they are not too big or too
small for the cables being used.

6.13 Ensure that the grounding has been complete and follows code standards.

6.14 If a Kirk key system is in place, that it functions as designed

6.15 Check the following

§ Cables from the line side of the normal breaker come from the normal
source

§ Cables from the line side of the emergency breaker come from the
emergency source.

QP-164 R0 TRANSFER SWITCH

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 3 of 4
INSPECTION.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-164

LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFER SWITCH INSPECTION PROCEDURE

§ Cables from the transfer switch load breaker go to the emergency load

6.16 Perform a phase rotation check on both the source and the emergency
supply; ensure that both have the same ABC sequence.

6.17 Check that the cables from the normal and emergency sources are
connected in ABC sequence

6.18 Check the Transfer switch current and voltage rating and ensure that it
agrees with the system current and voltage.

QP-164 R0 TRANSFER SWITCH

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 Page 4 of 4
INSPECTION.doc
Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-165

ANNUNCIATOR INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for field inspection of annunciator panels

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to annunciator panels and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. The contract documents and project specifications must be consulted to
determine the project specific requirements.

This scope is based on the annunciator panel being installed and commissioned for
the first time and that the equipment that this annunciator panel is monitoring is
dead at the time the work below is being done.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

3.3 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test results
and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 NETA Testing Standards

4.3 Manufacturer’s instruction manual as required.

5.0 PREPARATION

5.1 Determine from the Client if it is required if any of the inspections are to be
witnessed. If so, try and identify if it is required by the Client to witness all of
the inspections performed or just a portion of several.

Discuss with the Client to identify any hold points. Ensure that any hold point
that is witnessed by the Client is initialed by the Client on the test sheet.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-165 R0 Annunciator Panel.doc Page 1 of 3

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-165

ANNUNCIATOR INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

Also determine if it is OK to proceed with the inspection of the annunciator

panel in the Client’s absence if the Client’s schedule does not allow the
Client to stay during inspection.

5.2 Prior to starting the test, ensure that all Client and Chemco requirements
necessary to allow work access to the equipment are followed (i.e. permit,
JHA etc). Follow safe work practices (i.e. equipment locked out, tagged out)
to ensure the equipment is safe to work on.

5.3 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to be used and ensure it is
within the calibration period for that equipment.

5.4 Fill in the nameplate data onto the test sheet. Check to ensure that the
nameplate data and the data from the Single Line Diagram (SLD) match.

No As Left testing is to be performed on the annunciator panel if it is to be

moved or if any connections to an existing lineup (if applicable) have to be
completed.

5.5 Record all inspection results on Chemco test sheet QC-165.

6.0 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING OF ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

6.1 Vacuum out the entire annunciator panel enclosure to ensure that there are
no metal filings or chips remaining.

6.2 Check all terminations within the annunciator panel to ensure all are tight and
none are stripped.

6.3 Inspect the entire enclosure for signs of corrosion or water entry.

6.4 Verify that all field and factory wiring is complete. Once this is done, perform
point to point checks of all of the wiring associated with the annunciator panel
including any wiring to field devices.

6.5 Check the overall physical condition of the enclosure, making note of any
dents, damage to the paint etc.

6.6 Compare the placement and description of each window within the
annunciator panel with the supplied drawings. Ensure to record the revision
of the drawing on the test sheet.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-165 R0 Annunciator Panel.doc Page 2 of 3

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-165

ANNUNCIATOR INSPECTION AND TEST PROCEDURE

6.7 Verify the power supply and the wiring from the power supply going to the
annunciator. If the annunciator is powered with DC voltage ensure that the
polarity is checked throughout the entire circuit. (There have been instances
in the past where the polarity was reversed causing the power supply to the
annunciator to be replaced as it was damaged beyond repair.)

6.8 After the point to point and the power supply checks have been completed.
Obtain permission from the construction foreman for clearance to energize
the annunciator. Once clearance is obtained, inform everyone in the vicinity
that the annunciator will be powered up and the annunciator horn may go off.

6.9 Power up the annunciator. Have someone at the annunciator panel to reset it
as the horn should go off and all the lights on the panel should be illuminated.
If this does not occur, investigate and rectify.

6.10 Using the radio protocol stipulated by the client (i.e. use intrinsically safe
radios where required), use 2 way radios and 2 men to test each window on
the annunciator that has an alarm description on it.

6.11 One man will be at the annunciator panel while the other man will go to the
field device. Once everyone is in place, the field device will be operated and
the alarm should sound as well as the window with the alarm description on
the annunciator should be illuminated.

The alarm should then be reset and then the process is repeated until all field
devices wired to the annunciator are checked.

6.12 Once everything is complete, return everything to as found conditions.

Revision 0 February 24, 2004 QP-165 R0 Annunciator Panel.doc Page 3 of 3

Printed on 09/02/04
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-178

MV & HV CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for testing insulation resistance of power cables.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all cables where DC insulation resistance testing is a

requirement.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test

results and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 NETA Testing Standards

5.0 THEORY

5.1 Direct Current Voltage Testing of Insulation

When DC Voltage is applied to an insulation, the electric field stress

creates current conduction and electrical polarization. The current drawn
by the insulation may be analyzed into several components as described
below:

Capacitance Charging Current

The capacitance charging current is high when the DC High

potential is initially applied. This is a function of time and will
decrease as the duration of applied voltage increases. This
charging current is not of any value for test evaluation. The test
readings should not be taken until this current has decreased to a
sufficiently low value steady state value.

Dielectric Absorption Current

This current is also high when the test voltage is initially applied and
decreases as the voltage application time increases but at a slower
rate and not as a high a current than the capacitance charging
Revision 0 July 26, 2005 QP-178 R0 MV & HV Cable IR Test.doc Page 1 of 5
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-178

MV & HV CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

current. Sufficient time should be allowed before recording test

data so that this current has decreased to a low value.

Surface Leakage

The Surface leakage current is due to the conduction on the

surface of the insulation where the conductor emerges and points
of ground potential. This current is not desired in the test results
and should therefore be eliminated by carefully cleaning the surface
of the conductor to eliminate the leakage paths.

Volumetric Leakage Current

This is the leakage current that flows through the insulation itself
and is of primary importance. This current is used to evaluate the
conditions of the insulation under test. Sufficient time should be
allows for this current to stablize before the test readings are
recorded.

5.2 Reason for cables being grounded for after the test.

Insulation has the property of both temporary and permanent absorption of

electrical charge and conduction. When a voltage is applied to insulation,
forces on the positive and negative charges unique to the particles that
make up the insulation tend to orient the particles in line with the applied
electric field.

Some insulating materials have molecules that have an uneven number of

atoms. When such a molecule is placed in an electrical field, it will
migrate and become polarized with the electric field. Such a molecule is
called a dipole. When these dipoles are subjected to a DC voltage, they
are polarized and become aligned with respect to positive and negative
polarity of the dc voltage. This phenomenon is known as dipole
polarization. This creates the build up of voltage on a cable after the cable
has been discharged but left ungrounded.

After a time when the applied voltage is removed from the insulation, the
polarized molecules will eventually revert to their initial random
arrangement so that the polarization approaches zero. To ensure that the
cable has been discharged, a cable is to remain grounded for a period at
least equal to the test time.

6.0 TEST PREPARATION

Revision 0 July 26, 2005 QP-178 R0 MV & HV Cable IR Test.doc Page 2 of 5
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-178

MV & HV CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

6.1 Prior to starting the test, obtain the DC voltage test limit and duration from
the Client. If the Client does not have a value, ask permission to default to
NETA Levels. Once permission is received, proceed to 6.2.

6.2 Check the calibration date of the test set to ensure it is within calibration.
Ensure that the test set is capable of reaching the DC value specified by
the Client or NETA.

6.3 Cross-reference the cable with the reference drawings. Ensure that the
cable to be tested is the correct cable type. Check that the voltage and
insulation ratings as well as the conductor size are the same as the
drawing. If not, notify your supervisor.

6.4 Visually check the location of both ends of the cables. DO NOT TOUCH
THE CABLES AT THIS TIME. CONSIDER THEM ENERGIZED UNTIL
IT’S PROVEN OTHERWISE. Check for the proximity of live equipment
relative to the ends of the cables. (i.e. if doing a cable in a load break
cubicle, is the bus side of the switch is hot. If so, is the cable side of the
switch safely grounded and isolated.

6.5 Visually inspect entire run of cable, where possible, looking for any
obvious physical damage to cable or workers or items in the area that
would prevent a test to be done.

6.6 Using proper High Voltage safety procedures, check if cable is energized.
Once it has been proven that the cable is de energized, use Hot-gloves to
ground the cable to discharge any static charges in the cable. (This is
especially important on cables that were just taken out of service.) This is
required on both ends of the cable (to eliminate the possibility that the
cable went to wrong location and another cable is at the opposite end.)

6.7 Once it has been proven that both ends are de-energized, ring out the
cable to check origin and destination points.

6.8 Fill in all the nameplate data in the test sheet.

6.9 Using red flagging, flag off both ends of the cable to ensure there is no
possibility of accidental contact with the ends of the cable while they are
being tested. Ensure Client's and Chemco’s procedure for flagging and
tagging are followed when this is done.

6.10 Ensure that the equipment that the cables will be connected to is properly
grounded.

Revision 0 July 26, 2005 QP-178 R0 MV & HV Cable IR Test.doc Page 3 of 5

THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-178

MV & HV CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

7.0 SHIELD RESISTANCE TEST

7.1 Using a test lead, have the field person jumper the shield to the conductor
at that end of the cable.

7.2 At the testing end, put one lead of the ohmmeter on the shield and the
other on the conductor. Record this shield resistance on the test sheet.
Typical readings are 0.8 – 1 ohms.

7.3 Flag if the resistance if above 2 ohms as it could indicate a problem with
the shield. Repeat for each conductor.

8.0 MEGGER TEST

8.1 Prove the integrity of the megger by doing the following:

8.1.1 Move the voltage selector switch on the insulation tester to 1000 V
DC.

8.1.2 Connect one lead of the megger to the positive terminal and the
other lead to the negative terminal. Leave the leads in open air and
do not touch.

8.1.3 Turn on the megger. It should read full scale.

8.1.4 Touch the ends of the leads together, the needle should read a
short.

8.1.5 Remove the leads from each other, the reading should go back to
full scale. Turn the megger off.

8.1.6 If the megger does not do any of the above, inform your supervisor.

8.2 Procedure for Megger Test

Revision 0 July 26, 2005 QP-178 R0 MV & HV Cable IR Test.doc Page 4 of 5
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-178

MV & HV CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TESTING

8.2.1 Have the individual at the field end separate the conductors for
testing.

8.2.2 At the test end, isolate one conductor, jumper the remaining
conductors and all shields together and connect them all to ground.

8.2.3 Test set up should be as per the following example:

8.2.4 Confirm with the field watchman that it is safe to proceed. Connect
the positive lead of the megger to the isolated conductor, and the
other lead of the megger to the grounded conductors.

8.2.5 Megger for 1 minute. Discharge cable through the megger and
then ground for 1 minute. Repeat steps 8.2.2 to 8.2.4 for each
conductor. Record results on the test form.

8.2.6 When complete, repeat 8.1 to ensure there was no failure to the
test set during the test.

Revision 0 July 26, 2005 QP-178 R0 MV & HV Cable IR Test.doc Page 5 of 5

THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-003

INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURES INDEX

PROCEDURE Title Rev Date

QP-300 General Instrumentation Procedure 1 03/26/04

QP-301 Instrument Airline As-Built Drawing Procedure 1 03/08/05
QP-302B Bolt Torque Procedure 0 01/29/08
QP-303 Capillary Instrument Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-305 Conductivity Probe Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-309 Flow Instrument Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-311 Gauge Glass Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-327 Instrument Installation - Mechanical 1 04/26/04
QP-334 Level Instrument Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-341 Pressure Instrument Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-345 Temperature Instrument Installation 0 04/26/04
QP-347 Vendor Equipment Inspection 1 05/31/04
QP-352 Process Lead Pneumatic Test Procedure 4 11/25/05
QP-353 Process Lead Hydro Test Procedure 1 10/30/06
QP-354 Instrument Hydro Test Procedure 2 02/20/07
QP-355 Service Leak Test Procedure 0 11/21/06

Revision 7 June 16, 2009 QP-003 R7 Instrumentation Procedures Index.doc Page 1 of 1

Printed on 6/17/2009
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-300

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a general procedure for field inspection and testing of instrumentation.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to industrial installations and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. The contract documents and project specifications must be consulted to
determine the project specific requirements.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Field QC Specialists / Inspectors are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 Project Specifications

5.0 PROJECT REVIEW

5.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 7.2.2.

5.2 Prior to commencement of work, a review and familiarization of the following

project documentation shall be undertaken:

• Scope of Work
• Approved for Construction drawings (e.g. Plans, P&ID’s)
• Specifications
• Instrument Index
• Instrument Data Sheets
• Standard Details
• Inspection & Test requirements
• Calibration requirements

6.0 INSPECTION & TEST PLANS

6.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Sub-Section 7.1.

QP-300 R1 General Instrumentation

Revision1 March 26, 2004 Page 1 of 5
Procedure.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-300

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURE

6.2 An Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be developed based on project
requirements and shall be sufficiently detailed to indicate:

• The inspection and test activities relevant to the Scope of Work

• The governing procedures
• The acceptance criteria
• Frequency of inspections and tests
• Hold, Witness, Review and Surveillance points etc.
• Special instructions
• Quality records

6.3 The Inspection and Test Plan (ITP) shall be submitted to the Customer and
approved by the Customer prior to commencement of work. The Customer
has the option of identifying his/her comments and placing Hold / Witness
points on the approved copy.

6.4 A final ITP shall be established, incorporating the Customer’s review.

6.5 ITP’s shall be signed off by Chemco and optionally by the Customer as the
inspections and tests are completed. The signed off copy shall be included
in the project turnover documentation.

7.0 RECEIVING

7.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 7.4.3.

7.2 All items shall be inspected for damage or missing components upon
receipt.

7.3 Instruments and materials shall be checked for conformance against

available specifications, purchase orders and against the instrument data
sheet, provided by the Customer. Particular attention shall be paid to
hazardous area classification, CSA or other required approvals,
calibration status and records and correctness of identification tags.

7.4 Pre-calibrated instruments shall be accompanied with a calibration

certificate and calibration sticker placed on the instrument. For non-
calibrated instruments, refer to the Instrument Calibration section of this
procedure.

QP-300 R1 General Instrumentation

Revision1 March 26, 2004 Page 2 of 5
Procedure.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-300

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURE

7.5 Orifice plates will be measured and verified upon receipt and logged on the
appropriate exhibit.
7.6 A Receiving Report shall be completed for each instrument received and for
materials received in bulk.

7.7 Any damage or missing components to instruments or other materials shall

be reported to the Customer in writing for disposition.

7.8 Nonconforming items shall be reported and dispositioned on a

Nonconformance Report in accordance with Quality Manual Sub-Section 8.3.

8.0 TEST EQUIPMENT

8.1 Test equipment shall be calibrated and logged in accordance with the Quality
Manual Sub-Section 7.6.

9.0 INSTRUMENT CALIBRATION

9.1 Determine from the contract documents and scope of work the requirements
for calibration of instruments.

9.2 Some types of instruments may not normally require calibration on receipt.
Examples are:

• Instruments that are pre-calibrated

• Smart transmitters
• Thermometers
• Thermocouples
• Resistance thermometers
• Pressure gauges
• Gauge glasses
• Pressure and temperature pilots
• Pressure, temperature and level switches
• Level controllers

9.3 Arrange for bench calibration for all instruments requiring calibration.

9.4 Calibration includes an inspection of the instrument for condition, proper

tagging, proper area classification, proper regulatory approvals, conformity
with the data sheet and removal of shipping stops.

QP-300 R1 General Instrumentation

Revision1 March 26, 2004 Page 3 of 5
Procedure.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-300

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURE

9.5 Record calibration results on the appropriate calibration record.

9.6 Affix calibration sticker to the calibrated instrument showing the calibration
date, tag number and name or initials of the person performing the
calibration.

9.7 Nonconformances discovered during calibration shall be recorded on a

Nonconformance Report and the instrument shall be quarantined until a
satisfactory disposition is achieved.

9.8 Instruments shall not be issued for installation without proper identification
tags.

10.0 INSPECTIONS

10.1 Field inspections shall be conducted as the work progresses for the duration
of the work. Such inspections shall verify conformance to the applicable
codes, project drawings, standard details and specifications.

10.2 Incomplete installations shall be recorded on a Punch List. Punch list items
must be completed and signed off prior to system testing or loop checking.

10.3 Nonconforming product and installations shall be reported and controlled in

accordance with Quality Manual Subsection 8.3, dealing with
Nonconformances.

10.4 Ensure that inline devices are not installed until line hydro-testing and flushing
has been completed and released in writing for reinstatement.

10.5 If necessary to deviate from the specifications during the installation of the
work, the proposed deviation must be submitted to the Customer for
approval in writing.

10.6 Inspection results shall be recorded on the appropriate exhibit which is

identified in the ITP.

11.0 LOOP CHECKING

11.1 Consult the contract documents for loop checking responsibility. Loop
checking may, or may not, be included in the Contract Scope of Work.

QP-300 R1 General Instrumentation

Revision1 March 26, 2004 Page 4 of 5
Procedure.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-300

GENERAL INSTRUMENTATION PROCEDURE

11.2 If loop checks are to be performed by contract, the applicable procedures

and exhibits shall be identified in the ITP.

11.3 Loop checks are usually performed with the Customer’s representative(s).

12.0 RECORDS

12.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 4.2.6.

12.2 All appropriate field inspection and test forms shall be completed, signed
and dated by the Chemco Instrument QC Inspector. Test forms shall be
witnessed by the Customer as called for in the ITP.

12.3 Completed test forms become quality records and are to be kept in the
project QC file, suitably labeled, maintained and secured for ease of
retrieval.

12.4 Quality records shall be logged and transmitted to the Customer on system
or project turnover or as agreed with the Customer in advance.

13.0 AS-BUILT DRAWING RECORDS

13.1 This procedure is supplemental to Quality Manual Article 4.2.4.

13.2 The work as installed shall be recorded on As-Built drawings, schedules,

instrument index as required by the contract documents.

13.3 Field run instrument piping shall be recorded on As-Built field piping
drawings or isometrics. The “Heat Numbers” of installed piping materials
shall be documented on the As-Built drawings.

13.4 As-Built drawings shall be logged and transmitted to the Customer on

system or project turnover or as agreed with the Customer in advance.

14.0 STORAGE & PRESERVATION

Storage and preservation shall be in accordance with the Quality Manual and
Procedure QP-080

QP-300 R1 General Instrumentation

Revision1 March 26, 2004 Page 5 of 5
Procedure.doc
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-301

INSTRUMENT AIRLINE AS-BUILT DRAWING PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish instrument airlines field As-Built isometric drawing procedure.

2.0 SCOPE

2.1 This procedure applies to stick built instrument air lines.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for maintenance and distribution of

this procedure.

3.2 Field QC Managers, Specialists, Inspectors and Superintendents are

responsible for implementation and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Finished copy shall be drawn on 11” x 17” isometric sketching paper.

4.2 Finished copy to be in pencil. The object lines should be darker than the
extension and dimension lines. All valves and fittings shall be depicted in
their correct or actual orientation.

4.3 Drawings are NTS (Not To Scale).

4.4 Use a ruler / template when drawing lines, symbols, balloons, valves etc.

4.5 North shall be indicated at the top left-hand corner of page.

4.6 All co-ordinates and dimensions are to be in feet and inches on imperial
based projects and shall be in meters and millimeters on metric based
projects.

4.7 Co-ordinates and elevation of block valve on header/sub-header to be

indicated at point of origin.

4.8 Dimensional measurements are to be given in a Center to Center (C-C)

format.

4.9 Actual dimensions are to placed between the extension lines.

4.10 Dimension line arrowheads (pointers) are to touch and stop at the
extension lines.

Revision 1 March 8, 2005 QP-301 R1 Isometric Drawings As Builts Page 1 of 3

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-301

INSTRUMENT AIRLINE AS-BUILT DRAWING PROCEDURE

4.11 Extension lines are not to touch object lines; leave a 1mm gap. (approx.).

4.12 A title block is to be included on the bottom right corner of each finished
drawing.

E.g.

PROJECT:
Plant Design Area Tag No.

Drawn By Date Rev

DWG No.: NTS

4.13 Itemizing and labeling:

4.13.1 Use a balloon with a number inside it representing the item in

question.

4.13.2 From the balloon, draw a straight line with a small arrowhead that
just touches the item.

4.13.3 Use a numerical sequence. All pipe and fittings that are identical
in size and heat numbers will use the same item numbers.
Otherwise a new item number will be assigned.

4.14 Legend:

4.14.1 Locate legend at top right of drawing.

4.14.2 List in numerical order, the item corresponding to the balloons on

the drawing.

4.14.3 State the description of the item followed by its heat number.

4.14.4 Indicate what the instrument tag number is downstream of the

isolation valve.

4.14.4 See sample drawing.

Revision 1 March 8, 2005 QP-301 R1 Isometric Drawings As Builts Page 2 of 3

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-301

INSTRUMENT AIRLINE AS-BUILT DRAWING PROCEDURE

Revision 1 March 8, 2005 QP-301 R1 Isometric Drawings As Builts Page 3 of 3

03/09/05 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-302B

BOLT TORQUE PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE
This document defines general requirements for assembly of flanged joints in
piping systems where controlled tightening of stud bolt using torque
measurement is mandated.

2.0 SCOPE
This procedure applies to mechanical instrumentation bolting as required by the
Contract Scope of Work. The Client’s specifications, if available, should be
consulted to ensure conformance.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for maintenance and issue of this
procedure.
3.2 Field QC Leads, Specialists, Inspectors and Foremen are responsible for
implementation and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 TORQUE PROCEDURE

4.1 The bolts (or the flange) shall be numbered with the cross-bolting pattern
sequence to be used. Refer to numbering specifications.
4.2 The bolts shall be then tightened (torqued) to the First Torque Level
shown on the Flange Torquing Table, using the cross-bolting sequence
marked on the flange or bolts (1/3 of the full torque). This sequence shall
be repeated as necessary at this torque level until all the nuts cease to
move when the torque is applied.
4.3 The bolts shall then be tightened to the Second Torque Level, using the
same cross-bolting sequence (2/3 of the full torque). The sequence shall
be repeated until the nuts cease to move when the torque is applied.
4.4 The bolt shall then be tightened to the Full Torque Level, using the same
crossbolting sequence. The sequence shall be repeated until the nuts
cease to move when torque is applied.
4.5 Full torque shall then be applied to all the bolts in rotational order. This
shall be continued until all the nuts cease to move when the torque is
applied.
4.6 Complete the Bolt Torque Record as applicable.

Revision 0 January 29, 2008 QP-302B R0 Bolt Torque Procedure.doc Page 1 of 1

1/29/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-303

CAPILLARY INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of mechanical capillary type instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-303 Capillary Instrument Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-303, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-303. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-303 R0 Capillary Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-303

CAPILLARY INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.

2.2 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.3 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.
2.4 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-303 R0 Capillary Instrument Installation.doc Page 2 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-303

CAPILLARY INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and

location drawing. Check that in-line equipment is installed, bolted, gasketed
and supported per details, and flow direction is correct.
2.6 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily
and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.8 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.9 Check raceway (tray) installation for support.
2.10 For field use if required.
2.11 For field use if required.
2.12 For field use if required.
2.13 For field use if required.
2.14 For field use if required.
2.15 Verify capillaries are continuously supported.
2.16 Verify excess capillary is coiled at location specified.
2.17 Verify capillary drum is installed at transmitter end.
2.18 Verify capillary winterization is complete as per details.
2.19 Verify piping gaskets are installed.
2.20 Check bolt material and length.
2.21 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified
type)
2.22 Ensure bolts were torqued and marked.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS
Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-303 R0 Capillary Instrument Installation.doc Page 3 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-303

CAPILLARY INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-303 R0 Capillary Instrument Installation.doc Page 4 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-305

CONDUCTIVITY PROBE INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of conductivity probe devices.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-305 Conductivity Probe Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-305, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-305. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-305 R0 Conductivity Probe Installation.doc Page 1 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-305

CONDUCTIVITY PROBE INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.

2.2 Verify proper flow direction.
2.3 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.4 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-305 R0 Conductivity Probe Installation.doc Page 2 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-305

CONDUCTIVITY PROBE INSTALLATION

2.5 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and
location drawing.
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily.
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.9 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.10 Check that probe is installed on pressure side of pump. Refer to installation
details.
2.11 Verify flow “Exit” is in the “Up” direction.
2.12 Ensure flow chamber will always be full of liquid.
2.13 Verify the specified ball valves are installed.
2.14 Check specs and details for permissible application of teflon tape to the
sensor cell threads. Ensure temperature will not melt tape if used. Cell
should only be tightened to prevent leakage.
2.15 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified
type)
2.16 Ensure threaded connections are tight.
2.17 Ensure flow cell and housing is not cracked.
2.18 For field use if necessary.
2.19 For field use if necessary.
2.20 For field use if necessary.
2.21 For field use if necessary.
2.22 For field use if necessary.
2.23 For field use if necessary.
2.24 For field use if necessary.
2.25 For field use if necessary.
2.26 For field use if necessary.
2.27 For field use if necessary.
2.28 For field use if necessary.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS
Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-305 R0 Conductivity Probe Installation.doc Page 3 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-305

CONDUCTIVITY PROBE INSTALLATION

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-305 R0 Conductivity Probe Installation.doc Page 4 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-309

FLOW INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of flow instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-309 Flow Instrument Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-309, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-309. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-309 R0 Flow Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-309

FLOW INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.

2.2 Verify proper flow direction.
2.3 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.4 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-309 R0 Flow Instrument Installation.doc Page 2 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-309

FLOW INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

2.5 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and
location drawing.
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily.
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.9 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.10 Verify flanges line up.
2.11 Verify gasket installation.
2.12 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified
type)
2.13 Ensure bolts are torqued and marked.
2.14 Check device is suitable for the line / vessel / temperature / pressure and
area classification.
2.15 Verify grounding of mag flow meters is as per vendors instructions.
2.16 Ensure coriolis meters will be full of liquid while in operation.
2.17 Ensure rotameters are plumb and float and follower are unobstructed over
it’s range.
2.18 For field use if necessary.
2.19 For field use if necessary.
2.20 For field use if necessary.
2.21 For field use if necessary.
2.22 For field use if necessary.
2.23 For field use if necessary.
2.24 For field use if necessary.
2.25 For field use if necessary.
2.26 For field use if necessary.
2.27 For field use if necessary.
2.28 For field use if necessary.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS
Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-309 R0 Flow Instrument Installation.doc Page 3 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-309

FLOW INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-309 R0 Flow Instrument Installation.doc Page 4 of 4

09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-311

GAUGE GLASS INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of flow instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-311 Gauge Glass Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-311, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-311. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-311 R0 Gauge Glass Installation Page 1 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-311

GAUGE GLASS INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.

2.2 Verify proper gauge length.
2.3 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.
2.4 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-311 R0 Gauge Glass Installation Page 2 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-311

GAUGE GLASS INSTALLATION

2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and

location drawing.
2.6 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily.
2.7 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.8 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.9 Verify screwed fittings are tight.
2.10 Verify installation is plumb.
2.11 Verify float is installed.
2.12 Verify gauge cocks, isolation, vent, drain valves are installed and operable
per details.
2.13 Ensure magnetic gauge glasses have no steel attached so as to interfere
with it’s magnetism.
2.14 For field use if necessary.
2.15 Ensure flanges line up.
2.16 Ensure float moves freely.
2.17 Verify winterization details are complete such as heat tracing and jackets.
2.18 Verify gaskets are installed.
2.19 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified
type)
2.20 Check bolt material and length.
2.21 Ensure bolts are torqued and marked.
2.22 Ensure temporary protection is provided if required.
2.23 For field use if necessary.
2.24 For field use if necessary.
2.25 For field use if necessary.
2.26 For field use if necessary.
2.27 For field use if necessary.
2.28 For field use if necessary.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS
Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-311 R0 Gauge Glass Installation Page 3 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-311

GAUGE GLASS INSTALLATION

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-311 R0 Gauge Glass Installation Page 4 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-327

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of mechanical instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-327 Instrument Installation – Mechanical
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-327, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-327. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 1 April 26, 2004 QP-327 R1 Instrument Installation - Mechanical Page 1 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-327

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.8 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.9 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.10 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.11 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.12 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.13 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet: Compare datasheet to name plate data.

2.2 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.3 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.
2.4 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and
location drawing.

Revision 1 April 26, 2004 QP-327 R1 Instrument Installation - Mechanical Page 2 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-327

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL

2.5 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily

and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.6 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.7 Check tubing and / or tube bundles and associated support and slope.
2.8 Check tube fittings for correct type and installation.
2.9 Check that in-line equipment is installed, bolted, gasketed and supported per
details, and flow direction is correct.
2.10 Spare entries plugged: All entries sealed.
2.11 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.12 Stand Grouted: Verify complete at grade level or mark N/A.
2.13 Instrument Enclosure Installation / Clean: Verify installation is as per detail
and is free of foreign material and debris.
2.14 Check tube reaming
2.15 Inspect tube welds.
2.16 Check tube bundle heat tracing installation against installation detail
drawings and specifications.
2.17 Check tube bundle boot installation.
2.18 Ensure heat trace is exposed, enough for connection, approx. 3 feet.
2.19 Ensure all unused holes are plugged.
2.20 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified
type).
2.21 Ensure tube bundle boot is “heat shrunk”.
2.22 Ensure tracer is not “nicked”, especially prior to installation of the boot.
2.23 For field use if required.
2.24 For field use if required.
2.25 For field use if required.
2.26 For field use if required.
2.27 For field use if required.
2.28 For field use if required.

SECTION 3.0 PRESSURE TESTS

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

3.1 Prior to any testing taking place, confirm test equipment is within the
calibration period. Follow project safety requirements then proceed with test
and record all results in Section 3.0.

Revision 1 April 26, 2004 QP-327 R1 Instrument Installation - Mechanical Page 3 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-327

INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION - MECHANICAL

3.2 Using project specification for test pressure, test medium and test duration,
perform/document pressure tests and verify acceptable leak rates on the
following lines where applicable:

• Impulse Lines
• Pneumatic Lines
• Air Supply Lines
• Air Sub - Header / Branch Lines
• Hydraulic Lines

3.3 Confirm the lines have been blown clear:

3.4 Confirm all impulse lines have been drained and cleaned.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS
Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 1 April 26, 2004 QP-327 R1 Instrument Installation - Mechanical Page 4 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-334

LEVEL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of level instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-334 Level Instrument Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-334, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-334. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-334 R0 Level Instrument Installation Page 1 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-334

LEVEL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check all components against datasheet

2.2 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.3 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-334 R0 Level Instrument Installation Page 2 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-334

LEVEL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

2.4 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and
location drawing.
2.6 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily
and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.7 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location etc.
2.8 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.9 Ensure screwed fittings are tight
2.10 Ensure installation is plumb / level
2.11 For field use if required.
2.12 Ensure isolation / Vent / Drain valves are installed
2.13 Ensure the device is suitable for line / vessel / temp / press / area
classification.
2.14 Verify stilling well is obstruction free
2.15 Verify flanges line up
2.16 Ensure displacer / Float moves freely
2.17 Ensure base spring is long enough. (May be checked during loop check)
2.18 Ensure Winterization details are complete. (Heat trace / jackets)
2.19 Ensure gaskets are installed
2.20 Verify pipe threads are doped with anti-sieze (check specs for specified type)
2.21 Check bolt material & length.
2.22 Ensure bolts were torqued and marked.
2.23 Pipe lubricant matches temp/press/area class
2.24 For field use if required.
2.25 Ensure flagging system is working
2.26 Ensure temporary protection is provided if required.
2.27 Verify capacitance probes are of correct length and do not touch adjacent
materials
2.28 For field use if required.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS

Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-334 R0 Level Instrument Installation Page 3 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-334

LEVEL INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-334 R0 Level Instrument Installation Page 4 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-341

PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of pressure instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-341 Pressure Instrument Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-341, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-341. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-341 R0 Pressure Instrument Installation Page 1 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-341

PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 For field use if necessary.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet

2.2 Check gauge / switch range
2.3 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. (may not be
applicable).
2.4 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-341 R0 Pressure Instrument Installation Page 2 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-341

PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

2.5 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and
location drawing.
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily
and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, flow direction etc.
2.9 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.10 Ensure screwed fittings are tight
2.11 Ensure gauge valves properly installed
2.12 Ensure snubbers installed per details
2.13 Ensure diaphragm seal & flushing port installed per details
2.14 Ensure pressure switches have block & vent connection for calibration
2.15 Ensure piping gaskets installed
2.16 Ensure Anti-Seize is applied (Check Specs)
2.17 Check bolt material & length
2.18 Ensure bolts are torqued and marked.
2.19 For field use if required.
2.20 For field use if required.
2.21 Pipe lubricant matches temp/press/area class
2.22 Liquid filled devices (e.g. pressure gauges) filled & no leaks
2.23 For field use if required.
2.24 For field use if required.
2.25 For field use if required.
2.26 For field use if required.
2.27 Ensure device is suitable for line / vessel / temp / press / area
classification.
2.28 For field use if required.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS

Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-341 R0 Pressure Instrument Installation Page 3 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-341

PRESSURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-341 R0 Pressure Instrument Installation Page 4 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-345

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for inspection of temperature measuring instruments.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to mechanical instruments and is supplementary to the Quality

Manual. This procedure is applicable to instruments installed by mechanical
instrumentation.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and issuing of this
procedure.

3.2 The Project QC Manager / Specialists are responsible for the implementation of the
requirements of this procedure.

3.3 Field QC personnel are responsible to carry out the provisions of this procedure
and to accurately record inspection and test results.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Chemco Quality Manual

4.2 QC-345 Temperature Instrument Installation
4.3 Project drawings and details

5.0 PROCEDURE

5.1 Form QC-345, Section 1.0, may be partially completed prior to inspections taking
place and/or while assembling loop / turnover folders at the project’s early stages.

5.2 Any errors are to be redlined on QC-345. All pre-filled data must be initialed and/or
highlighted at the time of inspection.

5.2 The form is divided into Sections with requirements as follows:

FORM HEADER

Record the Contract Number, Job Number, System Number, CWP Number and the
Client’s Reference Form Number the spaces provided.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-345 R0 Temperature Instrument Installation Page 1 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-345

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

SECTION 1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

Data in this Section is recorded from the Instrument Index and / or Datasheets as
applicable.

1.1 Tag Number: Pre-filled data.

1.2 Datasheet: Pre-filled data. Record datasheet number and current revision
number. Verify to latest revision of datasheet.
1.3 Location: Pre-filled data. Recorded from location given in Index. E.g. Field,
Vessel, Module No. etc.
1.4 Area: Pre-filled data, plant and area number.
1.5 Classification: Check against data sheet and instrument nameplate. Verify
instrument is CSA approved.
1.6 Service Description: Pre-filled data from Index, compare to 1.8 Line Number
and Service.
1.7 Indicate whether mounting is screwed or flanged.
1.8 Line #: Pre-filled data, verify line drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.9 P&ID: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is present
on the drawing.
1.10 Detail #: Pre-filled data, verify detail drawing number and description match
instrument to be installed.
1.11 Loop No: Pre-filled data, verify drawing number and that tag number is
present on the drawing.
1.12 Manuf: Manufacturer recorded from instrument. Verify against datasheet.
1.13 Serial Number: Recorded from instrument.
1.14 Ref Dwg: i.e. instrument location drawing. Pre-filled data. Verify location
drawing number and that tag number is present on the drawing.

SECTION 2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTION

Note: Completed at instrument location. Record deficiencies under comments

section. As deficiencies are verified complete, initial, and / or highlight, and date
the completed items.

2.1 Check against datasheet

2.2 Check gauge range (if temp gauge)
2.3 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker: Verify if present or not. ( may not be
applicable ).
2.4 Check for correct materials as per installation detail.
2.5 Check for damage: Record any damage to instrument installation.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-345 R0 Temperature Instrument Installation Page 2 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-345

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation: Verify Installation is as per detail and

location drawing.
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free: Verify instrument can be accessed easily
and that the winterization enclosure can be fully opened.
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID : Compare against Installation detail and
P&ID. i.e. connection to process location, etc.
2.9 For field use if required
2.10 Instrument Tag Installed: Tag is correct and meets tagging and mounting
spec.
2.11 Ensure screwed fittings are tight.
2.12 Ensure gaskets are installed, where applicable.
2.13 Ensure flanged mounted devices are torqued and marked.
2.14 Ensure device openings are plugged / capped.
2.15 Ensure Anti-Seize is applied (Check Specs)
2.16 For field use if required.
2.17 For field use if required.
2.18 For field use if required.
2.19 For field use if required.
2.20 For field use if required.
2.21 For field use if required.
2.22 For field use if required.
2.23 For field use if required.
2.24 For field use if required.
2.25 For field use if required.
2.26 For field use if required.
2.27 For field use if required.
2.28 For field use if required.

ATTACHMENTS

Check as applicable Datasheet ( ) Calibration Cert ( ) Other ( ) and attach the

documents to this report.

COMMENTS

Record any punch items / deficiencies observed during inspections and tests in
above Sections that cannot be readily repaired on the spot. When recording punch
items, record item number from the above inspection and the description of the
punch item. If more space is needed, attached Punchlist.

e.g. 2.1 Datasheet on file is not current revision

2.3 Enclosure cover hinge is broken

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-345 R0 Temperature Instrument Installation Page 3 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-345

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION

FORM FOOTER

Field personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “TESTED BY” Section.

QC personnel responsible for the tasks sign off the “CHEMCO” Section.

Client’s Representative responsible for verifiying or witnessing the tasks sign off the
“CLIENT” Section, as required by Contract and ITP arrangements.

Revision 0 April 26, 2004 QP-345 R0 Temperature Instrument Installation Page 4 of 4

04/30/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-347

VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a procedure for field inspection, punchout and preservation of vendor

packaged electrical and instrumentation equipment.

2.0 SCOPE

2.1 This procedure applies to pre-manufactured equipment / skid installations

and establishes the inspection and documentation requirements to be
implemented.

2.2 Chemco does not intend to replicate, verify or assume any of the vendor’s
quality activities since the product was manufactured, inspected and tested
to the vendor’s program, quality plan, inspection and test plan, Client
specifications, regulatory and code requirements as approved and accepted
by the Client.

2.3 Vendor equipment will not be disassembled for the purpose of inspection.

2.4 Non-electrical and non-instrument equipment is not included in this scope.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for maintenance and distribution of this
procedure.

3.2 Field QC Specialists and Inspectors are responsible for implementation and
compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Vendor preservation instructions

4.2 Instrument Index
4.3 Instrument Datasheets
4.4 Project Installation and Standard Details

5.0 INSPECTION

5.1 Vendor equipment shall be visually inspected for damage and obvious
missing components upon receipt when Chemco receives the equipment, or
such inspection shall take place following installation when the equipment is
installed by others.

Revision 1 May 31, 2004 QP-347 R1 Vendor Equipment Inspection.doc Page 1 of 4

05/31/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-347

VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

5.2 It is a prerequisite that the Client issues Chemco the reference documents
listed in 4.0 above to facilitate this inspection procedure.
5.3 Electrical Inspection

Visual inspection of electrical includes the following checks:

5.3.1 Equipment tags are installed.

5.3.2 Cable is tagged at equipment JB and at local panel.
5.3.3 Electrical equipment is CSA approved or other accepted
equivalent.
5.3.4 Electrical equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
5.3.5 Electrical conduit / connector seals are marked.
5.3.6 All damaged or missing components are identified on the Punchlist.
5.3.7 Accessible electrical terminations are landed and identified.
5.3.8 Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
been issued to Chemco via Client’s Contracts department. Retain
these documents for turnover.
5.3.9 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
5.3.10 Vendor cables are supported and secured in tray, wire basket or
other raceway.
5.3.11 Unused entries are plugged.
5.3.12 Grounding / Bonding

5.4 Instrument Inspection

Visual inspection of Instrumentation includes the following checks:

5.4.1 Equipment tags are installed.

5.4.2 Instrument equipment is CSA approved or other accepted
equivalent.
5.4.3 Instrument equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
5.4.4 All damaged or missing components are identified on the Punchlist.
5.4.5 Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
been issued to Chemco via Client’s Contracts department. Retain
these documents for turnover.
5.4.6 Calibration units, range and span agree with datasheet.
5.4.7 When required by the project, calibrated instruments shall bear a
calibration sticker, placed on the instrument by the manufacturer or
vendor.
5.4.8 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
5.4.9 Unused entries are plugged.
5.4.10 Process lines and tubing: support, installation, connections and
elevation.
Revision 1 May 31, 2004 QP-347 R1 Vendor Equipment Inspection.doc Page 2 of 4
05/31/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-347

VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

5.4.11 Tube bundle is supported and boot sealed at both ends.

5.4.12 Impulse lines size and connected to process.

6.0 EQUIPMENT DEFICIENCIES

6.1 Deficiencies shall be recorded on a Punchlist by Tag Number.

6.2 Any deficiencies identified shall be reported to the Client in writing

(RFI) for disposition and written direction. Attach a copy of the
Punchlist.

7.0 PRESERVATION

7.1 Preservation of electrical and instrumentation components shall be in

accordance with the Vendor’s instructions and/or site instructions, until
turnover.

7.2 For rotating equipment, confirm and coordinate preservation activities with
the Client’s rotating equipment specialist or designee.

7.3 Preservation records shall be maintained for all preservation activities

performed by Chemco.

8.0 RECORDS

8.1 Quality Records maintained for the inspection, as applicable, shall consist
of:

8.1.1 Punchlist QS-060 (Form 3)

8.1.2 Request for Information (RFI)
8.1.3 Vendor preservation instructions, when supplied
8.1.4 Preservation Record QS-020 / QS-021 as applicable
8.1.5 Vendor Equipment Inspection Record QC-347
8.1.6 Signed off ITP.

8.2 Completed records shall be kept in the project QC file, suitably labeled by
system, maintained and secured for ease of retrieval.

8.3 Quality records shall be logged and transmitted to the Client on system
turnover.

9.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING

Revision 1 May 31, 2004 QP-347 R1 Vendor Equipment Inspection.doc Page 3 of 4

05/31/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-347

VENDOR EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

9.1 Chemco shall provide pre-commissioning support as directed by the

Client.

Revision 1 May 31, 2004 QP-347 R1 Vendor Equipment Inspection.doc Page 4 of 4

05/31/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-352

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD PNEUMATIC TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE

To establish a pneumatic test procedure for instrument process leads.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual and applies to instrument

process / impulse leads, including the instrument manifold.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.

3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and

compliance with this procedure.

3.3 Field-Supervision and testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of
test results and compliance with this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 Project Drawings, Line Lists (Tables)
4.2 Instrument Datasheets

5.0 EXAMINATION PRIOR TO PRESSURE TEST

5.1 The following shall be examined:

5.1.1 Tubing material: size, schedule and specification correct.

5.1.2 Fittings such as tube fittings (e.g. Swagelok) etc., size, schedule and
material specification are correct.
5.1.3 Line supports shall be adequate.
5.1.4 The applicable quality control inspection and QC Record should be
completed prior to pressure tests. E.g. QC-327.

6.0 PRESSURE TEST PREPARATION

6.1 Preparation in advance of conducting pressure tests shall include the following
checks:

6.1.1 A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA), if required.

6.1.2 A designated test supervisor shall be responsible for all test activities
and shall supervise the testing and shall be responsible for
documentation of all test equipment to be used before each test is
carried out.
Revision 4 November 25, 2005 QP-352 R4 Process Lead Pneumatic Test Procedure.doc Page 1 of 4
 QP-352

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD PNEUMATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.1.3 All authorized personnel, together with responsibilities, and designated

test supervisor shall be pre-determined.
6.1.4 Notify the Client prior to conducting pressure tests, in accordance with
the ITP.
6.1.5 The test gas may be nitrogen or compressed air. Consult the project
specifications.
6.1.6 Verify the instrument, the manifold, piping, tubing and all components
are capable of withstanding the test pressure.
6.1.7 For flow and differential pressure instruments, close block valves at the
commodity line and open the manifold equalization valve and block
valves at the instrument.
6.1.8 For pressure instruments, close block valve at the commodity line and
open the block valve at the instrument.
6.1.9 Analyzer sample lines shall be tested up to the instrument. Disconnect
and do not pressurize the analyzer instrument. Pressure reducing
regulators or sample vaporizers should be removed and a jumper line
installed prior the test.
6.1.10 A pressure relief device shall be provided, having a set pressure equal to
but not greater than the test pressure plus the lesser of 50 psi (345 kPa)
or 10% of the test pressure. Ensure relief devices have the correct
spring installed. Pressure relief devices having a range adjustment must
be tested at the jobsite for correct operation prior to testing process
leads.
6.1.11 Test manifolds, temporary piping and hoses feeding gas to the test shall
themselves be tested at 110% of the maximum test pressure to be
applied on the project prior to the start of tests. Record the test on
Pressure Test Record QC-624.
6.1.12 A minimum of 2 calibrated pressure gauges shall be used to monitor the
pressure, selected so that the test pressure falls between 1/3 and 2/3 of
the full-scale reading on the gauge. Pressure gauges shall have an
accuracy of at least 0.50% of full scale reading over the entire range of
the gauge.
6.1.13 Ensure test manifolds, relief valves and test pressure gauges have
identification numbers applied and are logged as test equipment on QS-
094, including calibration dates. Ensure calibration certificates are on
file.
6.1.14 Do not conduct instrument lead pressure tests at temperatures below the
minimum temperature specified by the Client.
6.1.15 Install warning signage indicating testing is in progress in the immediate
test area.

Revision 4 November 25, 2005 QP-352 R4 Process Lead Pneumatic Test Procedure.doc Page 2 of 4
 QP-352

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD PNEUMATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.2 A typical test set-up is shown below:

Revision 4 November 25, 2005 QP-352 R4 Process Lead Pneumatic Test Procedure.doc Page 3 of 4
 QP-352

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD PNEUMATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.3 CAUTION:
6.3.1 No unauthorized personnel will be allowed within 5 feet of the test location.
6.3.2 No personnel are to be allowed within the barriers during pressurization.
7.0 PRESSURE TEST
7.1 Typically, instrument process leads shall be pneumatically tested at 110% of the
design pressure. Consult the Line Table (LT) or Line Designation table (LDT) for
the correct pressures. See the instrument nameplate for the maximum pressure
the instrument can withstand.

7.2 No work, tightening of flanges or glands, etc. shall be done on process leads at
pressures greater than 30 psig (207 kPa).

7.3 For instrument leads, conduct the pressure test as follows:

7.3.1 Pressurize the system to 25 psig (173 kPag) and make a preliminary
check for leaks.
7.3.2 If leaks are detected. “snoop” all threads and other possible leak
sources.
7.3.3 Depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.3.4 Repeat the leak test until the system is gas tight to 25 psig (173 kPag).
7.3.5 Increase pressure gradually in 25% increments of the remaining test
pressure, allowing sufficient time to equalize strains after each increment
and observing for leaks until the final test pressure is reached.
7.3.6 Check for leakage by monitoring the pressure to remain constant after
each pressure increment.
7.3.7 If leaks are detected. “snoop” all threads and other possible leak
sources.
7.3.8 Depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.9 Repeat the leak test until the system is gas tight.
7.3.10 Once the final test pressure is reached, hold the pressure for a minimum
of 10 minutes. After the hold time, reduce the pressure to the design
pressure and examine all joints for leaks (snoop). An acceptable test
occurs when no continuous bubbling is observed.
8.0 PRESSURE TEST COMPLETION
8.1 Complete the following activities:
8.1.1 Depressurize the system carefully.
8.1.2 Restore all removed components and connections.
8.1.3 Complete the applicable Pressure Test Record.

Revision 4 November 25, 2005 QP-352 R4 Process Lead Pneumatic Test Procedure.doc Page 4 of 4
 QP-353

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE
To establish a hydrostatic test procedure for instrument process leads in the field.
2.0 SCOPE
This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual and applies to field installed
instrument process / impulse leads, including the instrument manifold.
3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.
3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and
compliance with this procedure.
3.3 Field-Supervision and testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of
test results and compliance with this procedure.
4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.1 Project Specifications
4.2 Project Drawings, Line Lists (Tables)
4.2 Instrument Datasheets
5.0 EXAMINATION PRIOR TO PRESSURE TEST
5.1 The following shall be examined:
5.1.1 Tubing material: size, schedule and specification correct.
5.1.2 Fittings such as tube fittings (e.g. Swagelok) etc., size, schedule and
material specification are correct.
5.1.3 Ensure that Teflon tape is not used.
5.1.4 Line supports shall be adequate.
5.1.5 The applicable quality control inspection and QC Record should be
completed prior to pressure tests. E.g. QC-327.
6.0 PRESSURE TEST PREPARATION
6.1 Preparation in advance of conducting pressure tests shall include the following
checks:
6.1.1 A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA), if required.
6.1.2 The test fluid typically may be un-chlorinated water, distilled or de-
mineralized water, a glycol / water or CF7 / water mixture. Consult the
project specifications for the required test fluid.
6.1.3 Verify the instrument, the manifold, piping, tubing and all components
are capable of withstanding the test pressure.

Revision 1 October 30, 2006 QP-353 R1 Process Lead Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 1 of 4
 QP-353

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.1.4 For flow and differential pressure instruments, close block valves at the
commodity line and open the manifold equalization valve and block
valves at the instrument.
6.1.5 For pressure instruments, close block valve at the commodity line and
open the block valve at the instrument.
6.1.6 Analyzer sample lines shall be tested up to the instrument. Disconnect
and do not pressurize the analyzer instrument. Pressure reducing
regulators or sample vaporizers should be removed and a jumper line
installed prior the test.
6.1.7 Test manifolds, temporary piping and hoses feeding gas to the test shall
themselves be tested at 100% of the maximum test pressure to be
applied on the project prior to the start of tests. Record the test on
Pressure Test Record QC-624.
6.1.8 A minimum of 2 calibrated pressure gauges shall be used to monitor the
pressure, selected so that the test pressure falls between 1/3 and 2/3 of
the full-scale reading on the gauge. Pressure gauges shall have an
accuracy of at least 0.50% of full scale reading over the entire range of
the gauge.
6.1.9 Ensure test manifolds, relief valves and test pressure gauges have
identification numbers applied and are logged as test equipment on QS-
094, including calibration dates. Ensure calibration certificates are on
file.
6.1.10 Do not conduct instrument lead pressure tests at temperatures below the
minimum temperature specified by the Client.
6.1.11 Install warning signage indicating testing is in progress in the immediate
test area.

Revision 1 October 30, 2006 QP-353 R1 Process Lead Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 2 of 4
 QP-353

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.2 A typical test set-up is shown below:

Revision 1 October 30, 2006 QP-353 R1 Process Lead Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 3 of 4
 QP-353

INSTRUMENT PROCESS LEAD HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.3 CAUTION:
6.3.1 No unauthorized personnel will be allowed within the immediate test area.
6.3.2 Install red tape and warning signage indicating testing is in progress in the
immediate test area.
7.0 PRESSURE TEST
7.1 Typically, instrument process leads shall be hydrostatically tested up to 150% of
the design pressure. Consult the Line Table (LT) or Line Designation table (LDT)
for the correct pressures. See the instrument nameplate for the maximum
pressure the instrument can withstand.
7.2 For instrument leads, conduct the pressure test as follows:
7.2.1 Open a process lead connection to bleed air from the system.
7.2.2 Fill the system with test fluid until the system is full and air is purged out.
7.2.3 Tighten all loosened connections.
7.2.4 Pressurize the system up to 300 psig (2068 kPag) and make a
preliminary check for leaks.
7.2.5 If leaks are detected, depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.6 Repeat the leak test until the system is tight to 300 psig (2068 kPag).
7.2.7 Increase pressure gradually to 100% of the final test pressure.
7.2.8 Once the final test pressure is reached, hold the pressure for a minimum
of 10 minutes and verify the system is leak free.
7.2.9 If leaks are detected, depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.10 Repeat the leak test until the system is tight to 100% of the final test
pressure.
8.0 PRESSURE TEST COMPLETION
8.1 Complete the following activities:
8.1.1 Depressurize the system carefully and completely drain the test fluid back
into the reservoir.
8.1.2 Disconnect the fill & test equipment.
8.1.2 Blow down the system with clean dry air, when specified. (Consult project
specifications.)
8.1.3 Restore all removed components and connections.
8.1.4 Complete the applicable Pressure Test Record.

Revision 1 October 30, 2006 QP-353 R1 Process Lead Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 4 of 4
 QP-354

INSTRUMENT HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE
To establish a hydrostatic test procedure for instruments, manifolds, piped process
connections and tubing for instruments pre-fabricated in the shop.
2.0 SCOPE
This procedure is supplementary to the Quality Manual and applies to instrument piped
process / impulse leads, tubing, including the instrument manifold for instruments pre-
fabricated in the shop.
3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.
3.2 Project QC Managers / Specialists are responsible for implementation and
compliance with this procedure.
3.3 Supervision and testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test
results and compliance with this procedure.
4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.1 Project Specifications
4.2 Project Drawings, Line Lists (Tables)
4.2 Instrument Datasheets
5.0 EXAMINATION PRIOR TO PRESSURE TEST
5.1 The following shall be examined:
5.1.1 Piping / Tubing material: size, schedule and specification correct.
5.1.2 Fittings such as tube fittings (e.g. Swagelok) etc., pipe fittings, size,
schedule and material specification are correct.
5.1.3 Ensure that Teflon tape is not used.
5.1.4 Line supports shall be adequate.
5.1.5 The applicable quality control inspection and QC Record should be
completed prior to pressure tests. E.g. QC-327.
6.0 PRESSURE TEST PREPARATION
6.1 Preparation in advance of conducting pressure tests shall include the following
checks:
6.1.1 A Job Hazard Analysis (JHA), if required.
6.1.2 The test fluid typically may be un-chlorinated water, distilled or de-
mineralized water, a glycol / water or CF7 / water mixture. Water shall
not contain more than 25 ppm chlorides. Consult the project
specifications for the required test fluid.

Revision 2 February 20, 2007 QP-354 R2 Instrument Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 1 of 4
 QP-354

INSTRUMENT HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.1.3 Verify the instrument, the manifold, piping, tubing and all components
are capable of withstanding the test pressure.
6.1.4 For flow and differential pressure instruments, plug commodity line ends
and open the manifold equalization valve and block valves at the
instrument.
6.1.5 For pressure instruments, plug commodity line end and open the block
valve at the instrument.
6.1.6 Disconnect and do not pressurize analyzer instruments.
6.1.7 Test manifolds, temporary piping and hoses feeding test medium to the
test shall themselves be tested at 100% of the maximum test pressure to
be applied on the project prior to the start of tests. Record the test on
Pressure Test Record QC-624.
6.1.8 A minimum of 2 calibrated pressure gauges shall be used to monitor the
pressure, selected so that the test pressure falls between 1/3 and 2/3 of
the full-scale reading on the gauge. Pressure gauges shall have an
accuracy of at least 0.50% of full scale reading over the entire range of
the gauge.
6.1.9 Ensure test manifolds and test pressure gauges have identification
numbers applied and are logged as test equipment on QS-094, including
calibration dates. Ensure calibration certificates are on file.
6.1.10 Do not conduct instrument pressure tests at temperatures below the
minimum temperature specified by the Client.
6.1.11 Install warning signage indicating testing is in progress in the immediate
test area.

Revision 2 February 20, 2007 QP-354 R2 Instrument Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 2 of 4
 QP-354

INSTRUMENT HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

6.2 A typical test set-up is shown below:

Revision 2 February 20, 2007 QP-354 R2 Instrument Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 3 of 4
 QP-354

INSTRUMENT HYDROSTATIC TEST PROCEDURE

7.0 PRESSURE TEST

7.1 Typically, instrument manifolds and leads shall be hydrostatically tested up to
150% of the design pressure. Consult the Line Table (LT) or Line Designation
Table (LDT) for the correct pressures. See the instrument nameplate for the
maximum pressure the instrument can withstand.
7.2 For instruments, leads and tubing, conduct the pressure test as follows:
7.2.1 Open a lead connection to bleed air from the system.
7.2.2 Fill the system with test fluid until the system is full and air is purged out.
7.2.3 Tighten all loosened connections.
7.2.4 Pressurize the system up to 300 psig (2068 kPag) and make a
preliminary check for leaks.
7.2.5 If leaks are detected, depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.6 Repeat the leak test until the system is tight to 300 psig (2068 kPag).
7.2.7 Increase pressure gradually to 100% of the final test pressure.
7.2.8 Once the final test pressure is reached, hold the pressure for a minimum
of 10 minutes and verify the system is leak free.
7.2.9 If leaks are detected, depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.10 Repeat the leak test until the system is tight to 100% of the final test
pressure.
8.0 PRESSURE TEST COMPLETION
8.1 Complete the following activities:
8.1.1 Depressurize the system carefully and completely drain the test fluid back
into the reservoir.
8.1.2 Disconnect the fill & test equipment.
8.1.2 Blow down the system with clean dry air, when specified. (Consult project
specifications.)
8.1.3 Restore all removed components and connections.
8.1.4 Complete the applicable Pressure Test Record.

Revision 2 February 20, 2007 QP-354 R2 Instrument Hydro Test Procedure.doc Page 4 of 4
 QP-355

SERVICE LEAK TEST PROCEDURE

9220 – 39 Avenue • Edmonton, AB T6E 5T9 • Phone (780) 436-9570 • Fax (780) 434-0811
#6 – 210 MacAlpine Crescent • Fort McMurray, AB T9H 4A6 • Phone (780) 790-9722 • Fax (780) 790-1610

Revision 0 November 21, 2006 QP-355 R0 Service Leak Test Procedure.doc

 QP-355

SERVICE LEAK TEST PROCEDURE

1.0 PURPOSE
To establish a standard service leak test procedure.
2.0 SCOPE
2.1 This procedure applies to instrument or utility air piping and tubing systems
where service leak testing is permitted by the Client.
2.2 This procedure applies to leak tests not exceeding design gage pressures not
over 150 psi (1035 kPa) and the design temperature is from -29 °C (-20 °F)
through 186 °C (366 °F).
2.3 The Client’s specifications may further restrict these limits and must be
addressed prior to any test taking place.
2.4 The Client must approve this test procedure prior to any tests being undertaken.
2.5 Where Chemco is required to service test the piping system and tubing to users
by contract, complete Articles 5.0 through 8.1 inclusive.
2.6 Where the piping system is the responsibility of others and where Chemco is
required to service test tubing to users only, conduct the tubing leak test in
conjunction with the piping contractor, examine tubing materials and fittings for
conformance to the design & installation details and complete Articles 6.0, 7.0
and 8.2.
3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible to maintain and issue this procedure.
3.2 Project QC Managers, QC Leads & Specialists are responsible for
implementation and compliance with this procedure.
3.3 Field-testing personnel are responsible for the documentation of test results and
compliance with this procedure.
4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
4.1 Project Test Specifications, Installation Details
5.0 EXAMINATION PRIOR TO LEAK TEST
5.1 The following, when in Chemco’s scope to install, shall be visually examined:
5.1.1 Pipe Material: Size, Schedule and Specification.
5.1.2 Flanges: Ratings, Size, Schedule and material Specification.
5.1.3 Fittings size, schedule and material specification.
5.1.4 Valves: Installed correctly, orientation, clearance for removal,
Identification, etc.
5.1.5 Tubing materials in accordance with the design & installation details.

Revision 0 November 21, 2006 QP-355 R0 Service Leak Test Procedure.doc Page 1 of 3
 QP-355

SERVICE LEAK TEST PROCEDURE

5.1.6 Bolts, studs, nuts: length and material correct. Studs at least flush with
heads. The maximum thread exposure beyond nut should be about 2
threads.
5.1.7 Gaskets: size, type, and material.
5.1.8 All welding is satisfactory, documented and traceable to welder’s
symbol.
5.1.9 All NDE, heat treatments complete, documented and records filed.
5.1.10 Installation and supports in accordance with the design & installation
details.
5.1.11 All deficiencies recorded on Punch List QS-060.
6.0 LEAK TEST PREPARATION
6.1 Preparation in advance of conducting leak tests shall include the following
checks:
6.1.1 Test gauges are calibrated and the calibration date is not expired.
6.1.2 Test gauge calibration certificates are logged and on file.
6.1.3 Deficiencies from Punch List (QS-060) have been corrected & re-
inspected where required.
6.1.4 All items which could be contaminated with dirt or damaged by the leak
test are isolated or removed, such as control valves, instruments,
pressure regulators, etc.
6.1.5 Equipment with internals, such as filters, that could be contaminated with
dirt or damaged are isolated as required.
6.1.6 Vents and drains are correctly installed.
6.1.7 "Open" and "Close" positions of all valves have been verified.
6.1.8 Install a minimum of 2 calibrated pressure gauges on the system under
test. Pressure gauges shall be selected so that the test pressure falls
between 1/3 and 2/3 of the full-scale reading on the gauge. Pressure
gauges shall have an accuracy of at least 0.50% of full scale reading
over the entire range of the gauge.
6.1.9 The test pak drawing (ISO) shall be marked up showing the leak test
system limits when Chemco is the installer.
6.1.10 With equipment disconnected (e.g. air users), blow down the piping and
tubing system to clean it out.
6.1.11 Plug the tubing end at the user.

Revision 0 November 21, 2006 QP-355 R0 Service Leak Test Procedure.doc Page 2 of 3
 QP-355

SERVICE LEAK TEST PROCEDURE

7.0 LEAK TEST

7.1 No work, tightening of flanges or glands, etc. shall be done on piping at
pressures greater than 30 psig (207 kPa).
7.2 With air users disconnected and tubing at the user plugged, conduct the leak test
as follows:
7.2.1 Pressurize the system to 25 psi (172 kPa) and hold the pressure for 10
minutes or alternatively soap test for leaks right away.
7.2.2 If the pressure holds, go to step 7.2.6.
7.2.3 If leaks are detected, soap test until leaks are found and marked for
repair.
7.2.4 Depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.5 Repeat the leak test until the system is gas tight to 25 psi (172 kPa).
7.2.6 Increase pressure gradually in increments until the operating pressure is
reached, holding the pressure at each step long enough to equalize
piping strains.
7.2.7 Once the final operating pressure is reached, hold the pressure for a
minimum of 10 minutes or alternatively soap test for leaks right away.
7.2.8 If the pressure holds, the test is complete.
7.2.9 If leaks are detected, soap test until the leaks are found and marked for
repair.
7.2.10 Depressurize carefully and repair all leaks found.
7.2.11 Repeat the leak test (7.2.6 to 7.2.10) until the system is gas tight.
8.0 LEAK TEST COMPLETION
8.1 For piping and tubing systems installed by Chemco and tested at the same time,
complete the following activities:
8.1.1 Update the piping test pak (ISO) to reflect the limits of the piping system
tested.
8.1.2 Complete test record QC-355 for each piping system tested.
8.1.3 The tubing may be connected to the user at this time or connected
during pre-commissioning (stroking valves).
8.2 For tubing to users tested, in conjunction with piping contractor, complete the
following activities:
8.2.1 Where Chemco is responsible for leak testing the tubing only to users,
complete test record QC-350.
8.2.2 The tubing may be connected to the user at this time or connected
during pre-commissioning (stroking valves).

Revision 0 November 21, 2006 QP-355 R0 Service Leak Test Procedure.doc Page 3 of 3
 QP-004

COMMUNICATIONS PROCEDURES INDEX

Procedure Rev Date

QP-004 Communication Procedures Index 2 01/05/07

QP-402 Fibre Optic Cable Testing 0 05/27/04

QP-404 Copper Communication Cable Testing 0 09/08/06

Revision 2 January 5, 2007 QP-004 R2 Communications Procedures Index.doc Page 1 of 1

Printed on 1/5/2007
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

1.0 PURPOSE

To describe the procedure used for the Pre-placement, Post Placement and Post
Termination testing of Fiber Optic Single Mode and Multi Mode fiber optic cables.

2.0 SCOPE

This procedure applies to all cables where project specifications require Fiber
Optic OTDR (Optical Time Domain Reflectometer) or Power Meter testing of Multi
Mode or Single Mode cables and patchcords.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY

3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and distribution of
this procedure.

3.2 Field testing personnel are responsible for the implementation of and
documentation of test results as per the requirements of this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications

4.2 CSA Standards C22.1 Section 56: Optical Fiber Cables
4.3 TIA/EIA 598A Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
4.4 TIA/EIA-526-14 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Multimode
Fiber Cable Plant
4.5 TIA/EIA-526-7 Optical Power Loss Measurements of Installed Singlemode
Fiber Cable Plant

5.0 PREPARATION

5.1 Prior to starting the test, review Scope of Work in the specific Work Plans for
the optical loss values for Single Mode and Multi Mode fiber, splices and
connectors. The design values should be used to determine if the measured
values are consistent with expected values.

5.2 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to ensure the calibration
date is valid. When utilizing the OTDR, ensure the optic module being
utilized is conducive to cable length being tested. The short range and
medium range modules are capable of measures cables 200 meters – 20
km while the long range module is capable of testing fiber cables of 700
Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 1 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

meters - 40 km. If the cable length is not known, the medium range module
should be utilized to obtain the cable length and the module used to conduct
subsequent testing should be changed as required.

5.3 When conducting pre-placement testing, obtain the test data sheet from the
factory, which should be attached to the cable reel. This data can be used to
compare with the field test data to ensure the on site testing is comparable to
the factory testing. The factory test data sheet is to be submitted to the on
site testing Supervisor.

5.4 Cross-reference the cable with the reference drawings. Ensure cable to be
tested is the correct cable type and in the correct location.

5.5 Ensure all necessary PPE is available and follow the Fiber Optic Safety
Practices documentation for all fiber handling procedures.

5.6 Install necessary flagging to secure the test area. Ensure caution signs are
placed in locations that are clearly visible. The caution signs should indicate
that fiber optic testing is being conducted and the risk of laser radiation is
possible.

5.7 Ensure far end of the cable is capped and signage placed indicating fiber
optic testing is being conducted. If performing fiber optic post termination
testing, ensure far end is secured following the fiber optic lockout procedure.
This will prevent the risk of accidental laser radiation or equipment damage
in the event that test sets are connected at each end of the fiber unknowingly.

5.8 Assemble the OTDR test set, dead zone cable and bare fiber to provide
connectivity from the OTDR to the bare glass strand. In the event of Post
Termination Testing, the patch cord connected to the far side of the dead
zone cable can be connected to the desired optical port on the fiber optic
patch panel.

5.9 For Pre & Post Placement testing, prepare the fiber by removing one end of
the cable sheath to expose the internal fiber optic buffer tubes. Remove
center strength member and kevlar fabric.

5.10 Strip buffer tubes to expose the glass strands. Use Corning Fiber Clean to
remove gel compound from the glass strands.

5.11 Strip coating off of the desired glass strand to expose the bare glass. Clean
the glass strands with alcohol wipe.

Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 2 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

NOTE: ONLY STRIP ONE GLASS STRAND AT A TIME. PRE-

STRIPPING MULTIPLE GLASS STRANDS IS A SAFETY INFRACTION
AND IS NOT PERMISSABLE.

5.12 Use an approved fiber optic cleaver to cleave the fiber for insertion into the
Bare Fiber adapter assembly.

5.13 Dispose of the cut off glass strand into an approved glass waste container.

5.14 Clean the cleaved glass strand with an alcohol wipe.

5.15 Insert the glass strand into the Bare Fiber adapter.

6.0 OTDR & POWER METER TEST PROCEDURE

6.1 Adjust settings on the OTDR to match the type of fiber and fiber length.

6.2 Upon confirming that it is safe to transmit laser radiation into the fiber cable,
start the OTDR test. Test dual wavelengths of 850 & 1300nm for Multi mode
fiber and 1310 & 1550nm for Single mode fiber.

6.3 Upon confirming the test is valid record the test parameters and store the file
accordingly. Perform all additional tests required.

6.4 Cut off and dispose of buffer tubes.

6.5 Cap cable ends.

6.6 For Post Termination Testing, it is imperative to confirm that the far end is
secured with lockout testing notification and that there is no laser source from
network or test equipment. Post Termination testing requires Bi-directional
testing. Once the A-B testing has been completed, the B-A testing must also
be completed.

6.7 For patch cords and fiber lengths of less than 200 meters, the OTDR may not
be able to accurately test the fiber due to inherent dead zone constraints. In
this case, an optical source and power meter should be utilized. Follow set
up procedures including jumper reference test. Test fiber accordingly.
Testing of the fiber through terminated fiber optic connectors can then be
performed. The testing is to be bi-directional and performed at both 850
&1300nm for Multi Mode applications and 1310 & 1550nm for Single Mode

Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 3 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

applications. Manually record test data and confirm a valid test by

comparing values to Customer specifications.

6.8 Upon completion of all tests, the OTDR test results should be converted to
PDF electronic format for submission to the testing Supervisor. Hard copy
results of Power Meter testing should be submitted to the testing Supervisor.
The Supervisor shall submit all test results to QC. The QC department will
establish the format to be submitted to the Customer.

6.9 In the event that fiber cable, splice and loss specifications are not available
from the Customer, use the following table for calculating acceptable fiber
link budgets. Fiber tests should be equal to or less than the link calculated
from the following table.

TABLE 1

Single Mode Calculated Loss = (# conn. x 0.5 dB/conn.) + (# splices x 0.1 dB

/splice) +(length of fiber x 0.4 dB/km)

Multi Mode Calculated Loss = (# conn. x 0.3 dB/conn.) + (# splices x 0.05 dB

/splice) + (length of fiber x 3.2 dB/km)

Single Mode Technical Objective: 0.3 dB/conn., 0.07 dB/splice, 0.4 dB/km

Multi Mode Technical Objective: 0.2 dB/conn., 0.03 dB/splice, 3.2 dB/km

7.0 RECORDING OF TEST DATA

7.1 Record all data on the QC forms provided. Modify related drawings to reflect
“AS BUILT” information. Submit all forms & drawings to the testing
Supervisor for review and submission to QC.

7.2 Electronic media of OTDR test results in PDF format, appropriately labeled,
are to also be submitted to QC on site for Customer Turnover and one
additional copy to Edmonton Chemco Corporate Office, attention: Quality
Manager, for archive purposes.

Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 4 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

8.0 SAMPLE OTDR REPORT

Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 5 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-402

FIBER OPTIC CABLE TESTING

Revision 0, May 27, 2004 QP-402 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Testing.doc Page 6 of 6
09/02/04 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QP-404

COPPER COMMUNICATION CABLE TESTING

1.0 PURPOSE
To describe the procedure used for the Pre-placement, Post Placement and Post
Termination testing of Copper CAT 3 (Voice), CAT5e (Data) Copper and Coaxial
Communication cables.

2.0 SCOPE
This procedure applies to all cables where project specifications require
connectivity, inductance, capacitance, short circuit, cross talk, wire map, cable
length verification, frequency sweep and/or other related copper cable tests
indicated in the Client requirements.

3.0 RESPONSIBILITY
3.1 The Quality Manager is responsible for the maintenance and distribution
of this procedure.
3.2 Field testing personnel are responsible for the implementation of and
documentation of test results as per the requirements of this procedure.

4.0 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS

4.1 Project Specifications
4.2 CSA T527: Grounding and Bonding for Telecommunications in
Commercial Buildings
4.3 CSA T529: Telecommunications Cabling Systems in Commercial
Buildings.
4.4 CSA T530: Building Facilities, Design Guidelines for
Telecommunications First Edition.
4.5 C22.1/2/3: CAN/CSA Canadian Electrical Code
4.6 TIA/EIA 568A: Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
standard
4.7 TIA/EIA 569: Commercial Building Telecommunications Pathways
and Spaces
4.8 TIA/EIA 570: Residential And Light Commercial
Telecommunications Wiring Standard
4.9 TIA/EIA 607: Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
4.10 TIA/EIA TSB75: Additional Horizontal Cabling Practices for Open
Offices

Revision 0, September 8, 2006 QP-404 R0 Copper Communication Cable .doc Page 1 of 4

9/8/2006 9:47:00 AM THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
DB
 QP-404

COPPER COMMUNICATION CABLE TESTING

5.0 CAT3 (VOICE) TESTING

5.1 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to ensure the calibration
date is valid.
5.2 Prior to starting the test, review Scope of Work in the specific Work Plans
for the length, number of terminations and cross connections of the cable
under test. The design values should be used to determine if the
measured values are consistent with expected values.
5.3 For conducting Pre-Placement CAT 3 (Voice) Outside Plant testing,
obtain the test data sheet from the factory which should be attached to the
cable reel. This data can be used to compare with the field test data to
ensure the on site testing is comparable to the factory testing. The factory
test data sheet is to be submitted to the on site supervisor.
5.4 Cross-reference the cable with the reference drawings. Ensure cable to
be tested is the correct cable type and in the correct location.
5.5 Ensure all necessary PPE is available and follow standard Safety for all
copper handling procedures.
5.6 Ensure that all Variances for the removal of Hard Hats and Gloves (if
applicable) are present and visible for review if requested by Safety or
Supervision personnel.
5.7 Install necessary flagging to secure the test area. Ensure caution signs
are placed in locations that are clearly visible.
5.8 For conducting Post Placement CAT 3 (Voice) Outside Plant testing,
prepare the Copper Cable by removing one end of the cable sheath to
expose the internal copper conductors.
5.9 Terminate the 25 pair binder groups of the copper pairs onto 3MS2 25 pair
termination module.
5.10 Using the Industrial Technology TestMaster 108 test set, follow testing
procedures and perform the auto test for testing of Continuity,
Capacitance unbalance, Shorts, Crosses, Grounds and cable length.
5.11 Ensure cable length reading corresponds to the length indicated by the
manufacturer for Pre-Placement Cable Test or to the length indicated in
the job packages for Post-Placement Cable test.
5.12 Record the Test Data in the QC-420 table for submission to on site QC as
indicated in Section 8.
5.13 For conducting Post Termination CAT3 (Voice) testing, utilize the 3M
Dynatel 965 test set. Perform the self calibration test prior to testing.
Connect the host set to the cable pair being tested. Connect the remote
set to the far end. Perform the cable test including the TDR graphical test.

Revision 0, September 8, 2006 QP-404 R0 Copper Communication Cable .doc Page 2 of 4

9/8/2006 9:47:00 AM THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
DB
 QP-404

COPPER COMMUNICATION CABLE TESTING

Perform the test on the pair count indicted by the Client (i.e. – every pair,
every 5th pair, etc). If the Client does not indicate the pair count to be
tested, every pair is to be tested.
5.14 Submit electronic test data files to on site QC as indicated in Section 8.

6.0 CAT5e (Data) TEST PROCEDURE

6.1 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to ensure the calibration
date is valid.
6.2 Prior to starting the test, review Scope of Work in the specific Work Plans
for the length, number of terminations and cross connections of the cable
under test. The design values should be used to determine if the
measured values are consistent with expected values.
6.3 Cross-reference the cable with the reference drawings. Ensure cable to
be tested is the correct cable type and in the correct location.
6.4 Ensure all necessary PPE is available and follow standard Safety for all
copper handling procedures.
6.5 Ensure that all Variances for the removal of Hard Hats and Gloves (if
applicable) are present and visible for review if requested by Safety or
Supervision personnel.
6.6 Install necessary flagging to secure the test area. Ensure caution signs
are placed in locations that are clearly visible.
6.7 Using the Fluke DSP4300 test set, connect to the data outlet, BIX
termination or patch cord to be tested. Select the test parameter from the
menu for the test to be performed. Perform Wire Map test using the
parameters in the test set menu. Upon confirming the test is valid, store
the file accordingly. Perform all additional tests required. Complete the
QC-420 record.
6.8 Submit electronic test data files and QC documentation to on site QC as
indicated in Section 8.
7.0 COAX TEST PROCEDURE
7.1 Check the calibration date of the test equipment to ensure the calibration
date is valid.
7.2 Prior to starting the test, review Scope of Work in the specific Work Plans
for the length, number of terminations and cross connections of the cable
under test. The design values should be used to determine if the
measured values are consistent with expected values.

Revision 0, September 8, 2006 QP-404 R0 Copper Communication Cable .doc Page 3 of 4

9/8/2006 9:47:00 AM THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
DB
 QP-404

COPPER COMMUNICATION CABLE TESTING

7.3 Cross-reference the cable with the reference drawings. Ensure cable to
be tested is the correct cable type and in the correct location.
7.4 Ensure all necessary PPE is available and follow standard Safety for all
copper handling procedures.
7.5 Ensure that all Variances for the removal of Hard Hats and Gloves (if
applicable) are present and visible for review if requested by Safety or
Supervision personnel.
7.6 Install necessary flagging to secure the test area. Ensure caution signs
are placed in locations that are clearly visible.
7.7 Using the Fluke DSP4300 test set, insert the COAX personality module &
connect to the coax connector to be tested. Select the test parameter
from the menu for the test to be performed. Perform COAX sweep test
using the parameters in the test set menu. Upon confirming the test is
valid, store the file accordingly. Perform all additional tests required.
7.8 Complete the QC-420 record.
7.9 Submit electronic test data files to on site QC as indicated in Section 8.

8.0 RECORDING OF TEST DATA

8.1 Record all data on the QC forms provided and identified in the Inspection
& Test Plan (ITP).
8.2 Ensure that cable lengths indicated by the test set correspond to that of
the manufacturer’s data for Pre and Post Placement testing and to the
Client’s packages for the Post-Placement packages.
8.3 Modify (redline) the related drawings to reflect “AS BUILT” information.
8.4 Submit all forms & drawings to Supervisor for review and submission to
Chemco QC.
8.5 Electronic media of CAT5e test results are to also be submitted to
Chemco QC on site for Customer Turnover and will provide one additional
copy to Edmonton Chemco Corporate QC, attention: Quality Manager, for
archive purposes.

**** END ****

Revision 0, September 8, 2006 QP-404 R0 Copper Communication Cable .doc Page 4 of 4

9/8/2006 9:47:00 AM THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
DB
 QC-001

LOW VOLTAGE TEST SHEET INDEX

Document Title Rev Date

QC-100 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria 2 03/08/05

QC-101 Receiving Report 1 12/20/05
QC-102 Bolt Torque Report 2 02/11/08
QC-103 Attachment Sheet 0 02/17/05
QC-105 Module Pre Shipment Checklist 0 03/11/04
QC-106 Electrical Device Checklist 0 08/20/07
QC-108 Electrical Demolition Record 2 03/11/04
QC-108A Cable Demolition 1 03/26/09
QC-108B Equipment Demolition 1 03/26/09
QC-109 End of Job Checklist 0 03/11/04
QC-110 Cable Test Report (Temp Power) 1 05/10/06
QC-111 Temporary Power Pre-Energization Checklist 1 05/08/06
QC-112 Instrument / Control Cable Continuity 1 12/15/05
QC-113 Instrument Cable Megger 2 01/20/09
QC-115 Power Cables Megger 0 07/29/04
QC-120 Cable Duct 0 03/11/04
QC-121 Cable On Reel Test Report 1 12/04/08
QC-122 Cable Tray 2 09/15/08
QC-123 Conduit System Inspection 0 03/11/04
QC-124 Control Cable 0 03/11/04
QC-125 Power Cable Megger 1 12/07/07
QC-126 Power Wires in Conduit 0 03/11/04
QC-127 Instrument Installation – Electrical 3 03/27/09
QC-128 Instrument Cable 0 03/11/04
QC-129 Instrument Cable Reel Test Report 0 03/11/04
QC-130 Instrument Junction Box 1 12/20/05
QC-131 Concrete Trench Inspection 0 03/11/04
QC-132 Electrical Manhole Inspection 0 03/11/04
QC-133 Cable Trench 0 03/11/04
QC-134 Trench Release 0 03/11/04
QC-135 Duct Bank Inspection 1 06/07/04
QC-136 Conduit Inspection and Checklist 0 03/11/04
QC-137 Cable Inspection 1 04/01/05
QC-138 MV & HV Cable Splice Inspection 0 05/12/04
QC-139 Instrument Cable Continuity 2 12/08/08
QC-140 Cable Installation Lighting / Receptacles 0 03/11/04
QC-141 Lighting System 1 09/08/06
QC-141A Emergency Lighting Unit (ELU) Inspection 0 06/07/06
QC-142 Control Panel Checklist 1 02/26/08
QC-142A Remote Ground Fault Panel Test Record 2 06/28/07
QC-143 Distribution Panel Checklist 2 04/01/05
QC-144 Power Junction Box 1 10/31/06

Revision 9 June 16, 2009 QC-001 R9 Low Voltage Test Sheet Index.doc Page 1 of 3
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QC-001

LOW VOLTAGE TEST SHEET INDEX

Document Title Rev Date

QC-145 Receptacles 0 03/11/04

QC-146 Welding Receptacles 1 10/24/07
QC-147 Vendor Equipment Inspection (Or use QC-347) 1 06/07/04
QC-148 Controls Junction Box 0 09/29/04
QC-149 Highmast Lighting Inspection 1 02/28/08
QC-150 Control Station 0 08/31/04
QC-151 Motors and Control Test Record for 600 V (or less) Motors 200 1 06/07/06
HP and below
QC-152 Motor Bump & Run In on 600 V (or less) Motors 200 HP and 4 07/24/06
Below
QC-153 Motor Operated Valve Inspection 2 09/15/08
QC-154A Belt Driven Equipment Alignment Record 0 07/26/07
QC-154B Belt Driven Equipment Alignment Record 0 07/26/07
QC-161 Dry Type Transformer Less than 300 KVA 600 V and below 2 12/18/07
QC-162 Motor Control Center 0 03/11/04
QC-163 Low Voltage Wrapper Inspection and Test Record 3 12/20/05
QC-164 LV Transfer Switch Inspection 0 03/11/04
QC-165 Annunciator Panel 0 03/11/04
QC-166 Variable Frequency Drive (Pre Vendor Checklist) 0 03/11/04
QC-167 Uninterruptible Power System (UPS) 2 12/20/05
QC-168 Batteries & Battery Charger 1 11/03/05
QC-169 Battery Load Test 1 11/03/05
QC-170 Electrical Heat Trace Receiving Report 1 04/04/04
QC-171 Electrical Heat Trace and RTD Inspection 1 04/04/04
QC-172 Electrical Heat Trace Commissioning 1 04/04/04
QC-173 Electrical Heat Trace Megger Exception Report 0 03/11/04
QC-174 Electrical Heat Trace MI Cable Repair 1 03/11/04
QC-175 STS Heat Tube Inspection Record 0 03/11/04
QC-176 STS & FTS Heat Tube 0 03/11/04
QC-177 Heat Tube Test 0 03/11/04
QC-178 Heat Trace RTD 0 03/11/04
QC-179 Electrical Heat Trace Release Form 0 03/11/04
QC-179B EHT Removal - Reinstatement 0 01/11/06
QC-180 RTD Test Record 1 03/08/05
QC-181 Building Electrical Inspection 0 03/11/04
QC-182 Fire Alarm Checklist 0 03/11/04
QC-183 Heater Inspection and Test Report 0 03/11/04
QC-184 Heater Inspection & Test Record 0 08/25/04
QC-185 Solenoid Test Record 0 07/09/04
QC-186 Pile Ground Inspection 1 07/10/06
QC-187 Equipment Grounding 0 09/29/04
QC-187A Fence Grounding 1 01/24/08
QC-187B Dedicated Ground Conductor 0 02/20/08

Revision 9 June 16, 2009 QC-001 R9 Low Voltage Test Sheet Index.doc Page 2 of 3
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 QC-001

LOW VOLTAGE TEST SHEET INDEX

Document Title Rev Date

QC-188 Ground Grid Checklist 0 03/11/04

QC-189 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment Inspection and Test Report 1 01/22/07
QC-190 Elect Equipment Insulation Resistance Test 0 01/31/05
QC-191 Motor Preservation Record 3 09/12/07
QC-192 Anti-Condensate Heater Preservation Record 1 12/20/05
QC-193 Transformer Preservation Record 1 12/20/05
QC-195 Deleted
QC-195A Cathodic Protection Rectifier 0 07/06/06
QC-195B Cathodic Protection Junction Box 0 07/06/06
QC-195C Cathodic Protection Test Station 0 07/06/06
QC-195D Cathodic Protection UG Piping 2 01/03/08
QC-195E Cathodic Protection Anode Groundbed 0 07/06/06
QC-195F Cathodic Protection Storage Tank 0 07/06/06
QC-195G Cathodic Protection Bonding & Release 0 07/06/06
QC-196A Vessel Thermocouple Test Record 0 01/04/07
QC-197 Deleted
QC-199A Cable Pull Card 1 11/13/08

Revision 9 June 16, 2009 QC-001 R9 Low Voltage Test Sheet Index.doc Page 3 of 3
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

This Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria is based on the 2003 NETA "Acceptance Testing
Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems”.

Copyright Information and

Alteration of Content
The 2003 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications are protected under the copyright laws of the United States, and all rights are
reserved. Further, the Specifications may not be copied, modified, sold, or used except in accordance with such laws and as
follows:

Purchasers may reproduce and use all or a portion of the Specifications after paying the charges so long as the 2003 NETA
Acceptance Specifications are clearly and obviously identified in writing as the source of all such uses or reproductions.

In all events, the following sections of the 2003 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications are incorporated by reference in each
subsection of the 2003 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications as though set out in full in each subsection:

3.0 Qualifications of Testing Organization and their Personnel

3.1 Testing Organization
3.2 Testing Personnel
4.0 Division of Responsibility
4.1 The Owner’s Representative
4.2 The Testing Organization
5.0 General
5.1 Safety and Precaution
5.2 Suitability of Test Equipment
5.3 Test Instrument Calibration
5.4 Test Report

The purchaser is advised to include the above sections along with any section(s) of 7.0.

NETA intends that Section 7.0 of the 2003 NETA Acceptance Testing Specifications be reproduced and used on a “cut and paste”
basis for the particular type of equipment to be tested, in all events so long as the clear and obvious identification of the course
described above is provided in writing.

© Copyright 2003
InterNational Electrical Testing Association
PO Box 687, 106 Stone Street
Morrison, CO 80465
Voice: 303.697.8441 Facsimile: 303.697.8431
E-mail: [email protected] • Web: www.netaworld.org

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 1 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLES

100.1 Insulation Resistance Test Values, Electrical Apparatus and Systems ................................. 3
100.2 Switchgear Withstand Test Voltages ..................................................................................... 4
100.3 Recommended Dissipation Factor/Power Factor at 20° C; Liquid-Filled Transformers,
Regulators, and Reactors; Acceptance Test Values.............................................................. 5
100.4 Insulating Fluid Limits
100.4.1 Test Limits for New Insulating Oil ....................................................................... 6
100.4.2 Test Limits for Silicone Insulating Liquid in New Transformers........................... 6
100.4.3 Typical Values for Less-Flammable Hydrocarbon Insulating Liquid ................... 7
100.5 Transformer Insulation Resistance ........................................................................................ 8
100.6 Medium-Voltage Cables
100.6.1 DC Test Voltages ................................................................................................ 9
100.6.2 AC Test Voltages ................................................................................................ 10
100.6.3 Partial Discharge Requirements ......................................................................... 11
100.6.4 Very Low Frequency Testing Levels ................................................................... 11
100.7 Inverse Time Trip Test at 300% of Rated Continuous Current,
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers ............................................................................................... 12
100.8 Instantaneous Trip Tolerances for Field Testing of Circuit Breakers ..................................... 13
100.9 Instrument Transformer Dielectric Tests ................................................................................ 14
100.10 Maximum Allowable Vibration Amplitude ............................................................................... 15
100.11 Reserved ............................................................................................................................ 16
100.12 US Standard Fasteners, Bolt Torque Values for Electrical Connections
100.12.1 Heat-Treated Steel - Cadmium or Zinc Plated .................................................... 17
100.12.2 Silicon Bronze Fasteners .................................................................................... 17
100.12.3 Aluminum Alloy Fasteners .................................................................................. 18
100.12.4 Stainless Steel Fasteners ................................................................................... 18
100.13 SF6 Gas Tests ........................................................................................................................ 19
100.14 Insulation Resistance Conversion Factors
100.14.1 Test Temperatures to 20° C................................................................................ 20
100.14.2 Test Temperatures to 40° C................................................................................ 21
100.15 High-Potential Test Voltage, Automatic Circuit Reclosers ..................................................... 22
100.16 High-Potential Test Voltage for Acceptance Test of Line Sectionalizers ............................... 23
100.17 Dielectric Withstand Test Voltages, Metal-Enclosed Bus ...................................................... 24
100.18 Thermographic Survey, Suggested Actions Based on Temperature Rise ............................. 25
100.19 Overpotential Test Voltages, Electrical Apparatus Other than Inductive Equipment ............. 26
100.20 Rated Control Voltages and their Ranges for Circuit Breakers
100.20.1 Circuit Breakers .................................................................................................. 27
100.20.2 Solenoid-Operated Devices ................................................................................ 28

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 2 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.1

Insulation Resistance Test Values

Electrical Apparatus and Systems
Recommended Minimum
Nominal Rating Insulation Resistance in
of Equipment in Volts Minimum Test Voltage, DC Megohms
250 500 25
600 1,000 100
1,000 1,000 100
2,500 1,000 500
5,000 2,500 1,000
8,000 2,500 2,000
15,000 2,500 5,000
25,000 5,000 20,000
34,500 and above 15,000 100,000

In the absence of consensus standards dealing with insulation-resistance tests, the Standards Review Council suggests
the above representative values.
See Table 100.14 for temperature correction factors.
Test results are dependent on the temperature of the insulating material and the humidity of the surrounding environment
at the time of the test.
Insulation-resistance test data may be used to establish a trending pattern. Deviations from the baseline information
permit evaluation of the insulation.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 3 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.2

Switchgear Withstand Test Voltages

Rated Maximum Voltage Maximum Test Voltage kV
Type of Switchgear (kV) (rms) AC DC
Low-Voltage Power
Circuit Breaker .254/.508/.635 1.6 2.3
Switchgear
4.76 14 20
8.25 27 37
Metal-Clad Switchgear 15.0 27 37
27.0 45 †
38.0 60 †
15.5 37 †
Station-Type Cubicle
38.0 60 †
Switchgear
72.5 120 †
4.76 14 20
8.25 19 27
Metal Enclosed 15.0 27 37
Interrupter Switchgear 15.5 37 52
25.8 45 †
38.0 60 †

Derived from ANSI/IEEE C37.20.1-1993, Paragraph 5.5, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Low-Voltage Power Circuit-
Breaker Switchgear, C37.20.2-1993, Paragraph 5.5, Standard for Metal-Clad and Station-Type Cubicle Switchgear and
C37.20.3-1987 (R1992), Paragraph 5.5, Standard for Metal-Enclosed Interrupter Switchgear, and includes 0.75
multiplier with fraction rounded down.
The column headed “DC” is given as a reference only for those using dc tests to verify the integrity of connected cable
installations without disconnecting the cables from the switchgear. It represents values believed to be appropriate and
approximately equivalent to the corresponding power frequency withstand test values specified for voltage rating of
switchgear. The presence of this column in no way implies any requirement for a dc withstand test on ac equipment or
that a dc withstand test represents an acceptable alternative to the low-frequency withstand tests specified in these
specifications, either for design tests, production tests, conformance tests, or field tests. When making dc tests, the
voltage should be raised to the test value in discrete steps and held for a period of one minute.
† Because of the variable voltage distribution encountered when making dc withstand tests, the manufacturer should be
contacted for recommendations before applying dc withstand tests to the switchgear. Voltage transformers above 34.5
kV should be disconnected when testing with dc. Refer to ANSI/IEEE C57.13-1993 (IEEE Standard Requirements for
Instrument Transformers) paragraph 8.8.2.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 4 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.3

Recommended Dissipation Factor/Power Factor at 20° C

Liquid-Filled Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors
Acceptance Test Values
Oil, Silicone, and Less-Flammable Hydrocarbon Maximum Value (Percent)
New Power Transformers and Reactors 0.5%
New Distribution Transformers and Regulators 1.0%
Remanufactured Power Transformers and Reactors 1.0%
Remanufactured Distribution Transformers and Regulators 1.5%

In the absence of consensus standards dealing with transformer dissipation-factor or power-factor values, the NETA
Standards Review Council suggests the above representative values.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 5 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.4

Insulating Fluid Limits

Table 100.4.1
Test Limits for New Insulating Oil Received in New Equipment
Mineral Oil
ASTM ≤ 69 kV and >69 kV - < 230 >230 kV - < 345 >345 kV and
Test Method Below kV kV Above
Dielectric breakdown,
D877 30 30 30
kV minimum
Dielectric breakdown,
kV minimum @ 1mm D1816 25 30 32 35
(0.04") gap
Dielectric breakdown,
kV minimum @ 2 mm D1816 45 52 55 60
(0.08") gap
Interfacial tension D971 or
38 38 38 38
mN/m minimum D2285
Neutralization number,
D974 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
mg KOH/g maximum
Water content, ppm
D1533 20 10 10 10
maximum
Power factor at 25° C, % D924 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05
Power factor at 100° C, % D924 0.40 0.40 0.30 0.30
Color D1500 1.0 1.0 1.0 0.5
Visual condition D1524 Bright and clear Bright and clear Bright and clear Bright and clear

ANSI/IEEE C57.106-2002, Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Insulating Oil in Equipment, Tables 1, 2, and 3.

Table 100.4.2
Test Limits for Silicone Insulating Liquid in New Transformers
Test ASTM Method Acceptable Values
Dielectric breakdown, kV minimum D877 30
Visual D2129 clear, free of particles
Water content, ppm maximum D1533 50
Dissipation/power factor, 60 hertz, % D924 0.1
max. @ 25° C
Viscosity, cSt @ 25° C D445 47.5 – 52.5
Fire point, ° C, minimum D92 340
Neutralization number, D974 0.01
mg KOH/g max.

ANSI/IEEE C57.111-1989 (R1995), Guide for Acceptance of Silicone Insulating Fluid and Its Maintenance in Transformers,
Table 2.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 6 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.4 (CONT.)

Insulating Fluid Limits

Table 100.4.3
Typical Values for Less-Flammable Hydrocarbon Insulating Liquid
Received in New Equipment
Results
ASTM
Method Test Minimum Maximum
40 34.5 kV class and below
D1816 Dielectric breakdown voltage for 0.08 in gap, kV 50 Above 34.5 kV class -----
60 Desirable
20 34.5 kV class and below
D1816 Dielectric breakdown voltage for 0.04 in gap kV 25 Above 34.5 kV class -----
30 Desirable
D974 Neutralization number, mg KOH/g ----- 0.03
D877 Dielectric breakdown voltage Kv 30 -----
AC loss characteristic (dissipation factor), %
D924 25° C ----- 0.1
100° C ----- 1
D1533B Water content, ppm ----- 25
D1524 Condition-visual Clear
D92 Flash point (° C) 275 -----
a
D92 Fire point (° C) 300 -----
D971 Interfacial tension, mN/m, 25° C 38 -----
2 2
D445 Kinematic viscosity, mm /s, (cSt), 40° C 1.0 X 10 (100) 1.3 X 102 (130)
D1500 Color ----- L2.5

ANSI/IEEE C57.121-1998, IEEE Guide for Acceptance and Maintenance of Less Flammable Hydrocarbon Fluid in
Transformers, Table 3.
The test limits shown in this table apply to less-flammable hydrocarbon fluids as a class. Specific typical values for each
brand of fluid should be obtained from each fluid manufacturer.
a. If the purpose of the HMWH installation is to comply with the NFPA 70 National Electrical Code, this value is the
minimum for compliance with NEC Article 450.23.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 7 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.5

Transformer Insulation Resistance

Acceptance Testing
Recommended Minimum
Transformer Coil Minimum DC Test Insulation Resistance in Megohms
Rating Type in Volts Voltage Liquid Filled Dry
0 - 600 1000 100 500
601 - 5000 2500 1000 5000
Greater than 5000 5000 5000 25000

In the absence of consensus standards, the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above representative
values.
See Table 100.14 for temperature correction factors.
NOTE: Since insulation resistance depends on insulation rating (kV) and winding capacity (kVA), values
obtained should be compared to manufacturer’s published data.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 8 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.6

Medium-Voltage Cables
Acceptance Test Values
Table 100.6.1
DC Test Voltages
Maximum DC Field
Nominal Test Voltages, kV
Insulation Thickness During/After
mils (mm) Installation
Rated Voltage 100% 133% 100% 133%
Phase-to-Phase Conductor Size Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation
kV AWG or kcmil (mm) Level Level Level Level
8-1000 (8.4-507) 90 (2.29) 115 (2.92) 28 36
5
Above 1000 (507) 140 (3.56) 140 (3.56) 28 36
6-1000 (13.3-507) 115 (2.92) 140 (3.56) 36 44
8
Above 1000 (507) 175 (4.45) 175 (4.45) 36 44
2-1000 (33.6-507) 175 (4.45) 220 (5.59) 56 64
15
Above 1000 (507) 220 (5.59) 220 (5.59) 56 64
25 1-2000 (42.4-1013) 260 (6.60) 320 (8.13) 80 96
28 1-2000 (42.4-1013) 280 (7.11) 345 (8.76) 84 100
35 1/0-2000 (53.5-1013) 345 (8.76) 420 (10.7) 100 124
46 4/0-2000 (107.2-1013) 445 (11.3) 580 (14.7) 132 172
69 4/0-2000 (107.2-1013) 650 195

Tables derived from ANSI/ICEA S 93-639/NEMA WC 74-2000, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the
Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy; ANSI/ICEA S-94-649-2000, Standard for Concentric Neutral Cables
Rated 5,000 - 46,000 Volts; ANSI/ICEA S-97-682-2000, Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated 5,000 -
46,000 Volts; and The Okonite Company, High-Voltage Proof Testing.

DC test voltages are applied to discover gross problems such as incorrectly installed accessories or mechanical damage.

The dc field test voltages listed above are intended for cable designed in accordance with
ICEA specifications. When older cables or other types/classes of cables or accessories are
connected to the system, voltages lower than those shown may be necessary. Consult the
manufacturers of the cables and/or accessories before applying the test voltage.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 9 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.6 (CONT.)

Medium-Voltage Cables
Acceptance Test Values
Table 100.6.2
AC Test Voltages
Nominal
Insulation Thickness
Mils (mm) AC Test Voltage, kV

Rated Voltage 100% 133% 100% 133%

Phase-to-Phase Conductor Size Insulation Insulation Insulation Insulation
kV AWG or kcmil Level Level Level Level
8-1000 90 (2.29) 115 (2.92) 18 23
5 kV
1001-3000 140 (3.56) 140 (3.56) 28 28
6-1000 115 (2.92) 140 (3.56) 23 28
8 kV
1001-3000 175 (4.45) 175 (4.45) 35 35
2-1000 175 (4.45) 220 (5.59) 35 44
15 kV
1001-3000 220 (5.59) 220 (5.59) 44 44
25 kV 1-3000 260 (6.60) 320 (8.13) 52 64
28 kV 1-3000 280 (7.11) 345 (8.76) 56 69
35 kV 1/0-3000 345 (8.76) 420 (10.7) 69 84
46 kV 4/0-3000 445 (11.3) 580 (14.7) 89 116

Tables derived from ANSI/ICEA S 93-639/NEMA WC 74-2000, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the
Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy; ANSI/ICEA S-94-649-2000, Standard for Concentric Neutral
Cables Rated 5,000 - 46,000 Volts; ANSI/ICEA S-97-682-2000, Standard for Utility Shielded Power Cables Rated
5,000 - 46,000 Volts.

All ac voltages are rms values.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 10 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.6 (CONT.)

Medium-Voltage Cables
Acceptance Test Values
Table 100.6.3
Partial Discharge Requirements
for Semiconducting Coating and Tape Designs Only
Rated Circuit Voltage
Phase-to-Phase Minimum Partial Discharge Extinction Level, kV
Volts 100% Insulation Level 133% Insulation Level
2001-5000 4 5
5001-8000 6 8
8001-15000 11 15

In the absence of consensus standards the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above
representative values.

ANSI/ICEA S 93-639/NEMA WC 74-2000, 5-46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission
and Distribution of Electric Energy.

Table 100.6.4
Very Low Frequency Testing Levels
0.1 Hz Test Voltage (rms)

System Voltage Proof

Phase-to-Phase Phase-to-Ground
(kV) (rms) (kV) (rms)
5 10
15 22
25 33
35 47

In the absence of consensus standards the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above
representative values.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 11 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.7

Inverse Time Trip Test

at 300% of Rated Continuous Current of Circuit Breaker
Molded-Case Circuit Breakers
Maximum Trip Time in Seconds
Range of Rated Continuous For Each Maximum Frame Ratinga
Current (Amperes) < 250 V 251 – 600V
0-30 50 70
31-50 80 100
51-100 140 160
101-150 200 250
151-225 230 275
226-400 300 350
401-600 ----- 450
601-800 ----- 500
801-1000 ----- 600
1001 – 1200 ----- 700
1201-1600 ----- 775
1601-2000 ----- 800
2001-2500 ----- 850
2501-5000 ----- 900
6000 ----- 1000

Derived from Table 5-3, NEMA Standard AB 4-1996, Guidelines for Inspection and Preventive Maintenance of Molded-
Case Circuit Breakers Used in Commercial and Industrial Applications.
a. Trip times may be substantially longer for integrally-fused circuit breakers if tested with the fuses replaced by solid
links (shorting bars).

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 12 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.8

Instantaneous Trip Tolerances

for Field Testing of Circuit Breakers
Tolerances of Manufacturer’s
Published Trip Range
Breaker Type Tolerance of Settings High Side Low Side
+40%
Adjustable ----- -----
-30%
Nonadjustable ----- +25% -25%

Reproduction of Table 5-4 from NEMA publication AB4-1996.

For circuit breakers with nonadjustable instantaneous trips, tolerances apply to the manufacturer’s published trip range,
i.e., +40 percent on high side, -30 percent on low side.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 13 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.9

Instrument Transformer Dielectric Tests

Field Acceptance
Periodic Dielectric Withstand Test
Nominal System BIL Field Test Voltage (kV)
Voltage (kV) (kV) AC DC*
0.60 10 3.0 4
1.20 30 7.5 10
2.40 45 11.25 15
5.00 60 14.25 19
8.70 75 19.5 26
15.00 95 25.5 34
15.00 110 25.5 34
25.00 125 30.0 40
25.00 150 37.5 50
34.50 200 52.5 70
46.00 250 71.2 +
69.00 350 105 +
115.00 450 138 +
115.00 550 172 +
138.00 650 206 +
161.00 750 243 +
230.00 900 296 +
230.00 1050 345 +
345.00 1300 431 +
500.00 1675 562 +
500.00 1800 600 +
765.00 2050 690 +

Table 100.9 is derived from Paragraph 8.8.2 and Tables 2 of ANSI/IEEE C57.13-1993, Standard Requirements for
Instrument Transformers.
+ Periodic dc potential tests are not recommended for transformers rated higher than 34.5 kV.
* DC potential tests are not recommended for transformers rated higher than 200kV BIL. DC tests may prove beneficial
as a reference for future testing. In such cases the test direct voltage shall not exceed the original factory test RMS
alternating voltages.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 14 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.10

Maximum Allowable Vibration Amplitude

RPM @ Velocity Velocity RPM @ Velocity Velocity
60 Hz in/s peak mm/s 50 Hz in/s peak mm/s
3600 0.15 3.8 3000 0.15 3.8
1800 0.15 3.8 1500 0.15 3.8
1200 0.15 3.8 1000 0.13 3.3
900 0.12 3.0 750 0.10 2.5
720 0.09 2.3 600 0.08 2.0
600 0.08 2.0 500 0.07 1.7

Derived from NEMA publication MG 1–1998, Section 7.8.1, Table 7–1. Table is unfiltered vibration limits for resiliently
mounted machines. For machines with rigid mounting multiply the limiting values by 0.8.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 15 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.11

— RESERVED —

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 16 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.12

US Standard Fastenersa
Bolt-Torque Values for Electrical Connections
Table 100.12.1
Heat-Treated Steel - Cadmium or Zinc Plated
Grade SAE 1&2 SAE 5 SAE 7 SAE 8

Head Marking

Minimum Tensile (Strength)

64K 105K 133K 150K
(lbf/in2)
Bolt Diameter in Inches Torque (Pound-Feet)
1/4 4 6 8 8
5/16 7 11 15 18
3/8 12 20 27 30
7/16 19 32 44 48
1/2 30 48 68 74
9/16 42 70 96 105
5/8 59 96 135 145
3/4 96 160 225 235
7/8 150 240 350 380
1.0 225 370 530 570

Table 100.12.2
Silicon Bronze Fastenersb
Torque (Pound-Feet)
Bolt Diameter in Inches Nonlubricated Lubricated
5/16 15 10
3/8 20 14
1/2 40 25
5/8 55 40
3/4 70 60

a. Consult manufacturer for equipment supplied with metric fasteners.

b. This table is based on bronze alloy bolts having a minimum tensile strength of 70,000 pounds per square inch.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 17 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.12 (CONT.)

US Standard Fastenersa
Bolt-Torque Values for Electrical Connections
Table 100.12.3
Aluminum Alloy Fastenersc
Torque (Pound-Feet)
Bolt Diameter in Inches Lubricated
5/16 8.0
3/8 11.2
1/2 20.0
5/8 32.0
3/4 48.0

Table 100.12.4
Stainless Steel Fastenersd
Torque (Pound-Feet)
Bolt Diameter in Inches Uncoated
5/16 14
3/8 25
1/2 45
5/8 60
3/4 90
a. Consult manufacturer for equipment supplied with metric fasteners.
c. This table is based on aluminum alloy bolts having a minimum tensile strength of 55,000 pounds per square inch.
d. This table is to be used for the following hardware types:
Bolts, cap screws, nuts, flat washers, locknuts (18–8 alloy)
Belleville washers (302 alloy).

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 18 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.13

SF6 Gas Tests

Test Method Serviceability Limits a
Moisture Hygrometer Per manufacturer or ≥ 200 ppmb
SF6 decomposition byproducts ASTM D 2685 ≥ 500 ppm
Air ASTM D 2685 ≥ 5000 ppmc
Dielectric breakdown Hemispherical
0.10 inch gap at atmospheric pressure 11.5 - 13.5 kVd
contacts
a. In the absence of consensus standards dealing with SF6 circuit breaker gas tests, the NETA Standards Review Council
suggests the above representative values.
b. According to some manufacturers.
c. Dominelli, N. and Wylie, L., Analysis of SF6 Gas as a Diagnostic Technique for GIS, Electric Power Research
Institute, Substation Equipment Diagnostics Conference IV, February 1996.
d. Per Even, F.E., and Mani, G. Sulfur Fluorides, Kirk, Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology, 4th ed., 11,428,
1994.
Reference: IEC 61634 High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear - Use and Handling of Sulfur Hexafluoride (SF6) in
High-Voltage Switchgear and Controlgear.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 19 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.14
Insulation Resistance Conversion Factors (20° C)
Table 100.14.1
Test Temperatures to 20° C
Temperature Multiplier
Apparatus Containing Apparatus Containing
°C °F
Immersed Oil Insulation Solid Insulation
-10 14 0.125 0.25
-5 23 0.180 0.32
0 32 0.25 0.40
5 41 0.36 0.50
10 50 0.50 0.63
15 59 0.75 0.81
20 68 1.00 1.00
25 77 1.40 1.25
30 86 1.98 1.58
35 95 2.80 2.00
40 104 3.95 2.50
45 113 5.60 3.15
50 122 7.85 3.98
55 131 11.20 5.00
60 140 15.85 6.30
65 149 22.40 7.90
70 158 31.75 10.00
75 167 44.70 12.60
80 176 63.50 15.80
85 185 89.789 20.00
90 194 127.00 25.20
95 203 180.00 31.60
100 212 254.00 40.00
105 221 359.15 50.40
110 230 509.00 63.20

Derived from Stitch in Time…The Complete Guide to Electrical Insulation Testing, Megger.

Formula: Example: Resistance test on oil-immersion insulation at 104°

Rc = Ra x K Ra = 2 megohms @ 104° F
Where: Rc is resistance corrected to 20° C K = 3.95
Ra is measured resistance at test Rc = Ra x K
temperature Rc = 2.0 x 3.95
K is applicable multiplier Rc = 7.90 megohms @ 20° C

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 20 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.14 (CONT.)

Insulation Resistance Conversion Factors (40° C)

Table 100.14.2
Test Temperature to 40° C
Temperature Multiplier
Apparatus Containing Apparatus Containing
°C °F Immersed Oil Insulation Solid Insulation
-10 14 0.03 0.10
-5 23 0.04 0.13
0 32 0.06 0.16
5 41 0.09 0.20
10 50 0.13 0.25
15 59 0.18 0.31
20 68 0.25 0.40
25 77 0.35 0.50
30 86 0.50 0.63
35 95 0.71 0.79
40 104 1.00 1.00
45 113 1.41 1.26
50 122 2.00 1.59
55 131 2.83 2.00
60 140 4.00 2.52
65 149 5.66 3.17
70 158 8.00 4.00
75 167 11.31 5.04
80 176 16.00 6.35
85 185 22.63 8.00
90 194 32.00 10.08
95 203 45.25 12.70
100 212 64.00 16.00
105 221 90.51 20.16
110 230 128.00 25.40

Derived from Megger’s Stitch in Time…The Complete Guide to Electrical Insulation Testing and ANSI/IEEE 43-2000,
IEEE Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating Machinery.
Notes: The insulation resistance coefficient is based on the halving of the insulation resistance to the change in temperature.
Apparatus Containing Immersed Oil Insulation Table uses 10° C change with temperature halving.
Apparatus Containing Solid Insulation Table uses 15° C change with temperature halving.

Formula: Example: Resistance test on oil-immersion insulation at 68°

Rc = Ra x K F/20° C
Where: Rc is resistance corrected to 40° C Ra = 2 megohms @ 68° F/20° C
Ra is measured resistance at test temperature K = 0.40
K is applicable multiplier Rc = Ra x K
Rc = 2.0 x 0.40 = 0.8 megohms @ 40° C

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 21 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.15

High-Potential Test Voltage

Automatic Circuit Reclosers
Nominal Voltage Rated Impulse Withstand Maximum Field Test
Class, kV Maximum Voltage, kV Voltage, kV Voltage, kV, AC
14.4 15.0 95 35
14.4 15.5 110 50
24.9 27.0 150 60
34.5 38.0 150 70
46.0 48.3 250 105
69.0 72.5 350 160

Derived from ANSI/IEEE C37.61-1973(R1992), Standard Guide for the Application, Operation, and Maintenance of
Automatic Circuit Reclosers and from C37.60-1981(R1992), Standard Requirements for Overhead, Pad-Mounted, Dry-
Vault, and Submersible Automatic Circuit Reclosers and Fault Interrupters for AC Systems.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 22 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.16

High-Potential Test Voltage

for Acceptance Test of Line Sectionalizers
Rated Impulse
Nominal Voltage Maximum Withstand Voltage Maximum Field Test DC 15 Minute
Class kV Voltage kV kV Voltage kV, AC Withstand (kV)
14.4 (1 ø) 15.0 95 35 53
14.4 (1 ø) 15.0 125 42 53
14.4 (3 ø) 15.5 110 50 53
24.9 (1 ø) 27.0 125 60 78
34.5 (3 ø) 38.0 150 70 103

Derived from ANSI/IEEE C37.63-1984(R1990) Table 2 (Standard Requirements for Overhead, Pad-Mounted, Dry-
Vault, and Submersible Automatic Line Sectionalizers of ac Systems).
In the absence of consensus standards, the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above representative values.
NOTE: Values of ac voltage given are dry test one minute factory test values.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 23 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.17

Dielectric Withstand Test Voltages

Metal-Enclosed Bus
Maximum Test Voltage, kV
Type of Bus Rated kV AC DC
24.5 37.0 52.0
Isolated Phase for Generator Leads 29.5 45.0 --
34.5 60.0 --
15.5 37.0 52.0
Isolated Phase for Other than Generator
25.8 45.0 --
Leads
38.0 60.0 --
0.635 1.6 2.3
4.76 14.2 20.0
Nonsegregated Phase 15.0 27.0 37.0
25.8 45.0 63.0
38.0 60.0 --
15.5 37.0 52.0
Segregated Phase 25.8 45.0 63.0
38.0 60.0 --
0.3 1.6 2.3
0.8 2.7 3.9
DC Bus Duct 1.2 3.4 4.8
1.6 4.0 5.7
3.2 6.6 9.3

Derived from ANSI/IEEE C37.23-1987, Tables 3A, 3B, 3C, 3D and paragraph 6.4.2. The table includes a 0.75 multiplier
with fractions rounded down.
NOTE:
The presence of the column headed “DC” does not imply any requirement for a dc withstand test on ac equipment. This
column is given as a reference only for those using dc tests and represents values believed to be appropriate and
approximately equivalent to the corresponding power frequency withstand test values specified for each class of bus.
Direct current withstand tests are recommended for flexible bus to avoid the loss of insulation life that may result from
the dielectric heating that occurs with rated frequency withstand testing.
Because of the variable voltage distribution encountered when making dc withstand tests and variances in leakage
currents associated with various insulation systems, the manufacturer should be consulted for recommendations before
applying dc withstand tests to this equipment.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 24 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.18

Thermographic Survey
Suggested Actions Based on Temperature Rise
Temperature difference (∆T) based
Temperature difference (∆T) based upon comparisons between
on comparisons between similar component and ambient air
components under similar loading. temperatures. Recommended Action
Possible deficiency; warrants
1ºC - 3ºC 1ºC - 10ºC
investigation
Indicates probable deficiency; repair
4ºC - 15ºC 11ºC - 20ºC
as time permits
Monitor until corrective measures
-- -- -- 21ºC - 40ºC
can be accomplished
Major discrepancy; repair
>15ºC >40ºC
immediately

Temperature specifications vary depending on the exact type of equipment. Even in the same class of equipment (i.e.,
cables) there are various temperature ratings. Heating is generally related to the square of the current; therefore, the load
current will have a major impact on ∆T. In the absence of consensus standards for ∆T, the values in this table will provide
reasonable guidelines.
An alternative method of evaluation is the standards-based temperature rating system as discussed in Chapter 8.9.2,
Conducting an IR Thermographic Inspection, Electrical Power Systems Maintenance and Testing, by Paul Gill, PE, 1998.
It is a necessary and valid requirement that the person performing the electrical inspection be thoroughly trained and
experienced concerning the apparatus and systems being evaluated as well as knowledgeable of thermographic
methodology.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 25 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.19

Overpotential Test Voltages

Electrical Apparatus Other than Inductive Equipment
Nominal Maximum Maximum
System (Line) Insulation AC Factory Field Applied Field Applied
Voltagea (kV) Class Test (kV) AC Test (kV) DC Test (kV)
1.2 1.2 10 6.0 8.5
2.4 2.5 15 9.0 12.7
4.8 5.0 19 11.4 16.1
8.3 8.7 26 15.6 22.1
14.4 15.0 34 20.4 28.8
18.0 18.0 40 24.0 33.9
25.0 25.0 50 30.0 42.4
34.5 35.0 70 42.0 59.4
46.0 46.0 95 57.0 80.6
69.0 69.0 140 84.0 118.8

In the absence of consensus standards, the NETA Standards Review Council suggests the above representative values.
a. Intermediate voltage ratings are placed in the next higher insulation class.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 26 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.20

Rated Control Voltages and their Ranges for Circuit Breakers

Operating mechanisms are designed for rated control voltages listed with operational capability throughout the indicated
voltage ranges to accommodate variations in source regulation, coupled with low charge levels, as well as high charge
levels maintained with floating charges. The maximum voltage is measured at the point of user connection to the circuit
breaker [see notes (12) and (13)] with no operating current flowing, and the minimum voltage is measured with maximum
operating current flowing.

100.20.1
Rated Control Voltages and their Ranges for Circuit Breakers
Direct Current Voltage Ranges Alternating Current
(1)(2)(3)(5) Voltage Ranges
Volts, dc (8)(9) (1)(2)(3)(4)(8)
Closing and Auxiliary Rated Control Voltage Closing, Tripping, and
Functions (60 Hz) Auxiliary Functions
(11) Outdoor Opening
Rated Control Indoor Circuit Circuit Functions
Voltage Breakers Breakers All Types Single Phase Single Phase
24 (6) --- --- 14–28 120 104–127 (7)
48 (6) 38–56 36–56 28–56 240 208–254 (7)
125 100–140 90–140 70–140
250 200–280 180–280 140–280 Polyphase Polyphase
--- --- --- --- 208Y/120 180Y/104–220Y/127
--- --- --- --- 240 208–254
Derived from Table 8, ANSI C37.06-2000, AC High-Voltage Circuit Breakers Rated on a Symmetrical Current Basis
— Preferred Ratings and Related Required Capabilities.
Notes:
(1) Electrically operated motors, contactors, solenoids, valves, and the like, need not carry a nameplate voltage rating that
corresponds to the control voltage rating shown in the table as long as these components perform the intended duty
cycle (usually intermittent) in the voltage range specified.
(2) Relays, motors, or other auxiliary equipment that function as a part of the control for a device shall be subject to the
voltage limits imposed by this standard, whether mounted at the device or at a remote location.
(3) Circuit breaker devices, in some applications, may be exposed to control voltages exceeding those specified here due
to abnormal conditions such as abrupt changes in line loading. Such applications require specific study, and the
manufacturer should be consulted. Also, application of switchgear devices containing solid-state control, exposed
continuously to control voltages approaching the upper limits of ranges specified herein, require specific attention and
the manufacturer should be consulted before application is made.
(4) Includes supply for pump or compressor motors. Note that rated voltages for motors and their operating ranges are
covered by ANSI/NEMA MG-1-1978.
(5) It is recommended that the coils of closing, auxiliary, and tripping devices that are connected continually to one dc
potential should be connected to the negative control bus so as to minimize electrolytic deterioration.
(6) 24-volt or 48-volt tripping, closing, and auxiliary functions are recommended only when the device is located near the
battery or where special effort is made to ensure the adequacy of conductors between battery and control terminals.
24-volt closing is not recommended.
(7) Includes heater circuits
(8) Voltage ranges apply to all closing and auxiliary devices when cold. Breakers utilizing standard auxiliary relays for
control functions may not comply at lower extremes of voltage ranges when relay coils are hot, as after repeated or
continuous operation.
(9) Direct current control voltage sources, such as those derived from rectified alternating current, may contain sufficient
inherent ripple to modify the operation of control devices to the extent that they may not function over the entire
specified voltage ranges.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 27 of 28

 Electrical Test Acceptance
QC-100
Criteria

TABLE 100.20 (CONT.)

Rated Control Voltages and their Ranges for Circuit Breakers

(10) This table also applies for circuit breakers in gas insulated substation installations.
(11) In cases where other operational ratings are a function of the specific control voltage applied, tests in C37.09 may
refer to the “Rated Control Voltage.” In these cases, tests shall be performed at the levels in this column.
(12) For an outdoor circuit breaker, the point of user connection to the circuit breaker is the secondary terminal block point
at which the wires from the circuit breaker operating mechanism components are connected to the user’s control
circuit wiring.
(13) For an indoor circuit breaker, the point of user connection to the circuit breaker is either the secondary disconnecting
contact (where the control power is connected from the stationary housing to the removable circuit breaker) or the
terminal block point in the housing nearest to the secondary disconnecting contact.

100.20.2
Rated Control Voltages and their Ranges for Circuit Breakers
Solenoid-Operated Devices
Closing Voltage Ranges
Rated Voltage for Power Supply
125 dc 90 - 115 or 105 - 130
250 dc 180 - 230 or 210 - 260
230 ac 190 - 230 or 210 - 260

Some solenoid operating mechanisms are not capable of satisfactory performance over the range of voltage specified in the
standard; moreover, two ranges of voltage may be required for such mechanisms to achieve an acceptable standard of
performance.
The preferred method of obtaining the double range of closing voltage is by use of tapped coils. Otherwise it will be
necessary to designate one of the two closing voltage ranges listed above as representing the condition existing at the
device location due to battery or lead voltage drop or control power transformer regulation. Also, caution should be
exercised to ensure that the maximum voltage of the range used is not exceeded.

Revision 2 March 8, 2005 QC-100 R2 Electrical Test Acceptance Criteria Page 28 of 28

 Receiving Report QC-101
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
This Form is for Major Equipment. Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Tag Number: Date:
P.O. Number: Supplier: Report No.:
Req No: Carrier: Ref Dwg.:
Equipment Description:

Visual Examination (Before Off-Loading) Visual Examination (After Off-Loading)

Approvals: CSA [ ] Other [ ] (Describe) Photographs: [ ] Yes [ ] No Attached: [ ] Yes [ ] No

Equipment Storage Requirements: Equipment Preservation Requirements:

INSPECTION CHECKLIST
Equipment Damage Equipment Tagged
Paint Damage Impact Recorder
Glass Damage Lifting Lugs
Water Damage Documentation Included (See Below)
Instrument Damage Estimated Weight
Loose Parts
Missing Parts H W L
Packing List [ ] Cal Cert [ ] Test Report [ ] Preservation Instructions [ ]
Attachments: O&M Manuals [ ] Data Sheet [ ] Manuf. Data [ ] Loose / Spare Parts [ ]
Storage Instructions[ ] Other [ ]
Comments:

LIST OVER / SHORTS & DAMAGES

Over Short Damages

NCR Issued: Yes [ ] No [ ] NCR Number: MER Issued: Yes [ ] No [ ] MER Number:

RECEIVED BY CHEMCO WITNESS IF REQUIRED

NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 20, 2005 QC-101 R1 Receiving Report.doc Page 1 of 1
 Bolt Torque Report QC-102
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Equipment Tag #:
Cable Tag #:
Location:

Actual Torque
Termination
Bolt Size Torque
Bolt ID # Location (in or mm)
Marked Wrench Torqued By Date
(in lbs)
(ft lbs)
(For Torque) ID#

COMMENTS:

WITNESSED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 February 11, 2008 QC-102 R2 Bolt Torque Report-Electrical.doc Page 1 of 1
 QC-103
ATTACHMENT SHEET
ATTACHMENT TO:
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 February 17, 2005 QC-103 R0 Attachment Sheet Page 1 of 1

 Module Pre-Shipment Checklist QC-105
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Module Tag Number Module Destination
Module Description Drawing and Rev #

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
All loose or open parts are contained in waterproof bags
Electrical Tracing
Equipment tag numbers checked
Cables installed, checked and tested
Thermostat’s installed
Capillaries protected
Cable ends protected and secure

Electrical (Power and Lighting)

Conduits complete and unused ends capped
Wiring complete and tested
Fixtures installed and secure
Equipment Tag Numbers checked
Cable tray complete
Grounding complete
Motors installed, checked and tested

Instrumentation
Junction boxes mounted and secure
Conduits complete and unused ends plugged
Wiring complete and checked
Instruments complete and checked
Tag numbers checked

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-105 R0 Module Pre-Shipment Checklist Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Device Checklist QC-106
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Equipment Description: Equipment Location:
Reference Drawings:

Installed
Install and Check for Connectors Cable
CSA Device Type Device Tag # as
Terminate Damage Tight Tag
Per Details

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 August 20, 2007 QC-106 R0 Electrical Device Checklist Page 1 of 1

 Electrical Demolition Record QC-108
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

1.0 DATA
Equipment Designation: Location :
Source Designation: CCT Number :
2.0 PERMIT
Permit Required: [ ]Y [ ]N Permit Obtained: [ ] Y [ ] N
3.0 SOURCE END INSPECTION
Results Results
Source De-energized / Locked Cables / Conduits Removed
Confirm loss of voltage Cables / Conduits Capped or Plugged
Wires Marked & Disconnected Breaker / Cell Marked Spare
Panel / Cable Opening Sealed Housekeeping Complete
Panel / MCC Schedule Updated ALL Prints As-Builts completed
Comments :
INSPECTED BY: DATE:
4.0 FIELD END INSPECTION
Equipment Designation:
Location :
Results Results
Source De-energized / Locked Cables / Conduits Capped or Plugged
Confirm loss of voltage Cables / Conduits Removed
Wires Marked & Disconnected Supports Removed
Equipment Removed ALL Prints As-Builts completed
Housekeeping Complete
Comments :
INSPECTED BY: DATE:
5.0 CABLE / CONDUIT DATA
Results Results
Cable / Wires Marked & Disconnected Cables / Wires Tagged 'SPARE'
Cables Coiled Cables Completely Removed
Conduit Removed All Holes Plugged / Capped
ALL Prints As-Builts completed Housekeeping Complete
INSPECTED BY: DATE:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 March 11, 2004 QC-108 R0 Electrical Demolition Page 1 of 1

 Cable Demolition QC-108A
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

No. Rated Type Wires Wires Confirm Cable/Conduit Instr. Wires Tagged Verified By
Cable Tag Cond.
Size From Disconnected To Disconnected De-energized Removed Removed Spare
Volts Initial Date

Comments:

VERIFIED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 March 26, 2009 QC-108A R1 Cables Demolition.doc Page 1 of 1
 Equipment Demolition QC-108B
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Wires Verified By
Equipment Equipment Cable/Conduit Wires As-builts
Equipment Designation Location Circuit # Tagged
Removed Openings, Sealed Removed Disconnected Complete Initial Date
Spare

Comments:

VERIFIED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 March 26, 2009 QC-108B R1 Equipment Demolition.doc Page 1 of 1
 End of Job Checklist QC-109
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

INSPECTION Pass / Fail Remarks

All equipment is approved for the location it is in:

Weather protection [ ]
1.
Hazardous Location [ ]
Corrosion [ ]
2. Equipment is properly supported
3. Grounding & bonding is to CEC and project standards
4. Required gaskets and covers are in place
5. All openings are properly closed / sealed
6. All required seals are in place
7. All required cable connectors are packed
8. All required drains are in place
9. Cable bends are sufficient
10. Conduit bends are sufficient
11. Cables & conduits properly secured / supported
12. Cable / flex connectors are tight
13. Cable spacing is correct
14. Voltage barriers are observed / installed
15. All equipment is labeled
16. General workmanship is acceptable
17. The ITP has been followed
18. As-Builts are complete
19.
20.
COMMENTS:

CRAFT FOREMAN Superintendent

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-109 R0 End of Job Checklist Page 1 of 1
 Cable Test Report QC-110
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Panel Designation Panel Location

Cable Location Cable Tags Installed 60 Sec Insulation Test Tested by

Cable Designation Source Test Test Result
Source Field Field End Initials Date
End Voltage (in gig ohms)

Test Voltage for Insulation Tests (unless specified otherwise by Project Specifications):
Cable Insulation Rating Cable Insulation Rating
Test Voltage (DC) Test Voltage (DC)
(Volts) (Volts)
120 – 300 500 601 – 2400 2500
301 – 600 1000 Greater than 2400 V 5000

COMMENTS:

TESTED /INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 May 10, 2006 QC-110 R1 Cable Test Report.doc Page 1 of 1
 Pre Energization Checklist
QC-111
Temporary Power
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NO TEMPORARY POWER PANELS SHALL BE ENERGIZED WITHOUT THIS FORM BEING FILLED IN COMPLETELY
AND BEING ACCEPTED BY AN AUTHORIZED CHEMCO QC REPRESENTATIVE BY MEANS OF A SIGNATURE AT THE
BOTTOM OF THIS FORM.

Panel Designation Panel Location

FEEDER CABLE
Cable Designation Cable Size
Cable Insulation Rating Cable Length
Cable Manufacturer Test Volts Result
Cable Megger
Cable Type
For Multiple cables use Form QC-
110 & attach
Test Equipment ID:

GROUNDING INSPECTIONS:
Conductor Size Connected to Skid
Connected to Grid Connected to Rods
Connected to other Gas Line Jumpers
Ground Rods Skid / Frame
Gas Line Transformer Xo
Metal Water Lines Glyptol O/S Connection

OTHER INSPECTIONS / INFO:

Source Voltage Connectors Tightened
Source Disconnect Rating Cable Supported
Terminations Tightened
Panel rating

VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS AFTER ENERGIZATION (in volts):

Phase A to Phase B Phase A to Ground
Phase B to Phase C Phase B to Ground
Phase C to Phase A Phase C to Ground

COMMENTS:

TESTED /INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 May 8, 2006 QC-111 R1 Temp Power Pre Energization Checklist.doc Page 1 of 1
 Instrument / Control Cable Continuity QC-112
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
INSPECTION / CONTINUITY TEST Test Equipment Log#:

No. Type Rated Seals From To Cable Wire Continuity Test

Cable Tag Size (Teck, TC From To Poured Term Term Tags Shrinks
Cond. etc.)
Volts (Pass/Fail)

TESTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 15, 2005 QC-112 R1 Instrument Conrtrol Cable Continuity.doc Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Cable Megger QC-113
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
INSPECTION / MEGGER TEST (Results in Meg Ohms) Test Equipment Log#:
Conductor
Shield To Overall
Shield To To Conduit
Conductor Armour or Shield to
No. Seals From To Cable Wire Conductor Shield SP Non-
Cable Tag Pair
Size From To Poured Term Term Tags Shrinks
To
To Shield
Conduit
MP Cables
Armour
shielded
Conductor SP Cables MP Cables
Only Cables
Only Only
Only

Megger Only When Specified. Megger at 500 VDC. MP = Multiple Pairs SP = Single Pair

TESTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 January 20, 2009 QC-113 R2 Instrument Cable Megger1.doc Page 1 of 1
 Power Cables Megger QC-115
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NSULATION RESISTANCE / CONTINUITY TEST Test Equipment Log#:
Megger Tested By
From To Continuity
No. Type Rated Test Test
Cable Tag Size From Check To Check Test
Cond. (Teck, TC etc.) Volts *1 *1 (Pass/Fail) Volts Result Initial Date
*2 *3

*1. Verify at source & destination ends: All conductor and ground connections are completed and tight, Cable Tags are installed, Phasing tape, Cable support, Lighting & Recept circuits are identified.
*2. Insulation Test Optional for Lighting and Receptacles Cables.
*3. Test performed with other phases jumpered to ground. Test duration - 1 minute.
Test Voltage for Insulation Tests (unless specified otherwise by Project Specifications):
Cable Insulation Rating (Volts) Test Voltage (DC) Cable Insulation Rating (Volts) Test Voltage (DC)
120 – 300 500 601 – 2400 2500
301 – 600 1000 Greater than 2400 V 5000

TESTED BY: CHEMCO QC OTHER CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 July 29, 2004 QC-115 R0 Power Cables Megger.doc Page 1 of 1
 Cable Duct QC- 120
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number: Type:
Manufacturer: Rated Voltage:
Series #: Rated BIL:
Rated Current: Reference Dwg and Rev #:
Cable Duct coming from: Cable Duct going to:

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST RESULTS Equipment Log:

Cable Designation Voltage Level Time Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral

60 sec

Note: Test done with other phases to ground

INSPECTIONS Refer to CEC 12 – 2000 to 12 - 2020

Duct supports secure Duct properly fastened to supports
Duct properly supported Note 1 Duct grounded / bonded each section
Duct Covers Installed Flexible Braids installed (if used)
Cable Spacers Installed Flexible Braids correct length and size (if used)
Cable Lug Code Expansion Joints as per specifications:
Crimping Die Code Buss Heaters (if applicable)
Hardware Buss Joint Checks
Clearances Phase Markings (if applicable)
Lamacoids (if applicable) Cleanliness
Bus Joints Torqued Cable Joints taped or booted (if applicable)
Overall Condition Fire Stops in place (if applicable) CEC 12-2008 (2)
If outdoors, rated for outdoor use Bus totally enclosed where passing through walls

COMMENTS
Note 1: Horizontal Buss supported not greater than 1.5 m unless suitable for supports at longer intervals. Vertical Bus supported at
each floor and at intervals not greater than 1.5 m unless marked as suitable for supports at longer intervals

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-120 R0 Cable Duct Page 1 of 1
 Cable On Reel Test Record QC-121
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

60 Sec Insulation Test Tested by

Reel Tag Cable Cable Cable Insulation Test
Test Test Result
Number Type Size Length Rating Equip ID Initials Date
Voltage [ ] MΩ [ ] GΩ

Test Voltage for Insulation Tests (unless specified otherwise by Project Specifications):
Cable Insulation Rating Cable Insulation Rating
Test Voltage (DC) Test Voltage (DC)
(Volts) (Volts)
120 – 300 500 601 – 2400 2500
301 – 600 1000 Greater than 2400 V 5000

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 4, 2008 QC-121 R1 Cable on Reel Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cable Tray QC-122
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Drawing and Rev #:
Joiner Expansion Tray
Supports Tie Downs Cable Tray Cable Tray Tray
Cable Tray Designation Installed
Plates
Tightened
Joints
Grounded Tagged
Cleaned of
Cover
Installed Installed Debris

INSPECTIONS:
Description Results Comments
Tray Size and expansion joints installed according with drawings.

All braces and supports located in accordance with details.

Hold-downs properly installed. Tray supported as per details.

No Sharp edges to cut cable. Hardware assembled with bolt heads flush
with inside of tray rail.
All non-conductive coatings removed at splice joints, ensuring continuity of
electrical ground path, unless fittings are designed to make removal
unnecessary.
Field bends or modifications continue to provide electrical ground path and
proper supports for cables.
Bonding Jumpers installed and tray grounded in accordance with drawings.

Tray free of obstructions.

Spacing between power and instrument trays in accordance with project
specs.
Spacing from hot (insulated) pipes in accordance with project specifications.

All covers, fire stops and partitions installed.

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2,Sepember 15 2008 QC-122 R2 Cable Tray.doc Page 1 of 1

 Conduit System Inspection QC-123
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

DWG & REV #: CLIENT REF:

Conduit Conduit Coming Conduit Conduit

Conduit Wire
Fitting
Device Seals Inspected By:
Conduit Going To Size System
Support Pulled
Covers
Terminated Poured
Designation From (inch) Complete Installed Initial Date

COMMENTS:

CONDUIT TYPE: CHEMCO CLIENT

Rigid Steel Conduit EMT Conduit NAME: NAME:

Rigid PVC Conduit Other: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DB-2 Conduit DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-123 R0 Conduit System.doc Page 1 of 1
 Control Cable QC-124
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Tag Number: Cable coming from (Source

Reference Drawing & Rev: Cable going to (Field):

CABLE DATA
Cable Type
Cable Size
Voltage
Insulation Type
Length

CONTINUITY TEST (OHMS) Equipment Log #:

Description Open Closed Comments
Conductor to Conductor
Conductor to Ground

INSPECTIONS
Source End Field End Source End Field End
Connectors Tight Cable Supported
Terminations Complete Ground Connected
Cable Tag Wire Markers
Inspected By: Date:
PRINT

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-124 R0 Control Cable.doc Page 1 of 1
 Power Cable Megger QC-125
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Tag Number: Drawing and Rev #:

Cable Source End Location: Cable Field End Location:

CABLE NAMEPLATE DATA

Cable Type Voltage Rating
Cable Size Number of Conductors
Insulation Type Length (Optional)

CABLE CONTINUITY TEST Equipment Log:

Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST * (in gig ohms) Equipment Log:

Voltage Time Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
60 sec
* Insulation Test Optional for Lighting and Receptacles Cables Test performed with other phases jumpered to ground

Test Voltage for Insulation Tests (unless specified otherwise by Project Specifications):
Cable Insulation Rating Cable Insulation Rating
Test Voltage (DC) Test Voltage (DC)
(Volts) (Volts)
120 – 300 500 601 – 2400 2500
301 – 600 1000 Greater than 2400 V 5000

INSPECTIONS
Inspection Source End Field End Inspection Source End Field End
Connectors Tight Lug Size
Terminations Lug Compression
Ground Connected Cable Supported
Cable Tags Wire Markers
Lighting and Receptacle Circuits Identified Phasing Tape

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 7, 2007 QC-125 R1 Power Cable Megger Page 1 of 1

 Power Wires In Conduit QC-126
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Cable Tested
Conduit Tag Wire Voltage Cable Source Cable Field Continuity Megger Cable
Pull By
Number Size Rating Location Destination Test Test Term
ID# Init./Date

1. Perform Insulation Resistance Test (megger) between each conductor and all other conductors and metallic
sheath (conduit) for cables with non-shielded conductors. Record lowest reading for each cable. Cable must
be isolated from equipment at each end.
NOTES:
.
2. Use 500 volts dc test set for cables rated 300V and 1000 volts dc test sets for 600 volt cable and 2500 volt
test sets for cables over 600 volts. Hold all tests for 1 minute.

Ambient Temperature °C °F

Were test results checked to NETA Standards? Yes No

Did all test results pass NETA Standards? Yes No

Test Equipment Log #:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-126 R0 Power Wires In Conduit Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Installation - Electrical QC-127
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

This form is to be used for verification of electrical / electronic instruments typically installed by the Electrical trade.

1.0 INSTRUMENT DATA

1.1 Tag No.: 1.5 P&ID:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.6 Detail #:
1.3 Area Class: 1.7 Ref Dwg:
1.4 Service: 1.8

2.0 INSTRUMENT INSPECTIONS

# Item Result # Item Result

2.1 Check against datasheet 2.10 Display mounted horizontal

2.2 Check for damage 2.11 Stand Grouted (If applicable)
2.3 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation 2.12 Instrument Terminated
2.4 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.13 Remote Element Terminated
2.5 Installed as per Details 2.14 Cables Tagged
2.6 Spare entries plugged 2.15 Cables Supported
2.7 Enclosure Clean 2.16 Enclosure Heater Wiring Complete
2.8 CSA Certified 2.17 Seals Packed / Poured
2.9 Instrument Tag Installed

3.0 COMMENTS:

For cable IR or Continuity tests, see appropriate QC Record.

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 3 March 27, 2009 QC-127 R3 Instrument Installation - Electrical.doc Page 1 of 1

 Instrument Cable QC-128
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Tag Number: Reference Drawing & Rev:

Cable coming from (Source): Cable going to (Field):

CABLE DATA
Cable Type
Cable Size
Voltage
Insulation Type
Length
CONTINUITY TEST (OHMS) Equipment Log #:
Description Open Closed Comments
Conductor to Conductor
Conductor to Ground
Conductor to Shield
Shield to Ground
INSPECTIONS
Source End Field End Source End Field End
Connectors Tight Shield Status
Terminations Complete Ground Connected
Cable Tag Wire Markers
Inspected By: Date:
PRINT

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-128 R0 Instrument Cable.doc Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Cable Reel
QC-129
Test Report
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Reel Tag Continuity Ends Inspected By

Cable Description Voltage Manufacturer
Number Test Resealed Initials Date

Continuity Test only **** Record Lowest Reading

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-129 R0 Instrument Cable on Reel Page 1 of 1

 Instrumentation Junction Box QC-130
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Tag Number:
Location: Drawing and Rev #:
INSPECTIONS
Results Results
Box Bonded:
Enclosure Type Per Spec:
(If detail shows separate bond to ground)

Lamacoid Installed: Support Stand Bonded:

Terminal Strip ID Markers: Drains / Breathers installed:

Terminations Complete: Junction Box Clean:

Wire Shrinks Installed: Condition of Junction Box:

Terminations Tight:
Cable Tags Applied:
(Do wire tug test)

Shields connected & isolated Accessibility / Orientation for

according to detail drawing: Maintenance Personnel:

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 20, 2005 QC-130 R1 Instrumentation Junction Box.doc Page 1 of 1

 Concrete Trench Inspection QC-131
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Trench Designation: Trench Location:

Drawing and Rev #

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Trench Installed to Project Specifications
Location and Routing as per prints
Assembly Structure Interlocked and undamaged
Metal Trench Structure Bonded / Grounded
Metal Trench Vents Bonded and Grounded
Raceway Supports secure and properly spaced
Raceway mounted to supports (solid bond)
Raceway grounded
All cables installed (and listed below)
Cables secured
Cable entrances and exits protected.

CABLE DESIGNATIONS:

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-131 R0 Concrete Trench Inspection Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Manhole
QC-132
Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Manhole Tag Number: Manhole Location:
Drawing and Rev #:

INSPECTIONS PRIOR TO CONCRETE POUR:

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Manhole opening sized and located according to
project specifications and applicable codes
Pulling eyes installed
Conduits complete / Correct sizing and Orientation
Conduit ends sealed

INSPECTIONS AFTER CONCRETE POURED

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Conduit entrances clear of concrete and other debris
Conduits swabbed out
Pulling ropes installed
Metallic conduits and components bonded / grounded
Cable racks / hooks / saddles and cable trays secure
Cables positioned / spaced and secure
Splices complete and supported
Spare conduits capped off
All metal parts and ladders bonded / grounded
Ladders and / or Rungs installed

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-132 R0 Electrical Manhole Inspection Page 1 of 1
 Cable Trench Inspection QC-133
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Trench Designation: Trench Location:

Drawing and Rev #

TRENCH INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Check route is according to layout drawing
Check trench route is complete
Trench width, depth and slope is correct
Soft sand is provided in cable trench
Sand bedding has the correct thickness
Trench is free of any pebbles, nails, glass, metal etc
Cable Spacer has correct spacing
CABLE IN TRENCH INSPECTION
Cables are laid according to trench section
Cables are segregated as required
Cable numbers are installed at required intervals (if applicable)
Cables are clear from other underground services
Cables are not damaged during installation
End Caps are installed after cutting
BACKFILLING INSPECTION
Soft sand is provided over the cables
Sand is provided to the correct thickness
Red Dye concrete is provided
Warning Tape is installed
Trench is compacted
Route markers are installed
CABLE DESIGNATIONS FOR THIS TRENCH:

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-133 RO Cable Trench Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Trench Release QC-134
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Trench Designation: Drawing and Rev #

Trench Coming From: Trench Going To:

TRENCH INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments: Initial Date
Screened Sand in Place
All Cables Accounted For
Proper Cable Type / Size
Proper Backfill Utilized
Underground Cable Marker Installed
Power / Instrument cables separated in trench
and at crossovers
Ground Cable Installed
As Builts Marked Up

RELEASED BY:
Company Name
Company Representative Name
Company Representative Signature
Date:

RELEASED TO:
Company Name
Company Representative Name
Company Representative Signature
Date:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-134 RO Trench Release.doc Page 1 of 1
 Duct Bank Inspection QC-135
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Duct Bank Designation: Drawing and Rev #

Duct Bank Coming From: Duct Bank Going To:

DUCT BANK INSPECTIONS / CHECKLISTS

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:

Conduit systems complete and are done according to drawings

Stub-ups complete and are done according to drawings
Conduit seals installed
Grounding complete
Conduit spacing, supports and tie downs are done according to
drawings and specifications
Pull strings left in conduit
Conduit capped
Trench free of debris
Duct bank markers installed
Red dye concrete installed according to drawings and project
specifications
Civil Quality Assurance forms complete

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 June 7, 2004 QC-135 R1 Duct Bank Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Conduit Inspection &
QC-136
Checklist
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Conduit Designation: Drawing and Rev #

Conduit Coming From: Conduit Going To:

CONDUIT INSPECTIONS / CHECKLISTS

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
1. Supports and spacing according to drawings and
specifications
2. Confirm conduit and fitting material as per drawings and
specifications
3. Conduits cleaned, stub-ups protected, open ends plugged
and damage during construction repaired
4. Field bend radius correct according to project specifications
and Canadian Electrical Code.
5. Field bends are free of deformities.
6. Expansion joints are as detailed on drawings.
7. Installation neat and evenly spaced.
8. Spacing between instrument and power conduit in
accordance with job specifications.
9. Conduit permanently and effectively grounded, unless
specifications permit otherwise. Bonding jumpers installed
around expansion joints when required.
10. Proper fittings installed with threads fully engaged, conduit
ends have bushings and covers installed.
11. Seals and drains installed in accordance with drawings
12. Flexible conduit installed with proper bending radius and
with standard fittings.
13. Bonding wire installed across liquid tight flexible conduits
14. Junction boxes leveled and supported according to
drawings with proper hubs, lock nuts and bushing installed.
Junction boxes properly installed
15. Number of pulling points adequate.
16. Conduit seals poured and marked with red paint.

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-136 R0 Conduit Inspection & Checklist Page 1 of 1
 Cable Inspection QC-137
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE DATA
Cable Designation: Drawing and Rev #
Cable Coming From: Cable Going To:
Manufacturer: Length:
Cable Type: Armour: Load Current:
Conductor Size: Voltage Rating Insulation Type Temp. Rating:
CABLE INSPECTIONS / CHECKLISTS
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments
1. Cable size, type, location, installation and routing in
accordance with drawings.
2. Bend radius in accordance with specifications and cable
jacket free of kinks. (Refer to CEC Table 15 for bend radius)
3. Cable terminations, supports and support spacing in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
4. Installation neat and evenly spaced.
5. Cable free of surface damage.
6. Termination kit (Stress Cones) / materials installed in
accordance with vendor’s instructions.
7. Form QC-278 (Hi-Pot) for MV & HV cables completed or
obtain appropriate documentation from testing contractor.
8. Cable terminated in accordance with equipment
manufacturer’s instructions, including torquing of bolted
connections, taping or booting as specified.
9. Cable terminations fabricated from copper not aluminum.
10. Check phasing & and marking on cables and ensure they
are in accordance with project specifications.
11. Metallic sheaths/shields/armor grounded in accordance with
termination detail drawings.
12. Cable Color Code.
13. Equipment disconnected.
14. Fire proofing.
15. Cable tagging.
16. Safety Grounds Removed.
Megger, Continuity, Hi Pot & Shield Ohms are on other QC forms.

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 April 1, 2005 QC-137 R1 Cable Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1

 Medium & High Voltage
QC-138
Cable Splice Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

This inspection is for cables greater than 2000 volts.
Cable Designation: Splice #:
Splice Kit Manufacturer: Kit No.:
Circuit No.: Phases: Ref. Dwg and Rev #
Cable Coming FROM: Cable Going TO:
Cable Rated Voltage: Cable Type:
Trench No.:

CABLE SPLICE CHECKLIST

Coordinates
1. Record Splice Coordinates:

Surveyor Signature Date

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:

2. Check cable phasing & continuity prior to making splice.

Splice Kit cable size, type, location, installation in
3.
accordance with drawings.
Splice kit/ materials installed in accordance with vendor’s
4.
instructions.
Metallic Sheath / Shields / Armour grounded in
5.
accordance with splice detail drawing.
6. Document Megger Test on form QC-125
Document DC High Potential (Hi-Pot) on form QC-278, or
7.
obtain appropriate documentation from testing contractor.
Splice markers installed and splice location identified on
8.
drawings.

9. Field changes recorded on “As-Built” drawings.

10. Acceptable: FA [ ] FB [ ] FC [ ] Neutral [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 May 17, 2004 QC-138 R0 MV & HV Cable Splice Page 1 of 1
Inspection.doc
 Instrument Cable Continuity Test QC-139
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Shields Connectors Tested By
Point to Cable
Cond Cond Installed As Are Tight &
Size and # of Cond Shield Point Tags
Cable Tag Cond.
Volts To From To Gnd.
To To
to Gnd.
Per Details
Termination
Proper Type
Applied
Cond. Shield At Both For Area or Initial Date
Verified Both Ends
Ends Instrument

Test Equipment Log #:

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 December 8, 2008 QC-139 R2 Instrument Cable Continuity.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cable Installation
QC-140
Lighting or Receptacle
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Tag Number: Cable coming from

Drawing and Rev # Cable going to

CABLE DATA::
Cable Type Number of Conductors
Cable Size Voltage Rating
Insulation Type Length

CABLE CONTINUITY TEST: Equipment Log:

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Neutral Ground

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST: (If required by project specifications) Equipment Log

Voltage Line 1 to other Line 2 to other Line 3 to other Neutral to other
Time
Level phases & Ground phases & Ground phases & Ground phases & Ground

INSPECTIONS:
Description Source End Field End Description Source End Field End
Connections tight Cable tags installed
Terminations Circuit identified
Ground connected Cable supported

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO: CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0, March 11, 2004 QC-140 R0 Cable Installation Lighting or Receptacle Page 1 of 1
 Lighting System QC-141
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Lighting Panel Tag #: Lighting Panel Location:

Fixture Lamp Globe Guard Reflector Circuit

Fixture Designation Type/Size Size Installed Installed Installed
Fixture Location
Number

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 September 8, 2006 QC-141 R1 Lighting System.doc Page 1 of 1

 Emergency Lighting Pak Inspection QC-141A
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Building Designation: Building Location:

AC Source: AC Circuit No.:
ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS:
INSPECTION RESULT COMMENTS
Material as per drawings and specifications:
Installation as per Specs and Details
Light Heads orientated as per Drawings
Equipment properly identified
Circuits numbers clearly identified on Receptacle
E/L properly identified on Panelboard Directory

FUNCTION TESTING (as required by scope)

Connect the Battery Terminals
Energize the A.C. supply to the Battery Pack
Confirm function of Battery Charge indicator light
Press the ‘Test’ button and insure all lamps
Number of Lamps _______
illuminate
(after battery charging cycle is complete)
De-energize the ELP A.C. circuit and time the
discharge cycle (insure all required lamps are Record Battery Life in Minutes
illuminated)
Does the Battery Discharge Time meet Specs

COMMENTS:

TESTED /INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 June 7, 2006 QC-141A R0 ELP Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Control Panel Checklist QC-142
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Serial Number: Type:
Voltage: Phase:
Amperage:
Drawing and Rev # Nameplate Agrees with Single Line:

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Panels installed to specifications and CEC
Wiring System Complete
All components within panel checked to drawings
Panel and component lamacoids installed or in place
Grounding complete
Wire shrinks applied
Panel fillers installed
Panel Overall Condition
All cable tags installed
Panduit covers installed (where required)
Covers / Doors in place
Terminations complete and tight
No stray strands of wire found at any termination point
All loops verified and complete
Main disconnect checked

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 February 26, 2008 QC-142 R1 Control Panel Checklist.doc Page 1 of 1

 Remote Ground Fault Panel
QC-142A
Inspection & Test Record
CONTRACT # CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB # CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Serial Number: Type:
Voltage: Phase:
Amperage:
Drawing and Rev # Nameplate Agrees with Single Line:

INSPECTIONS:

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:

Panels installed to specifications and CEC
Wiring System Complete
All components within panel checked to drawings
Cable tags applied
Panel and component lamacoids installed or in place
Grounding complete
Wire shrinks applied
Panel fillers installed
Panel Overall Condition
All cable tags installed
Panduit covers installed (where required)
Covers / Doors in place
Terminations complete and tight
No stray strands of wire found at any termination point
All loops verified and complete
Main disconnect checked

COMMENTS:

Revision 2 June 28 2007 QC-142A R2 Rem GF Panel Test Record Page 1 of 2

 Designation:

DSA Testing Ammeter Testing

DSA Primary
Feeder Expected Actual Ammeter Notes
CT Type Alarm CT Ratio Injected
Pick Up Pick Up Display
Location Current

Test Equipment ID:

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 June 28 2007 QC-142A R2 Rem GF Panel Test Record Page 2 of 2

 Distribution Panel Checklist QC-143
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Serial Number: Type:
Enclosure Rating: Accessories:
Drawing and Rev # Nameplate Agrees with Single Line: [ ]Y [ ]N
Rating: Volts: Amps: Phases: Wires: CSA: [ ]Y [ ]N
INSPECTIONS:
Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:
Panel installed to specifications and CEC
Conduit System Complete
Wiring System Complete
Breaker / Fuse sizes checked to drawings
Panel directory completed / installed
Ground Bus & Grounding complete
Branch circuits complete, terminated, verified & labeled
Panel fillers installed
Panel Overall Condition
All cable tags installed and are correct
Panel tags installed and are correct
Covers / Doors in place
Any isolated grounds as per Project Specifications
Spare knockouts filled
Panel cleaned
Phase & Neutral Bus & Wire(s) correct size
Wire color codes as per project specifications
Sealed Enclosure?: Seals Packed / Poured [ ]Y [ ]N
TORQUE Line Lugs torqued to: [ ] Ft-Lbs [ ] In-Lbs Test Equipment Log:
INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST Test Equipment Log:
(Megger Phase to All Other Phases & Ground) Megger Across Main CB
Test A Line - B Line - C Line -
Device Type Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
Voltage Load Load Load
Bus (Main CB Closed if Equipped) --- --- ---
Main CB (CB Open) --- --- --- ---
Main CB (CB Closed) --- --- --- ---
Duration of test is 60 sec unless otherwise specified by Project Specifications Megger readings in Gig Ohms
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 April 1, 2005 QC-143 R2 Distribution Panel Checklist.doc Page 1 of 1

 Power Junction Box QC-144
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Tag Number: Equipment Location:

Equipment Description: Drawing and Rev :

INSPECTIONS

Inspection Results Comments

Installed according to specifications

Shrinks installed
Junction Box grounded

All deficiencies noted

Terminations complete
Support Stand bonded
Loops complete
Lamacoid Installed
All relevant changes recorded
Junction Box cleaned
Cable Tags applied

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 October 31, 2006 QC-144 R1 Power Junction Box.doc Page 1 of 1
 Receptacles QC-145
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Power Panel Designation Power Panel Location:

Drawing and Rev #

GFI GFI Recept Recept Circuit Circuit

Receptacle Designation Receptacle Location
Recept. Breaker Cover Polarity Identified Number

Comments:

INSPECTED/TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-145 R0 Receptacles.doc Page 1 of 1
 Welding Receptacle QC-146
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Tag Number: Area Classification:

Single Line Dwg & Rev Location Dwg. & Rev
Nameplate Agrees with
Single Line:

NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number: Cat. No.
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Voltage: Serial Number:
Amperage: CSA Certified (Y/N):
Phase: HL Classification:
Wire: Type:
Hz:
Receptacle Interlocked With Circuit Breaker For Hazardous Locations (Y/N)
CB Amperage: CB Cat. No.

INSPECTIONS
Feeder Size and Type Hardware
Terminations Correct Cleanliness
Termination Torqued Fit for Area Classification
Lamacoid Installed Mounted as per Detail

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 October 24, 2007 QC-146 R1 Welding Receptacle Page 1 of 1

 Vendor Equipment Inspection QC-147
(Or Use QC-347)
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable. USE QC-147 OR QC-347 FOR THIS INSPECTION.
1.0 DATA
1.1 Equip / Skid Tag No.: 1.5 P&ID:
1.2 Location: 1.6 Manuf:
1.3 Area: 1.7 Serial #:
1.4 Classification: 1.8 Ref / Locn Dwg:
2. ELECTRICAL INSPECTION
Checks Elect / Inst Tag No’s.▬►
2.1 Equipment tags are installed.
2.2 Cable is tagged at equipment JB and at Local Panel
2.3 Electrical equipment is CSA approved, or accepted equivalent.
2.4 Electrical equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
2.5 Electrical conduit / connector seals are marked.
2.6 All damaged or missing components are identified on Punchlist.
2.7 Accessible electrical terminations are landed and identified.
Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
2.8
been issued to Chemco by Client.
2.9 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
Vendor cables are supported and secured in tray, wire basket or
2.10
other raceway.
2.11 Unused entries are plugged.
2.12 Grounding / Bonding
2.13
2.14 COMMENTS:

3. INSTRUMENTATION INSPECTION
Checks Elect / Inst Tag No’s.▬►
3.1 Equipment tags are installed.
3.2 Instrument equipment is CSA approved, or accepted equivalent.
3.3 Instrument equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
3.4 All damaged or missing components are identified on Punchlist.
Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
3.5
been issued to Chemco by Client.
3.6 Calibration units, range and span agree with datasheet.
When required by the project, calibrated instruments shall bear a
3.7
calibration sticker, placed on the instrument by the vendor.
3.8 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
3.9 Unused entries are plugged.
Process lines and tubing: support, installation, connections and
3.10
elevation.
3.11 Tube bundle is supported and boot sealed at both ends.
3.12 Impulse lines size and connected to process.
3.13
3.14 COMMENTS:

4. ATTACHMENTS
Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Punchlist [ ] Vendor Manual [ ] Other: [ ]
5. PRESERVATION REQUIRED:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 June 7, 2004 QC-147 R1 Vendor Equipment Inspection Page 1 of 1
 Controls Junction Box QC-148
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Equipment Tag Number:
Location: Drawing and Rev #:
INSPECTIONS
Results Results

Installed (as per spec's): Loops Complete:

Shrinks Installed: Lamacoid Installed:

Grounded: Changes Noted:

Deficiencies Noted: Junction Box Clean:

Terminations Complete: Cable Tags Applied:

Shields connected &

Support Stand Bonded: isolated according to
detailed drawing:

Drains / Breathers installed: Terminal Strip ID Markers:

Accessibility / Orientation
Condition of Junction Box:
for maintenance personnel:

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 September 29, 2004 QC-148 R0 Controls Junction Box Page 1 of 1

 Highmast & Pole Lighting
QC-149
Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
NAMEPLATE DATA:

Tag Number Mounting Location:

Drawing and Rev # Highmast Type (Wood or Metal):

INSPECTIONS:

Inspection To Be Performed Result Comments:

Mast Assembly completed as per Specs / Details
Mast Designation Tag Installed

Fixture Horn Installed and Secured

Horn Rigging Functional (if applicable)

Correct Fixtures Installed

Fixtures Secured
Fixture Angles as per Details
Fixtures Wired for Correct Voltage
Fixture Designation Tags Installed

Cables Secured to Mast Base

Cables Secured at Fixtures
Cable Tags Installed
Cables Protected at Base

Additional Wood Mast Inspections

Wood Mast Depth (from drawings)
Additional Metal Mast Inspections
Metal Mast Base Secured to Foundation
Metal Mast
Metal Mast Access Covers Installed
Metal Mast Assembly Bolts Torqued

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 February 28, 2008 QC-149 R1 Highmast & Pole Lighting Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Control Station Inspection & Test
QC-150
Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

1.0 ENCLOSURE /JB DATA

Tag Number: Location Drawing:

Schematic Drawings: Reference Drawings:

Drawings Other: Manufacturer

Model #: NEMA Class:

Material of Enclosure: Location Classification:

2.0 GENERAL INSPECTIONS

Mounted to Specification
2.1 Overall Condition: 2.2
See Standard Details:
Cabling Complete/ Cables
2.3 Lamacoids Applied: 2.4
Secure:
2.5 All Connectors Tight: 2.6 Cable Tags Applied:
Grounding and Bonding
2.7 2.8 Terminations Complete:
Completed:
Shrinks Complete &
2.9 Terminals Tight: 2.10
Shrunk:
Verify wiring as per
2.11 2.12 All Components Secure
Schematic:
2.13 Junction Box Clean: 2.14 Operation of Door latches

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 August 31, 2004 QC-150 R0 Control Station Page 1 of 2

 Tag Number:

3.0 FUNCTION TESTS

Button Types
Push Pull = P/ P Momentary = M Push Turn = P / T Lockable = L Selector = S Guarded = G
Indicate Contact Position With- Open = O And Closed = X

Task
Type of Button
(See Above)
Button Position
Contact Number
(Shrink)

NO

NC

NO

NC

NO

NC

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 August 31, 2004 QC-150 R0 Control Station Page 2 of 2

 Motor & Control Test Record for
600V (or less) Motors QC-151
200 HP and below
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

1.0 MOTOR NAME PLATE DATA

Tag Number: Model # Duty:

Manufacture: Serial #: Amps:

Horsepower: Type: Insulation Class:

R.P.M.: AMB. Temp: Service Factor:

Voltage: Frame: CSA Certification:

Motor Area Classification: Starter Location:

Rotation: (Viewed From Shaft End) [ ] Clockwise (CW) [ ] Counterclockwise (CCW)

2.0 TESTS Equipment Log:

Insulation Resistance (in gig ohms) Winding Continuity ( Ohms )
Voltage Duration All phases to Gnd A/B B/C C/A

REFER TO PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS IF AR & PI TESTS REQUIRED

1 Minute 10 Minute
*Absorption Ratio Reading Amb. Temp. * Polarization Index Reading
(AR)
= (PI)
=
30 Sec. 1 Minute
Reading Reading
Thermister
Heater Resistance: GRD Connected:
Resistance:
Starter or Breaker & Control: Fuse Size Overload Setting
Controls Function Tested: PDMA Testing Required: (Attach if applicable) [ ] Yes [ ] No
3.0 MOTOR AREA CLASSIFICATION
Confirm Motor Area Classification on Nameplate Matches Design Area Class
Motor Classification:
4.0 MOTOR BUMP & RUN-IN
See QC-152 if applicable.
5.0 COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 June 7, 2006 QC-151 R1 Motor & Control Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Motor Bump & Run-In Test Record for
600V (or less) Motors 200 HP and Below
QC-152
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Tag No.: Voltage: FLA:

HP: Ind [ ] Syn [ ] DC [ ]
NOTES: 1. Duration of tests to comply with project specifications.
2. Refer to specification for acceptable test results.
3. Complete Inspection Record on QC-151 prior to energizing motor, when applicable to Contract.
PRE-BUMP TESTS Test Equipment ID:
Confirm Ring Out
Insulation Resistance (in gig ohms) Winding Continuity ( Ohms ) Overload (Or Tone)
Setting Motor Feeder Cable
Voltage Duration All phases to Gnd A/B B/C C/A Set At

INITIALS
TEST TO BE PERFORMED RESULT CHEMCO MECH CLIENT OWNE REMARKS
1. LUBE Verified by Mechanical
2. ALIGNMENT Verified by Mechanical
Bonding resistance measured Ohms
3. RESISTANCE from motor frame to main
ground system tap. Test Eq #:

Actual voltage measured at A-B

4. VOLTAGE MCC (Volts) B-C
Test Eq ID: C-A
Bump uncoupled motor to
5. ROTATION
verify rotation. (CW or CCW as viewed from shaft end)
φA
At start of test: (Amps) φB
φC
NO LOAD
6.
CURRENT φA
At end of test (Amps) φB
φC
Test Equip ID:
Bearing Temp Vibration
Test Equip ID: [ ] °C [ ]°F (In. P-P)
DE ODE DE ODE

BEARING Before start N/A

TEMP. At Start
15 minutes after start
7. &
30 minutes after start
VIBRATION 1 hour after start
READINGS
2 hours after start
3 hours after start
4 hours (if applicable)
8. NOISE Record any unusual noise:
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 4 July 24, 2006 QC-152 R4 Motor Bump & Run In Test.doc Page 1 of 1
 Motor Operated Valve
QC-153
Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA:
Equipment Tag #: Location:
Description: Ref Drawing and Rev:
2.0 NAMEPLATE DATA:
Manuf: Type: Full Load Amperes:
Model: Serial #: Voltage:

HP: Service CSA or Equivalent:

Operator Factor:
(Motor) RPM: Enclosure: Duty:

KW: Frame: Locked Rotor Amps:

°C Rise: Insul Class: Max. Ambient:

Manuf: Model #:
Valve
Serial #: Type:
Location: Manuf: Size:
Voltage: Type: Fuse:
Starter
Amps: Breaker: HP:
Phase: O/L:
3.0 WINDING RESISTANCE: Test Equipment Log #:
Result Result Result
Winding Resistance: A – B: B - C: C – A:
4.0 INSULATION RESISTANCE: Test Equipment Log #:
Test Volts: A -.G: B - G: C – G:
5.0 LIMIT SWITCH
Contact Switch # Contact State Valve Position Comments

TESTED BY:
Name Signature Date

Revision 2 September 15, 2008 QC-153 R2 Mov Inspection.doc Page 1 of 2

 Motor Operated Valve
QC-153
Inspection
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

6.0 INSPECTION
Result Comments
Grounding:
Terminations:
Valve Tagging:
Cable Tagging:
Clearances:
Check Against Datasheet:

7.0 COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 September 15, 2008 QC-153 R2 Mov Inspection.doc Page 2 of 2

 Belt Driven Equipment Alignment
Record
QC-154A
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Motor Shaft Reading Fan Shaft Reading

Initial Date
Tag No (Degrees) (Degrees)
Front to Back Left to Right Front to Back Left to Right

Test Equipment ID:

Comments

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 26, 2007 QC-154A R0 Belt Driven Equipment Alignment Record Page 1 of 1
 Belt Driven Equipment Alignment
Record
QC-154B
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Tag No Motor to Fan Shaft Reading Initial Date

Test Equipment ID:

Comments

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0July 26, 2007 QC-154B R0 Belt Driven Equipment Alignment Record Page 1 of 1
 Dry Type Transformer
Less Than 300 KVA QC-161
600 V and Below
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number Secondary Voltage
Manufacturer Primary Amps
Serial Number Sec. Amps
KVA Temp Rise
Type Percent Imp.
Connection Type (D-Y etc) Insulation Class
Primary Voltage Year
Nameplate agrees with Reference Drawing
Drawing and Revision #
2.0 INSULATION TEST (Results in gigohms) Test Equipment Log #:
Voltage Time Result
Low to Gnd 500V
High to Gnd 1000V 60 Seconds
Low to High 1000V
3.0 Winding Resistance (in ohms using an ohmmeter) Test Equipment Log #:
H1-H2 H2-H3 H3-H1 X1-X0 X2-X0 X3-X0
High Side
Low Side
4.0 INSPECTIONS: Result Result
Mounting Clearances met
Insulators (if applicable)
(CEC 26-248 (1), (2) and (3))
Transformer cleaned Core Ground Strap
Frame grounded Tap Setting
Rubber ISO Pads installed at base Corrosion
(if specified by Project) Xo Grounded
Connections Torqued (for ¼ bolts and [ ] Mechanical Lug
Type of connection to
above) or hand tight for screws and bolts
field cables [ ] Compression Lug
less than ¼ inch.
Finish
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 December 18, 2007 QC-161 R2 Dry Transformer Test Page 1 of 1

 Motor Control Center Assembly QC-162
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

(Applies to the MCC lineup as a whole only, not to the individual wrappers or buckets within the MCC)

NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number:
Manufacturer:
Series #
Rated Current:
Type:
Rated Voltage:
MVA Short Circuit (kA)
Rated BIL:
Reference Dwg #: Rev:
Nameplate Data agrees with Single Line Drawing

SINGLE LINE SKETCH OF LINEUP

Single Line Layout
(Identify all bus joints on single line)

Main Ground Bus Layout

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-162 R0 Motor Control Centre Page 1 of 2

 Designation:

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST RESULTS (with other phases to ground) Equipment Log:
Voltage Level Time Phase A Phase B Phase C
60 sec
Meggar readings in Gig Ohms,

MAIN BUS CONTACT RESISTANCE RESULTS (using 100 A ductor) Equipment Log:
From To Phase A Phase B Phase C

Ground Bus Readings

From To

Entire length of ground bus

Readings in Micro Ohms

INSPECTIONS
Anchorage Paint Condition
Main Incoming Cell wiring
Cleanliness
check (if applicable)
Terminations Bus Supports
Hardware Bus barriers
Corrosion Bus Insulators
Heaters Electrical Clearances
Alignment Bus Joint/Torque Checks
Lamacoids Phase Markings
Kirk Keys Kirk Key Numbers
Fire Stops in place (if
applicable)
Ground bus connected at both ends of lineup to the system ground

COMMENTS

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-162 R0 Motor Control Centre Page 2 of 2
 Low Voltage Wrapper
QC-163
Inspection and Test Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 LOCATION
MCC Designation:
Wrapper Tag Number:
Cell Designation:
2.0 NAMEPLATE DATA
Model Type: Manufacturer:
Series or Serial # Power Device Type in Wrapper:
Rated Current: Power Fuse Size:
Rated Voltage:
MVA Short Circuit (kA)
Rated BIL:
Nameplate Data agrees with Single Line Drawing:
Reference Dwg #: Rev:
3.0 INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST RESULTS (If specified) (Results in Meg Ohms) Test Equipment Log:
(Poles Closed Means Breaker / Contactor Closed. Poles Open Means Breaker / Contactor Open)
PHASE – PHASE PHASE – GROUND LINE TO LOAD
Voltage
Device Type Time (Poles Closed) (Poles Closed) (Poles Open)
Level
A-B B-C C-A A-G B-G C-G A B C

60 sec

4.0 CONTACT RESISTANCE TEST RESULTS (If specified) Test Equipment Log #:
Device Type Phase A Phase B Phase C

5.0 INSPECTIONS
Cleanliness Paint Condition
Insulators Correctly connected to bus
Hardware Ground connection complete
Control Wiring Phase Barriers in place
Heaters Electrical Clearances
Alignment Termination Torqued
Door Interlocks Phase Markings
Lamacoids Control Fuses
Kirk Keys & Numbers Function Test Acceptable
Overloads Set / Programmed Point to Point checks complete
6.0 COMMENTS

INSPECTED /TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 3 December 20, 2005 QC-163 R3 LV Wrapper Inspection & Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Low Voltage Transfer
QC-164
Switch Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number:
Manufacturer:
Series #
Rated Current:
Type:
Rated Voltage:
MVA Short Circuit (kA)
Rated BIL:
Reference Dwg #: Rev:
Nameplate Data agrees with Single Line Drawing

INSPECTIONS
Anchorage Paint Condition
Cleanliness Electrical Clearances
Phase Markings present Bus Supports
Hardware Bus barriers
Corrosion Bus Insulators
Heaters Cable lug terminations torqued
Alignment Bus Joint/Torque Checks
Lamacoids Lugs suitable for incoming cables
Control Wiring complete Grounding complete
Kirk Keys Kirk Key Numbers
All point to point checks of the control wiring complete
Cables from line side of normal breaker come from normal source
Cables from line side of emergency breaker come from emergency source
Cables from transfer switch load breaker go to the load
Phase rotation from normal source and emergency source both have A, B, C rotation
Cables from normal source and emergency source both connected A, B, C
Transfer Switch rated current and voltage agree with system current and voltage

COMMENTS
Note 1: Electrical and function tests on the Transfer Switch will be done by others.

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-164 R0 LV Transfer Switch Inspection Page 1 of 1
Report.doc
 ANNUNCIATOR PANEL QC-165
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number: Control Power (volts, AC or DC):
Model Number: Serial Number:
Manufacturer Date: Drawing & Revision Number:
Annunciator layout and window description agree with drawings:

FUNCTION TEST OF ANNUNCIATOR PANEL

Window Location Window Description Operation Verified

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-165 R0 Annunciator Panel Page 1 of 1
 Variable Frequency Drives
QC-166
(Pre-Vendor Checklist)
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number:
Location:
Manufacturer:
Type:
Series #
Rated HP:
Rated Current:
Rated Voltage:
MVA Short Circuit (kA)
Rated BIL:
Reference Dwg #: Rev:
Nameplate Data agrees with Single Line Drawing (Y/N)

INSPECTIONS
Anchorage Paint Condition
Cleanliness Electrical Clearances
Phase Markings present Bus Supports
Hardware Bus barriers
Corrosion Bus Insulators
Heaters Cable lug terminations torqued
Alignment Bus Joint/Torque Checks
Lamacoids correct and in place Lugs suitable for incoming cables
Control Wiring complete Grounding complete
Kirk Keys Kirk Key Numbers
VFD Installed to specs and codes Conduit System Complete
VFD Feed Complete and verified VFD Load complete and verified
Cable Insulation Readings Fuse sizes checked to drawings,
complete (See Meggar Sheets for specs and codes
results)
Motor Designation CSA or Equivalent

COMMENTS
Note 1: Electrical and function tests on the VFD will be done by others.

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-166 R0 Variable Frequency Drive Page 1 of 1
 Uninterruptible Power
QC-167
System (UPS)
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable. Complete appropriate sections when specified.
Equipment Tag Number: Equipment Location:
CSA or Equivalent: Drawing and Rev # :
1.0 NAMEPLATE DATA:
Rectifier Inverter Static Transfer Panel
Designation
Type
Manufacturer
Serial Number
Manufacture Date
Model Number
Rated Input
Rated Output
Aux Equipment
2.0 VOLTAGE / FREQUENCY / PHASING VERIFICATION: Test Equipment Log:
Description Result Description Result
Input Voltage Bypass Frequency
Input Frequency Bypass Phasing
Input Phasing Inverter Output Voltage
Rectifier Output Voltage Inverter Output Frequency
Bypass Voltage Inverter Output Phasing
3.0 TRANSFER TEST: Test Equipment Log #:
Description Result Comments
Manual Transfer to Bypass
Reset to Inverter
Auto Transfer
4.0 INSPECTION:
Result Result
Grounding Polarity on terminals
Wire Terminations & Tagging Cables & Tagging
Status LED’s Alarm Operation
Air Filters Meters Zeroed
Vendor Startup Report Attached [ ] Inverter Fuse Coordination Verified
5.0 COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 December 20, 2005 QC-167 R2 UPS Inspection & Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Batteries & Battery Charger QC-168
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
CHARGER NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number: Input: V A W Ph Hz

Manufacturer: Output: V A W

Model No.: Type:

Serial No.: Size:
Drawing and Rev #: Location:
Nameplate agrees With Drawings: [ ] Yes [ ] No Aux Equipment:
CHARGER INSPECTION BATTERY INSPECTION
Mark “Pass” “Fail” or “N/A” For Results Results Mark “Pass” “Fail” or “N/A” For Results Results
Installed As Per Drawings Rack & Batteries Installed As Per Drawings
Anchorage Anchorage
Physical Condition Physical Condition & Battery Protection
Wiring Complete Wiring Complete (With Correct Polarity)
Terminations Complete & Tight Terminations Complete & Tight
Cable Tags Applied Cable Tags Applied
Wire Shrinks Installed Wire Shrinks Installed
Charger Grounded Rack Grounded
Accessibility / Orientation for Maintenance Accessibility / Orientation for Maintenance
Lamacoid Installed Lamacoid Installed
Breakers / Fuses as Per Drawings Battery Connections/Links Torqued
Enclosure Clean Battery Connections/Links Greased
Area Clean & Well Ventilated Verify Number of Cells / Batteries Filled
CHARGER SETTINGS & FUNCTION TESTS
Operation Results Results Setting Left At
Low DC Voltage Relay: Charger Float (Per Manuf)
AC Failure Relay: Charger Equalize (Per Manuf)
Ground Detection Relay: Charger Boost (Per Manuf)
Output Failure Relay: Measured Output Volts:
Voltmeter (Zeroed): Measured Output Amps:
Ammeter (Zeroed): Batteries Charged: [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] N/A
Comments: Test Equip Log Nos.

Revision 1 November 3, 2005 QC-168 R1 Batteries & Battery Charger.doc Page 1 of 2

 Batteries & Battery Charger QC-168

*For lead acid batteries, check & record specific gravity with hydrometer per manufacturer’s specs.
Cell No. Volts * Specific Gravity Cell No. Volts Specific Gravity
1 31
2 32
3 33
4 34
5 35
6 36
7 37
8 38
9 39
10 40
11 41
12 42
13 43
14 44
15 45
16 46
17 47
18 48
19 49
20 50
21 51
22 52
23 53
24 54
25 55
26 56
27 57
28 58
29 59
30 60
Test Equipment Log Nos.:
Comments:
At completion, provide rigid mechanical protection for batteries if system is not left in service. Do not use tarp
or cover with plastic.

INSPECTED/TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 November 3, 2005 QC-168 R1 Batteries & Battery Charger.doc Page 2 of 2

 Battery Load Test QC-169
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
BATTERY NAMEPLATE DATA
Tag Number: Volts / Cell: Manuf. Date:
Manufacturer: No. of Cells: Charge Before Date:
Cell Type: Total Volts: All Cells Torqued To: In-Lbs

Model No.: Ambient Temp: °C Test Load Current: Amps

Drawing and Rev #: Design Standby Time:
Charger Settings Float V Equalize V Battery Open Circuit Volts:

BATTERY TESTS (Results in Volts) (Batteries Must Be Charged Before Load Test)
CLOCK TIME

MIN 0
CELL #
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30

Revision 1 November 3, 2005 QC-169 R1 Battery Load Test.doc Page 1 of 2

 Battery Load Test QC-169

CLOCK TIME

MIN 0
CELL #
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60

Total Volts

Initial Battery Voltage Under Load: Test Equip Log Nos:

Comments:

At completion, provide rigid mechanical protection for batteries if system is not left in service. Do not use tarp
or cover with plastic.
TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER
NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 November 3, 2005 QC-169 R1 Battery Load Test.doc Page 2 of 2

 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-170
Receiving Report
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

1.0 RECEIVING TEST

Length Megger Test Continuity
E.H.T. Tag Designation Type Date Name
(ft) (M-Ohms) Volts (in Ohms)

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 April 5, 2004 QC-170 R1 EHT Receiving Report.doc Page 1 of 1

 Electrical Heat Trace & RTD
QC-171
Inspection
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 TRACE DATA
Trace #: Panel Designation:
Process Line #: Circuit Designation:
Cable Part #: Controller Designation:
Zone Drawing: Rev:
2.0 PRE-INSULATION INSPECTION
Results Comments
2.1 E.H.T. cable tag matches above part # and zone drawing
2.2 RTDs are installed as per drawing and details ATC [ ] R1 ? R2 ?
2.3 RTD Tags installed and labeled correctly
2.4 E.H.T. Cable is routed per standards and details
2.5 E.H.T. Cable is secured as per details
2.6 Heat sink allowances are as per details
2.7 As-Builts are completed and splices are identified
2.8 Power connections and end seals are properly installed
2.9 Continuity test MI Ω
MI / SR @ 500 Vdc : mΩ Test Equipment Log #:
2.10 Pre-Insulation
SR @ 1000 Vdc: mΩ
Megger Readings: Calibration Due Date:
SR @ 2500 Vdc: mΩ
PRE-INSULATION INSPECTED AND TESTED BY:
(Crew) Print: Date: (Foreman) Print: Date:
Sign: Sign:

3.0 POST INSULATION INSPECTION

Results Comments
3.1 Power boxes and terminations are as per details
3.2 Power boxes and terminations are properly tagged
3.3 "Electric Traced" stickers are applied
3.4 RTDs are installed as per drawings and details ATC [ ] R1 Ω R2 Ω
3.5 Continuity test MI Ω
MI / SR @ 500 Vdc : mΩ Test Equipment Log #:
Post-Insulation
3.6 SR @ 1000 Vdc: mΩ
Megger Readings: Calibration Due Date:
SR @ 2500 Vdc: mΩ
COMMENTS:

(Note: Punch list any uncompleted items.)

Post Insulation Inspected and Tested by CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 April 5, 2004 QC-171 R1 EHT & RTD Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-172
Commissioning
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

1.0 CONTROLLER DATA
Controller Panel #: Controller #:
Breaker Panel #: Circuit #:
Plant Area: Breaker Size:
Zone Drawing #: Zone Dwg. Rev#:
2.0 DESIGN DATA
Design Voltage: Phases: Design Current:
Cable Part #: Design Length:
3.0 CONTROLLER CONFIGURATION
Address: Setpoint Temp.: °C
TS Control Mode: Ground Fault Alarm: mA
TS1 Low Temp Alarm: °C Ground Fault Trip Setpoint: mA
TS2 Low Temp Alarm: °C High/Low Load Current Alarm: Amps
4.0 PRE-COMMISSIONING
Final Megger: Test Equipment Log #:
4.1 MΩ
(500 Vdc on MI&SR) Calibration Due Date:
Checks: Results Comments
4.2 Controller and zone drawing configuration are the same as above
4.3 Controller function test
4.4 Measured voltage meets design voltage (at field end) Volts
4.5 Measured current meets design current Amps
4.6 Measured cable resistance Ohms
4.7 RTD Temp reading on controller °C
4.8 Circuit breaker is sized as per drawings
4.9 RTD 1 passed failure test
4.10 RTD 2 passed failure test
4.11 Lamacoid tags are installed and text is correct
4.12 All RTD & MI Cable Tags are installed and text is correct
4.13All wires / circuits are properly labeled with shrinks installed
COMMENTS:

(Note: Punch list any uncompleted items.)

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 April 5, 2004 QC-172 R1 EHT Commissioning.doc Page 1 of 1

 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-173
Megger Exception Report
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Meggar Test Date

EHT Insulation Acceptable reviewed
EHT Tag Designation Date Test Authority (print)
Type Test Limit by
Performed
(in GO) (in GO) Authority

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT R.F.O.

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
QC-173 R0 EHT Meggar Exception
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 Page 1 of 1
Report.doc
 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-174
MI Cable Repair
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

TRACER DATA
Tracer #: Tracer Type:
Plant Area: Building ID:
Cable Part #: Cable Length:
Model #: Part Number
Zone Drawing: Rev #:
REASON FOR REPAIR
Manufacturing Defect Length Added
Damaged During Installation Length Removed
Damaged After Installation % Change*
Other (please describe) * If greater than 3% change, attach FCR and MI cable tag
request)
CABLE MEASUREMENTS:
Confirmed Length:
ELECTRICAL TESTS:
Continuity Check Insulation Test Conductor to Pipe (in
Test to be Performed Meg Ohms)
(in ohms)
Prior to Repair
After repair
CSA TEST (When Specified):
Test to be performed after Seconds KV M?
repair. 2.2 KV for 1 minute 15
(Watch for meter modulation
30
i.e cable breakdown)
Discontinue test immediately if 45
modulation occurs. 60
COMMENTS

REPAIRED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

CERTIFICATION #: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 March 11, 2004 QC-174 R1 EHT MI Cable Repair.doc Page 1 of 1

 STS Heat Tube Inspection
QC-175
Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

GENERAL INFORMATION
Plant ID Location:
Reference Drawing: Rev Number
Pipe Spool Number
INSPECTIONS:
Acceptance Result
Inspection Remarks
Criteria Accept Reject
1 Heat tube material A-106 SMLS

2 Heat tube cutting length Per Drawings

No burrs, slight
3 Heat tube end de-burring bevel
4 Heat tube coupling Centered & welded

5 Heat tube attachment dimensions Per Drawings

Mandrel must pass
6 Heat tube pigging freely
15 PSIG
7 5 minute static air test (1030 mBar)
8 Close box or cap tube end
9

10

COMMENTS:

Note: Punch list any uncompleted items.

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-175 R0 STS Heat Tube Page 1 of 1
Inspection.doc
 STS & FTS HEAT TUBE QC-176
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Trace Designation:

HEAT TRACE DATA:

Controller Designation: Source Designation:
Line Number: Transformer Designation:

HEAT TUBE DATA:

Manufacturer Size
Type Total Length
Number of Pipe Sections From To
Zone Drawing Numbers
All components of the Heat Tube meet the testing requirements Results
Individual Test results are shown on QC-177

INSPECTIONS:
All heat tube ends de-burred Heat Tube to box connection tight
Heat Tube strapped as per specs. Heat Tube in correct position
Heat Tube gaps are within specs Heat Transfer Cement Applied
Coupling welds clean Process Pipe clean of splatter

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO: CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0, March 11, 2004 QC-176 R0 STS & FSE Heat Tube.doc Page 1 of 1
 Heat Tube Test QC-177
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

DWG & REV #: CLIENT REF:

Box Number Pigging Test 5 Minute Pressure Test (15 PSIG)

Section Pipe Couplings Banding Boxes
Number Deburred Welded Complete Installed Result
From To: Date Initial Date: Initial
(PSI)

COMMENTS:

CONDUIT TYPE: CHEMCO CLIENT

Rigid Steel Conduit EMT Conduit NAME: NAME:

Rigid PVC Conduit Other: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DB-2 Conduit DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-177 R0 Heat Tube Test.doc Page 1 of 2
 Heat Tube Test QC-177
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

DWG & REV #: CLIENT REF:

CONDUIT TYPE: CHEMCO CLIENT

Rigid Steel Conduit EMT Conduit NAME: NAME:

Rigid PVC Conduit Other: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DB-2 Conduit DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-177 R0 Heat Tube Test.doc Page 2 of 2
 Heat Trace RTD QC-178
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

DWG & REV #: CLIENT REF:

Test Pre- Test Post Instrument

RTD RTD Test on Receipt ID Tag Inspected By
Insulation Insulation Comments:
Number Type Installed
Ohms Date Ohms Date Ohms Date (Y/N) Initial Date

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-178 R0 Heat Trace RTD.doc Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-179
Release Form
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

RELEASE FOR INSULATION

Received Released
EHT Tag Designation Pipe Line Number
Date By Date By

RELEASE FOR BACK-FILL

Received Released
EHT Tag Designation Pipe Line Number
Date From Date From

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-179 R0 Heat Trace Release Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Heat Trace
QC-179B
Removal and Re-Instatement
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

EHT / LOCATION DATA

EHT Tag #: EHT Type: (i.e. M.I. / S.R.)
Plant: Area:
Cable Part #:
Zone Drawing #: Rev #:
REASON FOR REMOVAL
Hydro Testing Valve / PSV Removal
Instrument Removal Piping Tie In
Other (please describe)
Removed by: Date:
REINSTATEMENT INFORMATION
Re-Installed on (i.e Valve / Line) Valve / Line Tag #:
Length Re-installed (approx) Date of Reinstatement
Reinstated by: Date:
ELECTRICAL TESTS:
Continuity Check Insulation Test Conductor to Pipe
(in ohms) (Meg. Ohms)
Prior to Reinstatement
Post Reinstatement

(Tester) Print: Date: QC) Print: Date:

Sign: Sign:

Test Equipment Log # Calibration Date:

COMMENTS
(identify Damages or Concerns)

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 January 11, 2006 QC-179B R0 EHT Removal-Reinstatement.doc Page 1 of 1
 RTD Test Record QC-180
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Location: Dwg #: Rev#:
Test Pre- Test Post
Test on Receipt Instrument Tested By
RTD Insulation Insulation ID Tag
RTD Type Installed Comments:
Number
Ohms Date Ohms Date Ohms Date (Y/N) Initial Date

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 March 8, 2005 QC-180 R1 RTD Test Record Page 1 of 1
 Building Electrical Inspection QC-181
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Building Designation: Building Location:

ELECTRICAL INSPECTIONS:
INSPECTION RESULT COMMENTS
Material as per drawings and specifications:
Disconnect Switches (Primary and Secondary)
Transformers
Switchgear
Motor Control Center
Panelboards with directory
Grounding
Junction Boxes
Circuits verified
Fixtures / Receptacles / Switches
Fire Protection System
Emergency Power System
Telephone Rough In
Heat Tracing
Gas Detection System / With Test Forms
HVAC System / CW Tests
Equipment properly identified

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-181 R0 Building Electrical Page 1 of 1
 Fire Alarm Check List QC-182
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Equipment Tag Number: Equipment Location:

Equipment Description:

Device Device Install and Ground

Specific Device Location Trouble Alarm Remarks
Type Address Terminate Fault

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-182 R0 Fire Alarm Check List Page 1 of 1
 HEATER INSPECTION
QC-183
AND TEST REPORT
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Serial Number: Type:
Voltage: Phase:
Amperage: Kilowatts:
Classification: CSA Certified (Y/N)
Drawing and Rev # Nameplate Agrees with Single Line:

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST (in gig ohms) Equipment Log:

Voltage Level Duration All Phases to Ground
1 min

WINDING RESISTANCE (in ohms) Equipment Log:

Phase A Phase B Phase C

INSPECTIONS
Feeder size and type Correctly connected to feeder
Control Wiring Ground connection complete
Hardware Thermostat Function check
Lamacoids Point to Point checks complete
Cleanliness Phase Markings in place
Termination Torqued Paint Condition

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-183 R0 Heater Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 HEATER INSPECTION & TEST RECORD QC-184
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Location: Drawing: Rev:
INSPECTION & TEST TEST EQUIP LOG #:
TESTS
INSPECTIONS Winding Resistance
(Ω) DC Test Insulation
Tag Number Nameplate
Elect Voltage Resistance
Hazardous CSA Connection Tag Level (All Phases To
Agrees
KW Volts Amps Ph Area Certified & Ground Installed Ph A Ph B Ph C
Class (Y/N)
with Single
Complete (Y/N) (1 Min.) Ground)
Line (Y/N)
(Y/N)

Inspected By: Tested By:

Name Signature Date Name Signature Date

CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 August 25, 2004 QC-184 R0 Heater Inspection & Test Record Page 1 of 1
 Solenoid Test Record QC-185
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Location: Part Number: Ref. Dwg: Rev.

Solenoid Coil ID Tag Inspected By Solenoid Coil ID Tag Inspected By

Designation Installed Designation Installed
Voltage Resistance Initial Date Voltage Resistance Initial Date

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 July 9, 2004 QC-185 R0 Solenoid Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Pile Ground Inspection QC-186
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Ref. Drawing: Rev:

Ref. Details: Rev:

INSPECTION:
Final
Paint
Rust / Dirt Crimp Complete Weld Complete Installed Connect
Grid Point or Pile # Complete
Removed (When Specified) (When Specified) Per Details To
(When Specified)
Column

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC OTHER CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 July 10, 2006 QC-186 R1 Pile Ground Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1

 Equipment Grounding QC-187
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation: Drawing and Rev #:

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection to be Performed
Result Comments:
Equipment Type
Electrical Equipment Transformer Case
Transformer Xo
Equipment Base / Supports
Bus Bars
AC Panels
DC Panels
Control Panels
Power Junction Boxes
Instrument Junction Boxes
Motors
Cable Tray
Cabinets & Racks

Equipment Ground Tails

Tail Length
Sleeves
Equipment Connection Welded Bolted
Pipes

Structure Piles Welded Crimped

Rebar Welded Crimped
Wire Mesh Welded Crimped
Column Weld Tab
Column Ground Connection Welded Bolted
Sleeves
Tail Length
Ground Bar Installation
Ground Bar Connections

Ground Resistance Test (Attach Drawing with recorded results)

Other

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 September 29, 2004 QC-187 R0 Equipment Grounding Page 1 of 1

 Fence Grounding QC-187A
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Designation: Drawing and Rev #:

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection to be Performed
Result Comments:
Type
Sleeves Installed Per Details
Ground Tail Fence Connections ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Posts Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Horizontal Rails Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Top Rail Expansion Joints Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Wire Mesh Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Barbed Wire Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Swing Gates Grounded ( ) Bolted ( ) Crimped
Anti Oxidant Applied
Conductor Sized Per Details

Ground Tail Resistance Test to Grid (Attach Drawing with recorded results)

Comments:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 January 24, 2008 QC-187A R1 Fence Grounding.doc Page 1 of 1

 Dedicated Ground Conductor QC-187B
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE NAME
Cable Termination Location (From)
Reference Drawing & Rev (From)
Cable Termination Location (To)
Reference Drawing & Rev (To)

CABLE DATA
Cable Type Cable Voltage Rating
Cable Size Length
Insulated or Bare Insulation Type
Insulation Color / Stripe Color

INSPECTIONS
Source End Field End
Cable Tag if Applicable Cable Isolated for Entire length
Terminations Complete
Cable Supported
Connectors Tight

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 February 20, 2008 QC-187B R0 Dedicated Ground Conductor.doc Page 1 of 1

 Ground Grid Checklist QC-188
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Ground Grid Location Drawing and Rev #:

INSPECTIONS:
Inspection to be Performed Result Comments:
Primary Conductor is correct size and type in accordance
with drawings and details
Ground conductor burial depth and routing are as per
drawings and specifications
Compression connections checked
Ground rod locations installation according to drawings

Ground Rod connections checked

Location, type, size and insulation color of equipment taps
per drawings and protected during construction
System ground rod resistance to earth checked and
recorded on QC form QC-263

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 March 11, 2004 QC-188 R0 Electrical Ground Grid Checklist Page 1 of 1
 Miscellaneous Electrical Equipment
Inspection & Test Report
QC-189
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:
Manufacturer: Model Number:
Serial Number: Type:
Voltage: Phase:
Amperage: CSA Certified (Y/N)
Classification: Drawing and Rev #
Nameplate Agrees with Single Line:

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST (in gig ohms) Equipment Log:

Voltage Level Duration All Phases to Ground
1 min

ATTACHMENTS:
Testing Specs Available QC Forms
Vendor Manual

INSPECTIONS
Feeder size and type Correctly connected to feeder
Control Wiring Ground connection complete
Hardware Point to Point checks complete
Lamacoids Phase Markings in place
Cleanliness Paint Condition
Termination Torqued

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 January 22, 2007 QC-189 R1 Misc Electrical Equip Inspection & Test Report.doc Page 1 of 1
 Electrical Equipment Insulation
QC-190
Resistance Test
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

NAMEPLATE DATA:
Tag Number Mounting Location:

Manufacturer: Model Number:

Serial Number: Type:

Voltage: Phase:

Amperage: CSA Certified (Y/N)

Classification: Drawing and Rev #

Nameplate Agrees with Single Line:

INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST Test Equipment Log:

(Megger Phase to All Other Phases & Ground) Megger Across Main CB
Test A Line - B Line - C Line -
Device Type Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral
Voltage Load Load Load

Bus (Main CB Closed if Equipped) --- --- ---

Main CB (CB Open) --- --- --- ---

Main CB (CB Closed) --- --- --- ---

Duration of test is 60 sec unless otherwise specified by Project Specifications Megger readings in Gig Ohms

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 January 31, 2005 QC-190 R0 Elect Equip IR Test Page 1 of 1

 Motor Preservation Record QC-191
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

LOG NO.:
1.0 MOTOR NAME PLATE DATA
Tag Number: Model # Duty:

Manufacturer: Serial #: F.L Amps:

Horsepower: Type: Insulation Class:

R.P.M.: AMB. Temp: Service Factor:

Voltage: Temp Rise: CSA Certification:

SF: Frame:

2.0 MOTOR TESTS

Insulation Resistance (in MΩ, GΩ or TΩ) Winding Continuity ( Ohms)
Test All phases Test
Date Equipment ID
Voltage Duration A/B B/C C/A Tested By
to Gnd Equipment ID

3.0 HEATER TESTS

Test Heater Circuit Supply
Date Equipment ID Connected
Panel # Load Current Tested By
Breaker # Voltage

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 3 September 12, 2007 QC-191 R3 Motor Preservation Record Page 1 of 1

 Anti-Condensate Heater
QC-192
Preservation Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

1.0 DESIGNATION
Tag Number: Location:

Description:

2.0 HEATER TESTS

Outside Heater Circuit Load Supply
Date Supply Panel # Test Equip ID Tested By
Temp. Connected Breaker # Current Voltage

3.0 COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
QC-192 R1 Anti-Condensate Heater Preservation
Revision 1 December 20, 2005 Page 1 of 1
Record.doc
 Transformer Preservation Record QC-193
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

1.0 TRANSFORMER NAMEPLATE DATA

Tag Number: [ ] Oil Filled [ ] Dry
Manufacturer: Location:
KVA: Primary Voltage:
Serial #: Secondary Voltage:
% Impedance BIL:
2.0 INSULATION TEST Test Equipment ID:
(Results in Meg Ohms) Voltage Time Temp ˚C Result Tested By
High to Low & Ground

Low to High & Ground

60 Seconds
High & Low to Ground
Core to Ground 500 V
3.0 GAUGE READINGS (If Equipped)
Gauge Gauge
Outdoor N – Nitrogen Liquid
Date
Temp. L - Liquid Level
Pressure As Pressure As Comments Inspected By
Found Left

4.0 COMMENTS:

CHEMCO: CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 20, 2005 QC-193 R1Transformer Preservation Record.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195A
Rectifier
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Tag No.: Drawing and Rev :
Location: Co-Ordinates:
Manufacturer: Serial No.:
Model: CSA:
Input: V Ph A
Output: V Ph A
Inspected by
Item Rectifier Checks Result
Initial Date
1 Rectifier Identified / Tagged

2 Securely mounted

3 Accessibility

4 Area is well ventilated

5 Access door may be opened without obstruction

6 Conduits properly installed c/w locknuts, bushings, seals

7 Teck cables properly installed c/w locknuts, bushings, seals

8 Are explosion proof Teck connectors installed

9 Are explosion proof Teck connectors sealed

10 External cable connections properly installed and secure

11 DC leads connected at proper locations

12 DC cables properly identified and tagged

13 All terminations are identified and tight

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195A R0 Cathodic Protection Rectifier.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195B
Junction Box
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Use this form for Junction Boxes, Junction Panels, Anode Splitter Panels
Tag No.: Drawing and Rev :
Location: Co-Ordinates:
Manufacturer: Serial No.:
Model: CSA:

Inspected by
Item JB Checks Result
Initial Date
1 JB Identified / Tagged
2 Securely mounted / supported
3 Accessibility
4 Area is well ventilated
5 Access door may be opened without obstruction
6 Conduits properly installed c/w L-nuts, bushings, seals, hubs
7 Teck cables properly installed c/w L-nuts, bushings, seals
8 Are explosion proof Teck connectors installed
9 Are explosion proof Teck connectors sealed
10 External cable connections properly installed and secure
11 Leads connected at proper locations
12 All terminations are identified and tight

DC Cable Checks (U/G & A/G)

13 U/G wires / cables properly installed (PVC or Galv conduit)
14 U/G wires / cables at proper depth
15 U/G wires / cables proper material, size and color
16 U/G wires / cables checked for nicks / damage
17 U/G wires / cables nicks / damage repaired
18 A/G Teck cables properly installed, sized & color coded
19 All wires / cables identified & tagged

General
20 Rectifier / Groundbed installation ready for energization
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195B R0 Cathodic Protection Junction Box.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195C
Test Station / Bond Panel
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Tag No.: [ ] Test Station [ ] Test Station / Bond Panel
Location: Drawing and Rev :
Manufacturer: Co-Ordinates:
Model: Serial No.:
CSA: Type: [ ] Box [ ] Panel [ ] Head

Inspected by
Item Test Station Checks Result
Initial Date
1 Test station identified / tagged
2 Test station post installed (if detailed)
3 Securely mounted / supported
4 Accessibility
5 Access door may be opened without obstruction
6 Conduits properly installed c/w L-nuts, bushings, seals, hubs
7 Teck cables properly installed c/w L-nuts, bushings, seals
8 Are explosion proof Teck connectors installed
9 Are explosion proof Teck connectors sealed
10 External cable connections properly installed and secure
11 Leads connected at proper locations
12 All terminations are identified and tight

DC Cable Checks (U/G & A/G)

13 U/G wires / cables properly installed (PVC or Galv conduit)
14 U/G wires / cables at proper depth
15 U/G wires / cables proper material, size and color
16 U/G wires / cables checked for nicks / damage
17 U/G wires / cables nicks / damage repaired
18 A/G Teck cables properly installed, sized & color coded
19 All wires / cables identified & tagged

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195C R0 Cathodic Protection Test Station.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195D
Underground Piping
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation: Drawing and Rev :
Location: Co-Ordinates:
Ref Electrode Type Test Station ID:

Inspected by
Item Checks Result
Initial Date
U/G INSTALLATION
1 Water table present
2 Water table depth
3 Confirm pipe is steel (magnet check if necessary)
Pipe surface preparation (cleaned, brushed & filed to bright
4
steel finish. No gouges allowed)
5 Graphite mold is in good condition & free of debris
6 Thermite weld charges are not expired
7 Separation of Thermite weld metal / powder
8 Copper sleeves crimped to lead wire (if applicable)
9 Thermite welds complete and securely attached to pipe
10 Primer applied
11 Coating materials or Moldable sealant properly applied
12 Sealant or tape wrap applied
13 Reference electrode installation c/w lead wire
14 Correct lead wire type & colors installed
15 Lead wires properly installed / routed
16 Insulated leads checked for nicks, damage
17 Insulated leads nicks, damage repaired
18 Lead wires identified / marked at test station
19 Inspect all installed Anode bar for damage (cracks, etc)
20 Anode bar installed properly and to design specs
21 Steel core of Anode bar exposed for crimp connections
22 Proper crimping tool and size of crimp used
23 Anode splices properly sealed with shrink sleeve

Backfilling Yes No
24 Sand Materials as per Shell Canada Standards
25 Any Cable Damage

Complete corresponding Test Station QC Record.

Revision 2 January 3, 2008 QC-195D R2 Cathodic Protection UG Piping Page 1 of 4
 Cathodic Protection
QC-195D
Underground Piping
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Designation:

TESTS
Item Checks Result
Soil Resistivity Tests Max. Reading 10,000 ohm-cm
26 Test Equipment ID:
27 Native soil resitvity (ohm-cm)
28 Backfill soil restivity (ohm-cm)
Note:1. All bonds should be disconnected after testing until backfill complete. 2. Connect each pipe separately.

Pipe to Soil Potential With Respect To Portable Reference Electrode (Edit list to suit project)
Pipe Before Backfill After Backfill
Spool #
Description (mV) (mV)
Before Bonds After Bonds Before Bonds After Bonds

29 Test Equipment ID:

30 Pipe Only

31 Pipe Test Lead # 1

32 Pipe Test Lead # 2

33 Pipe Test Lead # 3

34 Pipe Test Lead # 4

35 Pipe Test Lead # 5

36 Pipe Test Lead # 6

37 Pipe Test Lead # 7

38 Anode Lead # 1 N/A N/A

39 Anode Lead # 2 N/A N/A

40 Anode Lead # 3 N/A N/A

41 Anode Lead # 4 N/A N/A

42 Anode Lead # 5 N/A N/A

43 Anode Lead # 6 N/A N/A

44 Anode Lead # 7 N/A N/A

45 Anode Lead # 8 N/A N/A

46 Anode Lead # 9 N/A N/A

47 Anode Lead # 10 N/A N/A

48 Anode Lead # 11 N/A N/A

49 Anode Lead # 12 N/A N/A

50 Anode Lead # 13 N/A N/A

51 Anode Lead # 14 N/A N/A

52 Buried Reference Electrode N/A N/A

Revision 2 January 3, 2008 QC-195D R2 Cathodic Protection UG Piping Page 2 of 4

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195D
Underground Piping
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

Pipe to Soil Potential With Respect To Buried Reference Electrode (Edit list to suit project)
Pipe Before Backfill After Backfill
Spool #
Description (mV) (mV)
Before Bonds After Bonds Before Bonds After Bonds

Test Equipment ID:

53 Pipe Bond Lead # 1

54 Pipe Bond Lead # 2

55 Pipe Bond Lead # 3

56 Pipe Bond Lead # 4

57 Pipe Bond Lead # 5

58 Pipe Bond Lead # 6

59 Pipe Bond Lead # 7

60 Anode Lead # 1 N/A N/A

61 Anode Lead # 2 N/A N/A
62 Anode Lead # 3 N/A N/A
63 Anode Lead # 4 N/A N/A
64 Anode Lead # 5 N/A N/A
65 Anode Lead # 6 N/A N/A
66 Anode Lead # 7 N/A N/A
67 Anode Lead # 8 N/A N/A
68 Anode Lead # 9 N/A N/A
69 Anode Lead # 10 N/A N/A
70 Anode Lead # 11 N/A N/A
71 Anode Lead # 12 N/A N/A
72 Anode Lead # 13 N/A N/A
73 Anode Lead # 14 N/A N/A

Resistance of Test Leads to Pipe With Respect To Fluke Continuity / Diode Tester (Edit list to suit project)
Pipe
Test Equipment ID: Spool # Before Backfill After Backfill
Description
74 Test Lead # 1- Bond Lead # 1 Ω Ω

75 Test Lead # 2- Bond Lead # 2 Ω Ω

76 Test Lead # 3- Bond Lead # 3 Ω Ω

77 Test Lead # 4- Bond Lead # 4 Ω Ω

78 Test Lead # 5- Bond Lead # 5 Ω Ω

79 Test Lead # 6- Bond Lead # 6 Ω Ω

80 Test Lead # 7- Bond Lead # 7 Ω Ω

Revision 2 January 3, 2008 QC-195D R2 Cathodic Protection UG Piping Page 3 of 4

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195D
Underground Piping
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

Current Readings After Backfill ( Connect # 6 Bond Lead to Anode Lead/Leads ) (Edit list to suit project)
Pipe
Test Equipment ID: Spool #
Description mA
81 Anode Lead #

82 Anode Lead #

83 Anode Lead #

84 Anode Lead #

85 Anode Lead #

86 Anode Lead #

87 Anode Lead #

88 Anode Lead #

89 Anode Lead #

90 Anode Lead #

AS-BUILTS
91 As-Built complete

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 2 January 3, 2008 QC-195D R2 Cathodic Protection UG Piping Page 4 of 4

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195E
Anode Groundbed
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:
Groundbed Type: [ ] Deep [ ] Semi Deep
Location: Drawing and Rev :
Anode Type Co-Ordinates:
Anode Quantity:

Inspected by
Item Checks Result
Initial Date
INSTALLATION
1 Hole diameter
2 Hole depth
3 Is water present in hole?
4 Water depth
5 Anodes c/w adequate leads installed
6 Correct lead wire type & colors installed
7 Anode centralizers installed (hole centering)
8 Slotted PVC vent pipe installed
9 PVC vent pipe end cap installed
10 PVC Vent pipe Nilex filter sock installed & clamped
11 PVC Vent pipe down-turn screened cap installed (A/G)
12 Lead wires properly installed / routed
13 Lead wire crimps installed & shrink tube over
14 Insulated leads checked for nicks, damage
15 Insulated leads nicks, damage repaired
16 Lead wires identified / marked at splitter / JB
17 Calcined Coke backfill installed
18 Bentonite installed
19 Lead wires at proper depth
20 Trench backfill & red dye concrete complete
21 Complete Associated Anode Splitter/Junction Box Record
22 As-Built complete

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195E R0 Cathodic Protection Anode Groundbed.doc Page 1 of 2

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195E
Anode Groundbed
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

Inspected by
Item Checks Result
Initial Date
ANODE RESISTANCE TESTS
23 Anode #1 (top) Ω

24 Anode #2 Ω

25 Anode #3 Ω

26 Anode #4 Ω

27 Anode #5 Ω

28 Anode #6 (bottom) Ω

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195E R0 Cathodic Protection Anode Groundbed.doc Page 2 of 2

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195F
Storage Tank
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:
Location: Drawing and Rev :

CORROSOMETER TEMPERATURE TEMPORARY

ANODES REFERENCE CELL
PROBE PROBE ANODES
Type
Quantity

Inspected by
Item Checks Result
Initial Date
INSTALLATION
1 Ribbon anodes installed
2 Anodes header cable installed
3 Header cable to anode C-Tap connections
4 C-Tap connections mastic sealant applied
Header cable to anode C-Tap connections shrink sleeves
5
applied
6 Corrosometer probes installed
7 Temperature probes installed
8 Temporary magnesium ribbon anodes installed
Slotted CPVC monitoring pipe nylon rope & end caps
9
installed
10 CPVC monitoring pipe Nilex filter sock installed
11 Tank weld on tab installed
12 Tank negative lead connection installed
13 PVC conduit system for anodes installed to junction panel
PVC conduit system for corrosometer probes / temperature
14 probes / electrodes / temporary anodes installed to junction
panel
15 Tank center & perimeter identified
16 Teck cable installed between rectifier & junction panel
17 Ribbon anode spacing
18 Remove plastic bags from cells
19 As-Built complete
20

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195F R0 Cathodic Protection Storage Tank.doc Page 1 of 3

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195F
Storage Tank
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

LEAD WIRING TO JUNCTION PANEL

Inspected by
(or to protective chamber at edge of tank)
Check For Continuity /
Termination
Lead Wires Installed Color Nicks / Identification /
(tank end) Initial Date
Damage Tagging
Anode Lead Wires
Tank Negative Lead
Wires
Corrosometer Probes
Temperature Probes
Reference Cells
Temporary Anodes

Complete Associated Anode Junction Panel Record

Complete Associated Rectifier Panel Record

Inspected by
Checks Result
Initial Date
SOIL RESTIVITY TESTS
Test Equipment ID: Ω-cm

Sample #1 soil resitvity (ohm-cm) Ω-cm

Sample #2 soil resitvity (ohm-cm) Ω-cm

REFERENCE CELL TESTS (millivolts)

Before After Inspected by
Backfill Backfill
(mV) (mV) Initial Date
Test Equipment ID:
C1 lead to C2 lead
C2 lead to C3 lead

CORROSOMETER
Test Equipment ID:
Corrosometer P1 (Mag Connected)
Corrosometer P2 (Mag Connected)
Corrosometer P1 (Baseline Reading)
Corrosometer P2 (Baseline Reading)

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195F R0 Cathodic Protection Storage Tank.doc Page 2 of 3

 Cathodic Protection
QC-195F
Storage Tank
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Designation:

ANODE RESISTANCE TESTS (Power Feed Connections Ω Between Leads)

Test Equipment ID Before After Inspected by

Backfill Backfill
Loop # Ω Ω Initial Date
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω
Ω Ω

TANK TO GRID
Test Equipment ID:
Tank to grid circuit resistance Ω Ω

TEMPERATURE PROBE
Test Equipment ID:
Temperature Probe P1 (microvolts) µV µV

Temperature Probe P2 (microvolts) µV µV

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195F R0 Cathodic Protection Storage Tank.doc Page 3 of 3

 Cathodic Protection
Valve Jumpers / Bonding QC-195G
&Release
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Drawing and Rev :

Valve / Inspected By
Bond/Jumper Bond/Jumper Continuity
Valve or Pipe Flange ID Installed Connected Check
Flange Left
Continuous Initial Date

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 6, 2006 QC-195G R0 Cathodic Protection Bonding & Release.doc Page 1 of 1
 VESSEL THERMOCOUPLE
QC-196A
TEST RECORD
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Complete as applicable. Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable.

Vessel Designation: Service Description:

At Fab Facility On Site

Before Before After After
Tag # Test Insulation Shipping Delivery Installation
Noted Items

Visual Inspection.
Continuity, Red to Non-Red.
Resistance, Red to Shield.
Inspected / Tested By:
Date of Test
Before Before After After
Tag # Test Insulation Shipping Delivery Installation
Noted Items

Visual Inspection.
Continuity, Red to Non-Red.
Resistance, Red to Shield.
Inspected / Tested By:
Date of Test
Before Before After After
Tag # Test Insulation Shipping Delivery Installation
Noted Items

Visual Inspection.
Continuity, Red to Non-Red.
Resistance, Red to Shield.
Inspected / Tested By:
Date of Test
Before Before After After
Tag # Test Insulation Shipping Delivery Installation
Noted Items

Visual Inspection.
Continuity, Red to Non-Red.
Resistance, Red to Shield.
Inspected / Tested By:
Date of Test

Multimeter ID#: Multimeter Calibration Date:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO QC CLIENT
NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 January 4, 2007 QC-196A R0 Vessel Thermocouple Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1

 QC-199A

Plant
Insert Power / Control / instrument or EHT Cable Types Here
Cable Pull Card
CWP/TOP # Pull Sheet #:

Cable Tag #: Rev #:

From Equipment:

To Equipment:
Location Drawing From / To:
Cable Schedule #: Cable To Area:
System#:

Tray Routing:

Cable Type/Code: Insulation Rating (KV):

Size (AWG or kcmil): Number of Conductors:
Number of Cables: Reel #:

Cable Length (meters) Estimated: Actual:

Comments: Field Concerns:

Cable Pulled: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):

“From” Connector: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):
“To” Connector: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):
“From” Termination: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):
“To” Termination: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):
Meggered: Date (D-M-Y) By (Print):

Revision 1 November 13, 2008 QC-199A R1 Cable Pull Card.doc

 QC-003

INSTRUMENTATION EXHIBIT INDEX

Document Title Rev Date

QC-301 Instrument Receiving Report 1 07/16/07

QC-302 Deleted
QC-302A Bolt Torque Report - Instrumentation 0 12/19/07
QC-302B Bolt Torque Report - Instrumentation 1 01/25/08
QC-303 Capillary Instrument Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-304 Control Valve Commissioning - Analog 1 12/16/05
QC-305 Conductivity Probe Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-308 Control Valve Installation 5 07/19/05
QC-309 Flow Instrument Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-310 Deleted
QC-311 Gauge Glass Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-314 Instrument Calibration 1 12/22/03
QC-314A Calibration Labels 0 03/26/09
QC-316 Gauge Certificate of Calibration 0 11/13/08
QC-318 Instrument Commissioning - Analog 1 12/22/03
QC-320 Instrument Commissioning - Digital 1 12/22/03
QC-322 Instrument Demolition 1 01/28/04
QC-324 Instrument Functional Loop Check 1 12/22/03
QC-325 Foundation Fieldbus Segment 0 02/13/08
QC-326 Smart Transmitter Configuration Check 0 04/23/04
QC-327 Instrument Installation Mechanical 3 12/16/05
QC-330 Deleted
QC-331 Auto Sampler 0 07/13/07
QC-332 Instrument Raceway - Tray 1 12/22/03
QC-334 Level Instrument Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-335 Density Transmitter & Source 0 07/13/07
QC-336 Instrument Loop Check 1 12/22/03
QC-338 Orifice and Flange Installation 1 12/22/03
QC-340 Orifice Plate Measurement 1 12/22/03
QC-341 Pressure Instrument Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-342 Pressure Safety Valve Test Record 1 12/22/03
QC-344 Switch Calibration Data Record 1 12/22/03
QC-345 Temperature Instrument Installation 1 12/16/05
QC-347 Vendor Equipment Inspection (Or Use QC-147) 1 06/07/04
QC-348 Tubing Pressure Test 1 12/22/03
QC-350 Tubing Service Test Record 3 11/21/06
QC-355 Service Test Record 1 11/21/06
QC-360 MTR Log 1 12/19/06
QC-362 NDE – Weld Map 1 02/26/07
QC-370 Deleted
QC-380 Stored Energy Calculation 0 12/19/07
QC-390 Instrument Enclosure Assembly 1 01/26/09
QC-670 Deleted. See Pressure Piping Manual

Revision 6 June 16, 2009 QC-003 R6 Instrumentation Index.doc Page 1 of 1

6/17/2009 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Instrument Receiving Report QC-301
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Tag Number: Date:

Req or P.O. Number: Report No.:
Description:
Visual Examination (Before Off-Loading) Visual Examination (After Off-Loading)

Approvals: CSA [ ] Other [ ] (Describe)

DATA
Tag No.: Line#:
Datasheet: Rev.: P&ID:
Location: Detail #:
Area: Loop No.:
Area Classification: Manuf:
Service Descr: Serial #:
Ref / Locn Dwg:
Nameplate data agrees with datasheet: [ ] Yes [ ] No If NO, Quarantine instrument & issue RFI / NCR
Equipment Storage Requirements: Equipment Preservation Requirements:

Packing List [ ] Cal Cert [ ] Cal Report [ ] Cert / Letter of Compliance [ ]

Attachments: O&M Manuals [ ] Data Sheet [ ] Manuf Data [ ] Preservation Instructions [ ]
Storage Instructions[ ] MTR [ ]
COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING FOR INSTRUMENTS:
Data Sheet: Cal Cert Supplied: [ ] Yes [ ] No Cal Sticker: [ ] Yes [ ] No

Checked against Data Sheet: [ ] Yes [ ] No Eng Units: Range:

COMPLETE THE FOLLOWING FOR VALVES:
CRN #: MTR #: Certificate of Compliance:
Describe Overages Describe Shortages Describe Damages

Comments:

NCR Issued: Yes [ ] No [ ] NCR Number:

RECEIVED BY CHEMCO WITNESS IF REQUIRED

NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 July 16, 2007 QC-301 R1 Instrument Receiving Report Page 1 of 1
 Bolt Torque - Instrumentation QC-302A
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Designation: Line #:

Vessel: P&ID:
Location:
Service Description:

Actual Flange
Bolt Size
Tag # Location (In or mm) Torque Size # Torqued By Date
(ft/lbs)

Torque Wrench ID#: Torque wrench calibration date:

COMMENTS:

CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 December 19, 2007 QC-302A R0 Bolt Torque Report-Instrumentation Page 1 of 1
 Bolt Torque / Tensioning Record QC-302B
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Number: ISO Dwg #:

Test Pak No.: Spool / Nozzle No.:
Flange Size: No. Studs Joint No.:
Gasket Type: Stud / Bolt Size
Tensioning Required: [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] N/A

Fit Up Inspection Inspection Result Initial Date

Correct Studs / Bolts / Nuts per BOM
Correct Gasket per BOM
Flange surface inspected and clean
Flange / Bolt holes aligned
Studs cleaned, Lubricated, & nuts free running
Joint Bolting Sequence marked on flange (paint marker)
Joint Tighten Complete (Sequence Followed)
Tightening Method: [ ] Manual Torque [ ] Hydraulic Torque [ ] Hydraulic Tension
Tool ID: Tool Calibration Date Final Torque Value
Torque Procedure [ ] As per Client Spec. [ ] As per Chemco Torque Procedure QP-302B
st nd
Torque level 1 Level(33%) 2 Level(66%) 3rd Level(100%) Final Level(100%)
Bolt Pattern Cross-bolt Cross-bolt Cross-bolt Rotational Order
Required Torque 50 ft lbs 100 ft lbs 150 ft lbs 150 ft lbs
Bolt # Initial each bolt as you complete each Level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Torqued By:
COMMENTS:

WITNESSED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 January 25, 2008 QC-302B R1 Bolt Torque Record.doc Page 1 of 1

 Capillary Instrument Installation QC-303
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable To Capillary Devices
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Capillarys continuously supported
2.2 Calibration / Sticker 2.16 Excess capillary coiled at transmitter end
2.3 All materials correct 2.17 Capillary drum installed
2.4 Check for damage 2.18 Capillary winterization details
2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation 2.19 Piping gaskets installed
2.6 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.20 Check bolt material and length
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21 Anti-Seize applied
2.8 Instrument Tags installed 2.22 Bolts torqued
2.9 Raceway (Tray) installation 2.23
2.10 2.24
2.11 2.25
2.12 2.26

2.13 2.27

2.14 2.28

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-303 R1 Capillary Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Control Valve Commissioning -
QC-304
Analog
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Designation: Line #:

Location: P&ID
Service Description:
Test Equipment Log #:
PRESSURIZATION
Results Results
1 Installation Complete 5 Valve stroked properly

2 Instrument air valve on 6 Air loss fail position

3 Regulator adjustment 7 Equalization valves

Commissioned DOT
4 Blow down air line 8
installed
FUNCTION CHECKS (ANALOG INPUTS / OUTPUTS)
Input / Output Displayed Value
Actual Value Comments Results
% mA Instrument Graphic
0%
25%
50%
75%
100%
FUNCTION CHECKS (Alarm / Status)
PLC /
Alarm / Actual
Alarm / Status mA DCS Current Alarm Display Description
Trip Value
Graphic
Low / Low
Low
High
High / High
High / High / High
Open / Close

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-304 R1 Control Valve Commissioning Analog Page 1 of 1
 Conductivity Probe Installation QC-305
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to Conductivity Flow Devices
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Anti-Sieze applied to male pipe threads
2.2 Flow direction 2.16 Threaded connections are tight
2.3 Calibration / Sticker 2.17 Flow cell and housing are not cracked
2.4 All materials correct 2.18
2.5 Check for damage 2.19
2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.20
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.22
2.9 Instrument Tags installed 2.23
2.10 Installed on pressure side of pump 2.24
2.11 Flow exit is in “UP” direction 2.25
2.12 Flow chamber is always full of liquid 2.26
2.13 Ball valves installed 2.27
Teflon tape applied to sensor cell
2.14
threads (providing temperature will not melt 2.28
tape). Tighten cell only enough to
prevent leakage.
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-305 R1 Conductivity Probe Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Control Valve Installation QC-308
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 Model: Size: 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTION
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Flow direction 2.12 Pressure gauges
2.2 Check against datasheet 2.13 Air filter
2.3 Installation per details 2.14 Tag installed
2.4 Flange bolts torqued 2.15 Valve/Actuator Connected
2.5 Valve / handwheel accessibility 2.16 Tubing complete
2.6 Fail action 2.17 Air piping complete
2.7 Regulator pressure set 2.18 Actuator clearance
2.8 Canadian Registration Number 2.19 Valve stroke
2.9 (C ) glands tight
Packing Pneumatic test for Air supplies See Ref Doc. In
2.20
2.10 Mounting / Support / Orientation Comments Section QC-624 & file No.

2.11 Check for Damage 2.21

3.0 ACCESSORIES
# Item Results # Item Results
3.1 Transducer 3.6 Limit switch
3.2 Positioner 3.7 Volume bottle
3.3 Solenoid 3.8 Air regulator
3.4 Solenoid cover tight 3.9 Booster / trip relays
3.5 3.10

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS: Test results file #:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 5 July 19, 2005 QC-308 R5 Control Valve Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Flow Instrument Installation QC-309
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to Flow Devices
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Mag Flow Meters: grounding per Vendor
2.2 Check installation for flow direction 2.16 Coriolis Meters: full of liquid in operation
Rotameters: Plumb, float & follower
2.3 Calibration / Sticker 2.17
unobstructed over range
2.4 All materials correct 2.18
2.5 Check for damage 2.19
2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.20
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.22
2.9 Instrument Tags installed 2.23
2.10 Flanges line up 2.24
2.11 Gaskets installed 2.25
2.12 Anti-Seize applied 2.26
2.13 Bolts torqued 2.27

2.14
Device is suitable for line / vessel / 2.28
temp / press / area
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-309 R1 Flow Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Gauge Glass Installation QC-311
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to Gauge Glasses
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Flanges line up
2.2 Gauge length 2.16 Float moves freely
2.3 All materials correct 2.17 Winterization details (Heat trace / jackets)
2.4 Check for damage 2.18 Gaskets installed
2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.19 Anti-Seize applied
2.6 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.20 Check bolt material & length.
2.7 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.21 Bolts torqued
2.8 Instrument Tags installed 2.22 Temporary protection
2.9 Screwed fittings are tight 2.23
2.10 Installation is plumb 2.24
2.11 Float installed 2.25
Gauge cocks / Isolation / Vent / Drain
2.12 2.26
valves installed
2.13
Magnetic gauge glasses have no steel 2.27
attached to interfere with magnetism
2.14 2.28

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-311 R1 Gauge Glass Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Instrument Calibration QC-314
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Does Not Apply To Smart Transmitters

TAG No.: Data Sheet No.:

Location: P&ID:
Area: Loop No.:
Plant: Serial No.:
Manuf: Eng Units:
Model No.: Range:

INSPECTION

# Item Result # Item Result

Instrument checked against
1 5 CSA Approval
Data Sheet
Instrument checked for
2 6
damage
Instrument Tag Number is
3 7
attached
Calibration Tag or Sticker is
4 8
attached

CALIBRATION:

PERCENT OF TEST INPUT OUTPUT TEST EQUIP LOG #

0 %
25 %
50 %
75 %
100 %

COMMENTS:

ATTACHMENTS: Data Sheet [ ] Config Record [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other ______________

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-314 R1 Instrument Calibration Page 1 of 1
 CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________

CHEMCO CHEMCO CHEMCO

Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________ Cal Date:__________ Range:___________

Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________ Cal By: ___________ S/N: _____________
 Gauge Certificate Of Calibration QC-316

Date:

CERTIFICATE OF CALIBRATION

Customer: Service:
Tag Number: Range Max:
Serial Number: Units:
Manufacturer: F.S. Tolerance:
Tolerance PSI:

As Found Results

Reference Gauge Difference % of F.S. Tolerance Condition

Reading Indication PSI Deviation PSI Pass/Fail

As Left Results

Reference Gauge Difference % of F.S. Tolerance Condition

Reading Indication PSI Deviation PSI Pass/Fail

The above gauge was calibrated to a Fluke Model 700P29, Serial Number 96052912. This unit was
calibrated against a Mensor Model 15000, Serial Number 241195, which is traceable to NIST and
complies with the requirements of ANSI / NCSL Z540-1-1994.

CALIBRATED BY

SIGNATURE:

Revision 0 November 13, 2008 QC-316 R0 Gauge Certificate of Calibration.doc Page 1 of 1

 Instrument Commissioning -
QC-318
Analog
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Designation: Line #:

Location: P&ID
Service Description:
ENERGIZATION / PRESSURIZATION
Electrical Results Mechanical Results
1 Loop / continuity verified 1 Process connection complete
2 Fuse size (if used) 2 Manifold gasket type
3 Knife switch closed 3 Configuration Sheet complete
4 Voltage reading 4 Datasheet checked
5 Location per P&ID 5 Unit of display etc. psi, %
6 Display mounted horizontal 6 Medium applied – etc. pressure
7 Commissioning DOT installed 7 All plugs & caps replaced
FUNCTION CHECKS (ANALOG INPUTS / OUTPUTS)
Input / Output Displayed Value
Actual Value Comments Results
% mA Instrument Graphic
0%

25%

50%

75%

100%
FUNCTION CHECKS (Alarm / Status)
Alarm / Actual PLC / DCS
Alarm / Status mA Current Alarm Display Description
Trip Value Graphic
Low / Low

Low

High

High / High

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-318 R1 Instrument Commissioning Analog Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Commissioning -
QC-320
Digital
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Designation: Line #:

Location: P&ID
Service Description:
Test Equipment Log #:
ENERGIZATION / PRESSURIZATION
Electrical Results Mechanical Results
1 Loop / continuity verified 1 Process connection complete
2 Fuse size (if used) 2 Manifold gasket type
3 Knife switch closed 3 Setpoint adjustment @
4 Voltage reading 4 Differential reset @
5 Location per P&ID 5 Datasheet checked
6 Commissioning DOT installed 6 Medium applied – etc. pressure
7 7 All plugs & caps replaced
8 8 Installed per Details
FUNCTION CHECKS (DIGITAL INPUTS / OUTPUTS)
Device Contact Input PLC / DCS
Comments Results
Position Number Graphic
N/O
N/C
N/O
N/C
FUNCTION CHECKS (Alarm / Status)
PLC /
Alarm / Actual
Alarm / Status mA DCS Current Alarm Display Description
Trip Value
Graphic
Low / Low

Low

High

High / High

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-320 R1 Instrument Commissioning Digital Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Demolition QC-322
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

1.0 DATA
Tag Designation: Line #:
Vessel: P&ID:
Location: Loop:
Service Description:
2.0 PERMIT
Permit Required [ ] Y [ ] N Permit Obtained:
3.0 INSPECTIONS
Tubing Results Piping Results Wiring Results
Disconnect Disconnect Source Deenergized / Locked
Removed Removed Confirm loss of voltage
Plugged / capped Plugged / capped Mark & Disconnect
Root Valve Closed Valve Closed Plugged / capped

Equipment Results Supports Results DCS / SIS / PLC Results

Removed Stands Removed Confirm signal is lost

Tagged Supports / Brackets

Removed
Relocated

Equipment Returned To:

All Prints As-Built [ ]Y [ ]N Housekeeping Complete: [ ]Y [ ]N
4.0 COMMENTS:

NOTE: Electrical Demolition As Per Electrical Demolition Form

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 January 28, 2004 QC-322 R1 Instrument Demolition.doc Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Functional Loop Check QC-324
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Loop No.: P&ID:

Location: Plant:
Area: Test Equipment Log #:

% INPUT / % OUTPUT ALARM TRIP

Digital Digital
TAG Low / High /
COMMENTS
Input Output Low / High /
0% 25% 50% 75% 100% Low / Low High / High
Low High
Low High

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-324 R1 Instrument Functional Loop Check Page 1 of 1
 Foundation Fieldbus Segment QC-325
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
.1 Segment No.: .4 Ref Dwg:
.2 Controller No.: .5 No. of Devices:
.3 Port No.: .6 Service:

2.0 INSPECTIONS (Network Power Off. Devices Disconnected)

Item Result Item Result
Disconnect end devices and segment
.1 .4 Tug test all co connections
connection
Verify correct wiring labeling and color Verify cable routing, separation and
.2 .5
coding type
Terminating resistors in place at ends
.3 Verify correct system termination .6
of trunk

3.0 RESISTANCE TESTS Expected Result 4.0 CAPACITANCE TESTS Expected Result
.1 Terminating resistor 100 Ω / 1 µF Ω .1 + conductor to - conductor 0.80-1.2 µF µF
.2 + conductor to - conductor > 50 k Ω k Ω .2 + conductor to shield < 300 nF nF
.3 + conductor to shield > 20 M Ω M Ω .3 - conductor to shield < 300 nF nF
+ conductor – instrument ground
.4 - conductor to shield > 20 M Ω M Ω .4 < 300 nF nF
bar
- conductor - instrument ground
.5 + conductor to instrument gnd bar > 20 M Ω M Ω .5 < 300 nF nF
bar
.6 - conductor to instrument gnd bar > 20 M Ω M Ω .6
.7 Shield to instrument ground bar > 20 M Ω M Ω .7

5.0 VOLTAGE TESTS Expected Result 6.0 OTHER TESTS Expected Result
Record required and set macro
.1 + Cond to – cond at power supply 25-28 VDC VDC .1 Set>Req’d mS
cycle
+ Cond to – cond after power 18.6-19.4 Disable internal network
.2 VDC .2 [ ] Yes [ ] No
conditioner VDC diagnostic alarms
Measure & record signal & waveform Test Power Conditioner failure
.3 500-900 mV mV .3 [ ] Pass [ ] Fail/ [ ] N/A
after power conditioner (e.g. Fluke 196) alarms
Verify Link active scheduler status & Verify all Power Conditioner
.4 350-700 mV mV .4 [ ] Yes [ ] No
record signal level alarms are clear
Record segment avg. noise level Disable all diagnostic alarms for
.5 25-50 mV mV .5 [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] N/A
(System Side) the network on the DCS
Place pre-commissioned tag on
Record signal level at field junction
.6 350-700 mV mV .6 DCS Fieldbus H1 module [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] N/A
box
(If no punch items)
Voltage between + & - at field
.7 25-29 VDC VDC .7
junction box
Record segment avg. noise level at
.8 25-50 mV mV .8
field junction box

Test Equipment ID Manufacturer Model Calibration Date

COMMENTS:

TESTED / INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 February 13, 2008 QC-325 R0 Foundation Fieldbus Segment.doc Page 1 of 1

 Smart Transmitter Configuration
QC-326
Check
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:

1.7 Model # 1.14 Ref Dwg:

2.0 CONFIGURATION
TRANSMITTER As Found As Left
2.1 Type
2.2 Transmitter Address (Default =0)
2.3 Descriptor
2.4 Output Form (Lin, Sq Rt)
2.5 Damping Time (0-25.6 sec) (Default =0.4)
2.6 Span
2.7 PV Units
2.8 URL (Input)
2.9 URV (Output)
2.10 LRL (Input)

2.11 LRV (Output)

2.12 Transmitter Ambient Temperature
2.13 Zero Trim

2.14 LCD Meter Units

2.15 LCD Meter Span
TEST EQUIPMENT ID:
3.0 JUMPER SETTINGS
Security Write Protection [ ] ON [ ] OFF
Voltage Output [ ] 0.8 – 3.2 VDC [ ] 1 – 5 VDC
Transmitter Fail [ ] High [ ] Low

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 April 23, 2004 QC-326 R0 Smart Transmitter Config Check Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Installation-
QC-327
Mechanical
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

For Use With Instruments Having Impulse Lines. Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.7 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.8 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.9 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.10 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.11 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.12 Serial #:
1.13 Ref / Locn Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Tube welds logged / inspected
2.2 Manufacturer Calibration / Sticker 2.16 Tubing bundle heat trace installation
2.3 Check for damage 2.17 Tube bundle boots installation
2.4 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation 2.18 Heat trace left exposed (3 ft)
2.5 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.19 Holes plugged
Anti-Sieze applied to pipe threads (Check
2.6 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.20
Specs)
2.7 Lines installation / support / slope 2.21 Tube bundle boot shrink
Ensure tracer is not “nicked” prior to
2.8 Tubing fittings 2.22
boot installation
2.9 Inline equipment installed / supported 2.23
2.10 Spare entries plugged 2.24
2.11 Instrument Tags installed 2.25
2.12 Stand Grouted 2.26
Instrument enclosure installation /
2.13 2.27
clean
2.14 Check tube reaming 2.28
3.0 PRESSURE TESTS (Test equipment must be: within the calibration date, and have the correct range)
Blown
Test Tested At Hold Leak Test Equip Temp
Line Type Clear / Test Medium Tested By Date
# (PSI) Time Rate Log # °C
Drained
Process/Impulse
Pneumatic
Air Supply
Air Sub Header /
Branch
Hydraulic
Main Header Valve #: All connections “snooped” for leaks: [
]
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 3 December 16, 2005 QC-327 R3 Instrument Installation - Mechanical.doc Page 1 of 1

 Auto-Sampler Installation QC-331
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15

2.2 All materials correct 2.16

2.3 Check for damage 2.17

2.4 Mounting 2.18

2.5 Orientation 2.19

2.6 Elevation 2.20

2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21

2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.22

2.9 Tags installed 2.23

2.10 Fittings are tight 2.24

2.11 2.25

2.12 2.26

2.13 2.27

2.14 2.28

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 13, 2007 QC-331 R0 Auto Sampler Page 1 of 1

 Instrument Raceway - Tray QC-332
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag Designation: Line #:

Vessel: P&ID:

Location:
Service Description:
INSPECTIONS
Expansion
Support Material Hold down Slope As Verified By
Instrument Raceway / Tray Plates
As Per Type Clamps As Per Detail /
Designation Installed As
Detail Used Per Detail Specs Initial Date
Per Details

COMMENTS:

Raceway complete Check Box [ ] Housekeeping complete Check Box [ ]

INSPECTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-332 R1 Instrument Raceway - Tray Page 1 of 1
 Level Instrument Installation QC-334
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to Level Indicating Devices
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
Check all components (including float)
2.1 2.15 Flanges line up
against datasheet
2.2 Calibration / Sticker 2.16 Displacer / Float moves freely
2.3 All materials correct 2.17 Base spring is long enough
2.4 Check for damage 2.18 Winterization details (Heat trace / jackets)
2.5 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.19 Gaskets installed
2.6 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.20 Anti-Seize applied
2.7 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.21 Check bolt material & length.
2.8 Instrument Tags installed 2.22 Bolts torqued
Pipe lubricant matches temp/press/area
2.9 Screwed fittings are tight 2.23
class
2.10 Installation is plumb / level 2.24
2.11 2.25 Flagging system working
2.12 Isolation / Vent / Drain valves installed 2.26 Temporary protection
2.13
Device is suitable for line / vessel / 2.27
Capacitance probes are of correct length
temp / press / area and do not touch adjacent materials
2.14 Stilling well is obstruction free 2.28

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-334 R1 Level Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Density Transmitter & Source
QC-335
Installation
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Transmitter Results # Source Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Check against datasheet
2.2 Calibration 2.16 Calibration
2.3 All materials correct 2.17 All materials correct
2.4 Check for damage 2.18 Check for damage
2.5 Mounting 2.19 Mounting
2.6 Orientation 2.20 Orientation
2.7 Elevation 2.21 Elevation
2.8 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.22 Accessibility / Obstruction Free
2.9 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.23 Installed as per Details & P&ID
2.10 Instrument Tags installed 2.24 Instrument Tags installed
2.11 Piping gaskets installed 2.25 Piping gaskets installed
2.12 Anti-Seize applied (Check Specs) 2.26 Anti-Seize applied (Check Specs)
2.13 Check bolt material & length 2.27 Check bolt material & length
2.14 Bolts torqued 2.28 Bolts torqued
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 July 13, 2007 QC-335 R0 Density Transmitter & Source Page 1 of 1
 Instrument Loop Check QC-336
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Pass [ ] Deficient [ ] Retest [ ]

1.0 DATA
Loop Number: Certificate ID#:
System: Part System:
Instrument Loop Description
Instrument Loop Diagram No.
Equip. Description:
2.0 PRE-TEST REQUIREMENTS
All relevant installation checklists complete ( ) Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
Piping hydro-test reinstatement complete Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
All test equipment is calibrated and certs on file Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
3.0 LOOP COMPONENTS (Hardware) - Refer to loop response on Sheet 2
Tag No Description Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
4.0 LOOP COMPONENTS (Software) - Refer to loop response on Sheet 2
Tag No Description Location
1
2
3
4
5
6
5.0 INSPECTION
For Intrinsically Safe Circuits confirm installation is in accordance with loop diagram(s) Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
and vendor data sheet(s)
Valve orientation correct Flow elements orientation correct

Simulate loop in automatic control Direct Reverse

Check fail safe action: Signal Output Valve
Graphic Display Alarm Indication Executive Action Fault Alarm
Event Recording Alarm Recording
REMARKS:

Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-336 R3 Loop Check Page 1 of 3

Loop Number:
6.0 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
Control & Configuration correct Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
Monitoring Configuration change raised (Note No) N[ ] n/a [ ]
Systems Configuration change approved Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
Configuration correct Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
ESD
Configuration change raised (Note No) N[ ] n/a [ ]
Systems
Configuration change approved Y[ ] N[ ] n/a [ ]
7.0 LOOP RESPONSES (Hardware) - Refer to loop components on Sheet 1
Rising % Falling % Trip setting Comments
0 25 50 75 100 75 50 25 0 Rising Falling

1
2
3
4
5
6
8.0 LOOP RESPONSES (Software) - Refer to loop components on Sheet 1
Rising % Falling % Trip setting Comments
0 25 50 75 100 75 50 25 0 Rising Falling
1
2
3
4
5
6
Valve Stroke: Time to open Time to close
9.0 TEST EQUIPMENT
Test Equipment Used Serial Number Certificate Number Dated

10.0 ATTACHMENTS
As-built drawings attached [ ]

Remarks:

Name Signature Date

Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-336 R3 Loop Check Page 2 of 3

Loop Number:
11.0 LOOP DEFICIENCIES:
Completed by /
# Deficiency Action By
Date
1

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

12.0 REMARKS / ADDITONAL INFORMATION:

Name Signature Date

Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-336 R3 Loop Check Page 3 of 3

 Orifice and Flange Installation QC-338
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Tag Designation: Line #:

Vessel: P&ID:

Location:
Service Description:

Fluid Data Results Meter Results

Type Type
State Diff. Range ( “W.C.)
Specific Gravity Manufacturer

ORIFICE PLATE AND FLANGE

Type
Beta d/D
Orifice Bore Dia (inch)
Pipe Schedule
Flange Rating
Vent or Drain Hole
Plate Thickness (inch)
Plate Material
Tagged

ORIFICE INSTALLATION
Installed in correct direction
Installed per detail
Tap orientation correct Liquid Gas
COMMENTS:

ALL Prints As-Built Check Box [ ]

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 January 28, 2004 QC-338 R1 Orifice and Flange Installation Page 1 of 1
 Orifice Plate Measurement QC-340
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Dwg #: Line#:
Location: P&ID:
Area: Detail #:
Plant: Loop No.:

Design Measured Measurement

Orifice Plate
Bore Bore Test Equipment Log #
Tag No. Contractor Client
(IN) (IN)

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-340 R1 Orifice Plate Measurement Page 1 of 1
 Pressure Instrument Installation QC-341
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to Pressure Gauges, Pressure Switches, and Flange Mounted Devices
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Piping gaskets installed
2.2 Check gauge / switch range 2.16 Anti-Seize applied (Check Specs)
2.3 Calibration / Sticker 2.17 Check bolt material & length
2.4 All materials correct 2.18 Bolts torqued
2.5 Check for damage 2.19
2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.20
Pipe lubricant matches temp/press/area
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21
class
2.8 Installed as per Details & P&ID 2.22 Liquid filled devices filled & no leaks
2.9 Instrument Tags installed 2.23
2.10 Screwed fittings are tight 2.24
2.11 Gauge valves properly installed 2.25
2.12 Snubbers installed per details 2.26

2.13
Diaphragm seal & flushing port 2.27
Device is suitable for line / vessel / temp
installed per details / press / area
2.14
Pressure switches have block & vent 2.28
connection for calibration
ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]
COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-341 R1 Pressure Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Pressure Safety Valve Test
QC-342
Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

TAG NO.:
SPECIFICATION SHEET NO.:
DATA SHEET NO.:
PURCHASE ORDER NO.: P.O. ITEM NO.:
MANUFACTURER:
MODEL:
SERIAL NO.:
LEAK TEST: [ ] Yes [ ] No
BLOWDOWN: [ ] Yes [ ] No
PRESSURE SETTING PER DATA SHEET: PSI

TEST EQUIPMENT LOG#:

The above referenced Pressure Safety Valve has been calibrated to the

specified value:_____________ and is acceptable.

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-342 R1 Pressure Safety Valve Test Record Page 1 of 1
 Switch Calibration Data Record QC-344
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

TAG NO.:
SPECIFICATION SHEET NO.:
DATA SHEET NO.:
PURCHASE ORDER NO.: P.O. ITEM NO.:
MANUFACTURER:
MODEL NO.:
SERIAL NO.:
TEST EQUIPMENT LOG #:

FUNCTION SPECIFIED ACTUAL Remarks

Set #1
1
Reset #1

Set #2
2
Reset #2

Set #3
3
Reset #3

Set#4
4
Reset #4

COMMENTS:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-344 R1 Switch Calibration Data Record Page 1 of 1
 Temperature Instrument
QC-345
Installation
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Applicable to TWs / TEs / Temperature Gauges
1.0 DATA
1.1 Tag No.: 1.8 Line#:
1.2 Datasheet: Rev.: 1.9 P&ID:
1.3 Location: 1.10 Detail #:
1.4 Area: 1.11 Loop No.:
1.5 Classification: 1.12 Manuf:
1.6 Service Descr: 1.13 Serial #:
1.7 Screwed [ ] Flanged [ ] 1.14 Ref Dwg:
2.0 INSPECTIONS
# Item Results # Item Results
2.1 Check against datasheet 2.15 Anti-Seize applied (Check Specs)
2.2 Check gauge range 2.16
2.3 Calibration / Sticker 2.17
2.4 All materials correct 2.18
2.5 Check for damage 2.19
2.6 Mounting / Orientation / Elevation` 2.20
2.7 Accessibility / Obstruction Free 2.21
2.8 Installed as per Detail & P&ID 2.22
2.9 2.23
2.10 Instrument Tags installed 2.24
2.11 Screwed fittings are tight 2.25
2.12 Gasket complete 2.26
2.13 Flange mounted device is torqued 2.27
2.14 Plugged / capped 2.28

ATTACHMENTS Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Other: [ ]

COMMENTS:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 December 16, 2005 QC-345 R1 Temperature Instrument Installation.doc Page 1 of 1

 Vendor Equipment Inspection QC-347
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
1.0 DATA
1.1 Equip / Skid Tag No.: 1.5 P&ID:
1.2 Location: 1.6 Manuf:
1.3 Area: 1.7 Serial #:
1.4 Classification: 1.8 Ref / Locn Dwg:
2. ELECTRICAL INSPECTION
Checks Elect / Inst Tag No’s.? ?
2.1 Equipment tags are installed.
2.2 Cable is tagged at equipment JB and at Local Panel
2.3 Electrical equipment is CSA approved, or accepted equivalent.
2.4 Electrical equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
2.5 Electrical conduit / connector seals are marked.
2.6 All damaged or missing components are identified on Punchlist.
2.7 Accessible electrical terminations are landed and identified.
Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
2.8
been issued to Chemco by Client.
2.9 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
Vendor cables are supported and secured in tray, wire basket or
2.10
other raceway.
2.11 Unused entries are plugged.
2.12 Grounding / Bonding
2.13
2.14 COMMENTS:

3. INSTRUMENTATION INSPECTION
Checks Elect / Inst Tag No’s.? ?
3.1 Equipment tags are installed.
3.2 Instrument equipment is CSA approved, or accepted equivalent.
3.3 Instrument equipment hazardous area classification is correct.
3.4 All damaged or missing components are identified on Punchlist.
Equipment vendor’s drawings, data package and datasheets have
3.5
been issued to Chemco by Client.
3.6 Calibration units, range and span agree with datasheet.
When required by the project, calibrated instruments shall bear a
3.7
calibration sticker, placed on the instrument by the vendor.
3.8 Equipment mounting / support / orientation.
3.9 Unused entries are plugged.
Process lines and tubing: support, installation, connections and
3.10
elevation.
3.11 Tube bundle is supported and boot sealed at both ends.
3.12 Impulse lines size and connected to process.
3.13
3.14 COMMENTS:

4. ATTACHMENTS
Data Sheet [ ] Calibration Cert [ ] Punchlist [ ] Vendor Manual [ ] Other: [ ]
5. PRESERVATION REQUIRED:

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 0 May 31, 2004 QC-347 R0 Vendor Equipment Inspection.doc Page 1 of 1
 Tubing Pressure Test QC-348
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Tag No.: Line#:

Vessel: P&ID:

Location: Detail #:

Service Description: Dwg #:

TUBING DATA
Service Comments Tubing Characteristics Comments
1 Process Nominal O.D.
2 Signal Wall thickness
3 Air Supply Material

PRE-TRACED BUNDLE Results Comments

Manufacturer
Type
Watts per foot
Length
Installed per details

PRESSURE TEST Results Comments

Test Medium
Tubing tested @ ______PSI PSI
All plugs and caps are on
Housekeeping complete
Test Gauge Serial Numbers

INSPECTIONS Process / Supply End Instrument End

Connectors tight
Connection complete

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-348 R1 Tubing Pressure Test Page 1 of 1
 Tubing Service Test Record QC-350
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref.:

Test Equipment ID:

Tube Description Materials & Result

Installation Test System
Tag # Correct
Comments
Material O.D. Wall Medium Pressure (Pass/Fail)
(Pass/Fail)

TESTED BY: CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 3 November 21, 2006 QC-350 R3 Tubing Service Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 ServiceTest Record QC-355
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Test Pak No.: Date:

Line #:

ISO #:

Line / Drawing No (s): P&ID:

LDT:

Serial No. Test Equipment ID #

Gauge #1:
Gauge #2:

Test Medium: Final Pressure:

Gauge #: Gauge #:
Pressure Pressure Clock time for
Recorded In: Clock time for Recorded In:
Holding Leak Test each Holding Leak Test
each pressure
[ ] psi Time [ ] psi pressure Time
increment
(min.) PASS or FAIL increment (min.) PASS or FAIL
[ ] kPa reached [ ] kPa reached

COMMENTS;

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME NAME NAME NAME

SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE SIGNATURE

DATE DATE DATE DATE

Revision 0 November 21, 2006 QC-355 R0 Service Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1

 NDE / Weld Map QC-362
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT
REF:
0 % MT 0 % VT 0 % RT
Module /
Weld # Date of Weld MT Report VT Report # VT Date
Plant / Tag Chemco ISO# ISO Rev Welder ID Pipe Size Pipe Sched. Mat. Type Weld Type Line Class MT# MT Date RT# RT Report# RT Date Test Pak#
(W or FW) Weld Process # (All Welds) (All Welds)
No.

Rev 1 February 26, 2007 QC-362 R1 NDE-Weld Map.xls Page 1 of 1

 Stored Energy Calculation QC-380
Only Make Entries in Green Cells Stored Energy Calculation
Plant: E=[((P1+P2)*V)/(k-1)]*[1-(P2/(P1+P2))((k-1)/k)]
Test Pack # P1 = Test Pressure in Lbs per Ft 2; P2 = Atmos Pressure in Lbs per Ft 2
Piping System: OR
2
Test Pressure (P1): Lbs / Ft : 0 E=360 [(P1+P2)*V]*[1-(P2/(P1+P2))0.286], where k=1.4 as in the above equation.
2 ;
Atmos Pressure (P2): 14.2 Lbs / Ft : 2044.8 P1 = Test Pressure in psig P2 = Atmos Pressure in psia
k: 1.4 1 Lb TNT= 1542772 Ft*Lbs

(V) Volume Stored Energy Stored Energy Stored Energy Explosive Min Safe
Pipe Size / Schd ID (in) Length (ft) Length (m) 3 -6 3 -4 Min Safe Distance (ft)
(ft ) FT LBS FT LBS X 10 (psi x ft ) x 10 Equiv.(lb TNT) Distance (m)
1/2" 80 0.546 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
3/4" 80 0.742 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1" 80 0.957 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
1 1/2" 80 1.5 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
2" 80 1.939 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
3" 80 2.9 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
4" STD 4.026 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000
Totals 0 0 0.0000 0.00 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000 0.0000

Note: Maximum Stored Energy To Be Less Than 2.006E+7 FT LBS (=13 Lbs TNT)
Pneumatic Testing Conversion to Explosives: 1 Lb TNT = 1542722 FT LBS
Minimum safe distance from explosion (using scaled distance method)= 50 Ft * Sqrt(Lb TNT)
1.2
Stored Energy (ft*lbs)x10-6

1.0

0.8

0.6

0.4

0.2

0.0
0 25
Test Pressure (psig)

Revision 1 December 19, 2007 QC-380 R0 Stored Energy Calculation Page 1 of 1

 Instrument Enclosure Assembly
QC-390
Inspection & Test Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:
For Results Mark: “Pass”. “Fail”, “N/A” where Not Applicable, or read test result. Checks may be used in [ ]
1.0 DATA Instrument Heater Disconnect Switch
Tag No.:
Manuf:
Model#:
Serial #:
Datasheet: Rev: Rev: Rev:
Area Class:
CSA [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] Yes [ ] No [ ] Yes [ ] No
Ref Dwgs:
Encl Area Class: INTERIOR: EXTERIOR:
1.0 WIRING Instrument Heater Disconnect Sw JB
Wiring Continuity To: Ω
Wiring Insulation Resistance To: MΩ MΩ
Test Equip ID:
:
Tested By:
Name Signature Test Date
2.0 INSPECTIONS Instrument Heater Disconnect Sw JB
Check materials against BOM
Check for damage
Tag Installed
Terminations / Polarity
Shield Isolated at field end
Terminals Labeled
Wire Tags / Shrinks
Grounded / Bonded
Elect fittings not over-tightened/split
Conduit seals installed
4.0 ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY Result Result
Door opening / closing clearance Tube bundle boots supplied
Accessibility for parts removal Thread lubricant applied
Temp indicator installation Manifold & Tubing Hi / Lo marked
Tube fittings made up correctly (gauge check) Pressure components per BOM/Detail
Check tube reaming Heater jam nuts installed
Torqued futbol connections @ 650 InLbs Installation / support
Enclosure clean Assembly labeled CSA / ETL or Other
Spare entries plugged Enclosure Nameplate / Tag / Warning
Blowdown Valves are [ ] NACE compliant with [ ] Grafoil packing or [ ] PTFE packing [ ] N/A
5.0 PRESSURE TEST
Pressure Test Complete [ ] Y [ . ] N/A Document on Pressure Test Record QC-624 Blown Down [ ]
6.0 ON FILE: Datasheet [ ] Cal Cert [ ] MTRs [ ] CRN [ ] ISO [ ] Weld Map [ ]
7.0 NDE COMPLETED: VT: [ ] RT: [ ] MT: [ ] PMI: [ ] [...] N/A
8.0 COMMENTS: Electrical fittings are steel or alum:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 January 26, 2009 QC-390 R1 Instrument Enclosure Assembly.doc Page 1 of 1

 QC-004

COMMUNICATIONS EXHIBIT INDEX

Rev Date

COMMUNICATIONS

QC-004 Communications Exhibit Index 3 01/03/08

QC-402 Deleted
QC-404 Fibre Optic Post Placement Test 1 12/22/03
QC-406 Fibre Final Test 1 12/22/03
QC-408 Fibre Reel Test Record 2 07/20/05
QC-410 Fibre Optic Patch Cord Test Record 4 10/12/06
QC-412 Fibre Optic Cover Page 0 06/08/05
QC-414 Fibre Optic Post Placement Walkdown 0 06/08/05
QC-416 Communications Cable 0 06/08/05
QC-420 Cable Installation Data & Voice 2 06/08/05
QC-422 BIX Panelboard 1 12/22/03
QC-424 Data & Voice Outlets 2 06/08/05
QC-426 CTEL Cable Post Placement Walkdown 0 06/08/05
QC-428 Communications Equipment Inspection 1 02/08/07
QC-430 Speaker's 1 12/22/03
QC-440 Telephone 1 12/22/03
QC-442 Security Systems 0 05/30/05
QC-444 CCTV Systems 0 05/30/05

Revision 3 January 3, 2008 QC-004 R3 Communications Exhibit Index Page 1 of 1

1/3/2008 THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Fibre Optic Post Placement Test QC-404
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Designation:
To: From:
Atten. Loss Return Loss Fiber Tested By
Fibre
MM 850nm( dbm) MM 1300nm( dbm) MM 850nm( dbm) MM 1300nm( dbm) Length Comments
Number
SM 1310nm( dbm) SM 1550nm ( dbm) SM 1310nm( dbm) SM 1550nm ( dbm) (meters) Initial Date

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-404 R1 Fibre Post Placement Test.doc Page 1 of 1
 Fibre Final Test QC-406
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Cable Designation:
To: From:
Atten. Loss Return Loss Fiber Tested By
Fibre # of # of
MM 850nm( dbm) MM 1300nm( dbm) MM 850nm( dbm) MM 1300nm( dbm) Length
Number Splices Connect. Initial Date
SM 1310nm( dbm) SM 1550nm ( dbm) SM 1310nm( dbm) SM 1550nm ( dbm) (meters)

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-406 R1 Fibre Final Test.doc Page 1 of 1
 Fibre Reel Test Record QC-408
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Reel # :
CABLE DATA
Cable Manuf. Draka Comteq [ ] Corning [ ] Other [ ]
Cable Type
Service Type
Strand Count
Fiber Tested Atten. Loss Return Loss Tested By
Fiber Length
MM 850nm(dbm) MM 1300nm(dbm) MM 850nm(dbm) MM 1300nm(dbm) (FEET)
Tube # Strand # SM 1310nm(dbm) SM 1550nm (dbm) SM 1310nm(dbm) SM 1550nm (dbm)
Initial Date

INSPECTIONS
Results Comments
Reel Integrity
Cable Ends Re-Sealed
Cable Ends Secured
Reel Identified
Comments:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 July 20, 2005 QC-408 R2 Fibre Reel Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Fibre Optic Patch Cord Test Record QC-410
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Reference Drawings: RING: BLDG:
Mode A > B B > A REFLECT * Status
Tested By
Rev. Cable Designation CABINET CABINET Strand SM 1310 1550 1310 1550
AB BA Pass Fail
MM 850 1300 850 1300 Print Name Date

A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
* PLEASE RECORD THE WORST CASE FOR REFLECTANCE VALUES.

TESTED BY: CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:
PRINT
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 3 July 20, 2005 QC-410 R3 Fibre Optic Patch Cord Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Fibre Optic Patch Cord Test Record QC-410
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Reference Drawings: RING: BLDG:
Mode A > B B > A REFLECT * Status
Tested By
Rev. Cable Designation CABINET CABINET Strand SM 1310 1550 1310 1550
AB BA Pass Fail
MM 850 1300 850 1300 Signature Date

A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
A
B
* PLEASE RECORD THE WORST CASE FOR REFLECTANCE VALUES.

CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 4 October 12, 2006 QC-410 R4 Fibre Optic Patch Cord Test Record.doc Page 1 of 1
 Fibre Optic Cover Page QC-412
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE DATA:
Cable Designation:
From: To:
Reference Drawing:
Cable Manufacturer: Draka Comteq [ ] Corning [ ] Other [ ]
Cable Type:
Service Type:
Strand Count:
Virtual Count:

TEST DATA
Total Length: Source: Detector:
Type: LED: LZ: Wavelength: MM: SM:
Fibre Specification:
Comments:

Test Equipment Log #

All Test Results Attached:

INSPECTIONS:
Source End Field End Source End Field End

Cable Clamps Correct Cable Secured

Terminations Complete Bending Radius Verified
Cable Identified Termination Identified

INSPECTED BY:
Print

DATE:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 June 8, 2005 QC-412 R0 Fibre Optic Cover Page.doc Page 1 of 1

 Fibre Optic Cable Post
QC-414
Placement Walkdown
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE DATA:
Cable Designation:
From: To:
Reference Drawing:

INSPECTIONS:
Results Comments
Cable type and size verified against cable schedule.
Cable is placed in the specified tray (as per Cable Schedule)
Cable is ty-wrapped and secured (as per specs and details)

Tray covers installed as per specs and details

Cable protection against any type of physical damage
Cable jacket shows no signs of kinks throughout the cable run
Cable is terminated at the source end
Cable is terminated at the field end
Temporary cable tags on each end of cable
Maintained proper bending radius throughout entire length
(minimum bending radius is 10 x diameter)
Coils in pull boxes meet specs.
The temperature on the dates of the cable pull are recorded
and attached
Correct amount of tail left at both ends

Copy of the Cable pull sheet attached

NOTES:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 June 8, 2005 QC-414 R0 Fibre Optic Cable Post Page 1 of 1

Placement Walkdo n doc
 Communications Cable QC-416
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE DATA:
Cable Designation:
From: To:
Reference Drawing:
Cable Type:
Cable Size:
Voltage
Insulation Type:
Length: Feet Meters

CONTINUITY TEST (OHMS)

OPEN CLOSED COMMENTS

Conductor to Conductor
Conductor to Ground
Conductor to Shield
Shield to Ground

TESTED BY:
Print

DATE:

TEST EQUIPMENT LOG #:

INSPECTIONS:
Source End Field End Source End Field End
Cable Clamps Correct Cable Secured
Terminations Complete Bending Radius Verified
Cable Identified Termination Identified

INSPECTED BY:
Print

DATE:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 June 8, 2005 QC-416 R0 Communications Cable.doc Page 1 of 1

 Cable Installation Data and Voice QC-420
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref.:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Cabinet Number: Reference Drawing :

Test Forms Cable Verification Cable Tags

Inspected By
(Fluke) Color Continuity Installed
Cable Cable Number
Bldg From To Type of Pairs
AWG Length
Designation Not
Blue/
Attached
Attached
Yello Results From To Initial Date
w

Comments CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 June 8, 2005 QC-420 R2 Cable Installation Data & Voice.doc Page 1 of 1
 BIX Panelboard QC-422
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

BIX Designation:
Location:
REFERENCE DRAWING:
INSPECTIONS Results Comments
Plywood - Size & Type as per Print/Details
Plywood - Located as per Print/Details
Plywood - Mounted as per Details/Clearances
Plywood - Painted as per Specs
BIX - 10A Block Installed as per Drawing
BIX - 10A Designated Tags Applied
BIX - 1A/1A4 Block Installed as per Drawing
BIX - 1A/1A4 Designated Tags Applied
Circa 100-Pair PETS as per Drawing/Grounding
Circa - Designated Tags Applied
Bending Radius (Bundle is 10 X Diameter of Bundle)
Bending Radius (4 Pair is 4 X Dia. of Cat 5 Cable)
Bending Radius (25 Pair is 10 X Dia. of Cat 5 Cable)
Ground Buss Installed
Bonding as per Drawing
Conduit & Bushing as per Drawing
NOTES:

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-422 R1 BIX Panelboard Page 1 of 1
 Data and Voice Outlets QC-424
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

BIX Panel Designation:
Reference Drawing:
Location:
Console Inspected By
Number Port Color of
Data Outlet or Fillers Labels
of Ports Position Cover
Designation Room Installed Installed Initial Date
* Note 2 * Note 1 * Note 2
Number

Note 1: As per Specifications

Note 2: As per Specifications

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 June 8, 2005 QC-424 R2 Data & Voice Outlets.doc Page 1 of 1
 CTEL Cable Post Placement
QC-426
Walkdown
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

CABLE DATA:
Cable Designation:
From: To:
Reference Drawing:

INSPECTIONS:
Results Comments
Cable type and size verified against cable schedule.
Cable is placed in the specified tray (as per Cable Schedule)
Cable is ty-wrapped and secured (as per specs and details)

Tray covers installed as per specs and details

Cable protection against any type of physical damage
Cable jacket shows no signs of kinks throughout the cable run
Cable is terminated at the source end
Cable is terminated at the field end
Temporary cable tags on each end of cable
Maintained proper bending radius throughout entire length
(minimum bending radius is 10 x diameter)
Coils in pull boxes meet specs.
Correct amount of tail left at both ends
Copy of the Cable pull sheet attached

NOTES:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 June 8, 2005 QC-426 R0 CTEL Cable Post Placement Walkdown.doc Page 1 of 1
 Communication Equipment
QC-428
Inspection Record
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

EQUIPMENT DATA:
Equipment Designation: Model #:
Manufacturer: Serial No:
Location: CSA or other approval:
Reference Drawing: Type [ ] Pedestal [ ]Patch Panel [ ] Cabinet [ ] Splice Closure

INSPECTIONS:
Results Results Comments
Pre-cast base mounted as per
Sized as per drawings / details
details
Conduit stubs in place as per
Located as per drawings
details
Splice closure installed as per
Equip. Mounted as per details
details
Splice closure entry ports
Designation tag applied
sealed
Backfilled & graded (Outdoor
Finish / paint repaired
cabinet)
Internal equipment mounted as
Spare knock-outs filled
per details

Grounded / bonded Cleaned out

Isolated grounds installed as per

Doors / covers in place
spec / details
Back board installed c/w fire
Cabling complete
retardant paint (where required)

Cable / Wire tags installed Terminations complete

Terminal blocks identified Panduit covers installed

ATTACHMENTS:
Vendors Manual [ ] Other [ ]
NOTES:

TESTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 1 February 8, 2007 QC-428 R1 Communication Equipment Inspection Record Page 1 of 1

 Speakers QC-430
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Output Unit Designation:
Location:

Continuity Speaker Inspected By

Cable Designation Location
Checked Installed Initial Date

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-430 R1 Speakers Page 1 of 1
 Telephone QC-440
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

Main Board Designation:
Location:

Telephone Continuity Telephone Inspected By

Cable Designation Location
Number Checked Installed Initial Date

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 December 22, 2003 QC-440 R1 Telephone Page 1 of 1
 Security Systems QC-442
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

System / Designation:
Location:

Continuity Device Device Inspected By

Cable Designation Device Number Location
Checked Installed Terminated
Initial Date

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 May 30, 2005 QC-442 R0 Security Systems.doc Page ___ of ___
 CCTV Systems QC-444
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

Client Ref:

Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable

System / Designation:
Location:

Continuity Device Device Inspected By

Cable Designation Device Number Location
Checked Installed Terminated
Initial Date

INSPECTED BY CHEMCO CLIENT OTHER

NAME: NAME: NAME: NAME:

SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:

DATE: DATE: DATE: DATE:

Revision 0 May 30, 2005 QC-444 R0 CCTV Systems.doc Page ___ of ___
 QC-005

MAINTENANCE TEST SHEET INDEX

Test Sheet Rev Date

QC-005 Maintenance Test Sheet Index 0 07/21/06

QC-501 Maintenance Job Checklist 2 05/09/06
QC-548 Cable & Conductor Verification 1 05/09/06

Revision 0 July 21, 2006 QC-005 R0 Maintenance Test Sheet Index.doc Page 1 of 1
Printed on 7/21/2006
THIS DOCUMENT IS UNCONTROLLED WHEN COPIED
 Maintenance Job Check List QC-501
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
SCOPE DESCRIPTION:

Is Work Package Complete, and Stamped I.F.C.

Is a Lock-Out Lock Required
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION:
All Equipment is CSA Rated Installation Conforms to All Applicable Codes
Installation Meets Client Specs / Standards
All Equipment/Cables Properly Identified
ELECTRICAL INTEGRITY INSPECTIONS:
Source Voltage Rating Equipment Voltage Rating
Conductor Insulation Rating
Over-Current Protection Equipment Current Rating
Conductor Size
Conduit Systems Completed Cables / Conductors Supported
Connectors Tightened Terminations Tightened
Equipment Grounded Ground Resistance Test (Large Equipment)
Demolition Scope Complete Cable/Conductor Continuity/Megger Test
and in a Safe Condition (QC-548)
PRE-ENERGIZATION:
Installation Walked Down Installation Walked Down with Client
All Walk-Down Deficiencies Documented
All Covers Installed All Walk-Down Deficiencies Rectified
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS AFTER ENERGIZATION (in volts):
Phase A to Phase B Phase A to Ground
Phase B to Phase C Phase B to Ground
Phase C to Phase A Phase C to Ground
Voltage Phasing
OTHER INSPECTIONS / INFO:
Work Area Cleaned Up Drawings are Red-Lined as per Installation
Excess Material Returned All Timesheets Completed and Submitted
All Required QC Documentation Completed
(Non Critical) Deficiencies and Incomplete Work Identified on Punch List (QS-060)
All Personal Lock-out Locks have been Removed when work is Complete

TESTED /INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 2 May 9, 2006 QC-501 R2 Maintenance Job Checklist.doc Page 1 of 1
 Cable / Conductor Verification QC-548
CONTRACT# CLIENT / PROJECT SYSTEM

JOB# CWP

CLIENT REF:
Mark “N/A” where Not Applicable
Cable/Conductor Verification Identification
From (Source) To (Equipment)
Designation Continuity *Megger Conductor Cable

TESTING INFO: (NETA 2003)

Cable Rating 120v – 300v 600v – 1000v > 1000v – < 5000v 5000v +
Test Voltage 500 volts 1000 volts 5000 volts Requires Hy-Pot
*Acceptance Criteria 25 Megohms 100 Megohms 500 Megohms 1000 Megohms

OTHER INSPECTIONS / INFO:

All Cables Properly Supported All Connectors Tight
Conduit Systems Installed as per Spec Conduit Fill as per CEC

Drawings are Red-Lined as per Installation

Deficiencies and Incomplete Work Identified on Punch List (QS-060)

NOTES:

TESTED /INSPECTED BY CHEMCO QC CLIENT

NAME: NAME: NAME:
SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE: SIGNATURE:
DATE: DATE: DATE:
Revision 1 May 9, 2006 QC-548 R1 Cable & Conductor Verification.doc Page 1 of 1